Panasonic KX-TGP5XX Administration Guide

Panasonic KX-TGP5XX Administration Guide
Administrator Guide
SIP Cordless Phone
Model No.
KX-TGP500/KX-TGP550
KX-TGP551(PHV exclusive model)
Thank you for purchasing a Panasonic product.
Please read this guide before using the unit and save it for future reference.
Document Version: 2012-03
Introduction
Introduction
This Administrator Guide provides detailed information on the configuration and management of this unit. This
Administrator Guide is available on the Panasonic Web site at:
http://panasonic.net/pcc/support/sipphone/
Audience
This Administrator Guide contains explanations about the installation, maintenance, and management of the
unit and is aimed at network administrators and phone system dealers.
Technical descriptions are included in this guide. Prior knowledge of networking and VoIP (Voice over Internet
Protocol) is required.
Related Documentation
Related documentation includes the Quick Guide and the User Guide. Refer to these guides when needed.
• Quick Guide: Explains basic information about the installation and operation of the unit. This guide is
provided with the unit or on the Panasonic Web site at:
http://panasonic.net/pcc/support/sipphone/
• User Guide: Explains necessary information for end users to operate and customize the unit. This guide
is provided on the Panasonic Web site at:
http://panasonic.net/pcc/support/sipphone/
Technical Support
When technical support is required, contact your phone system dealer.
Trademarks
•
•
•
•
Microsoft, Excel, Internet Explorer, Outlook, Windows, and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks
or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or both.
All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners.
Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
NOTES
•
•
2
The screen shots shown in this guide are provided for reference only, and may differ from the screens
displayed on your PC.
The languages of messages displayed on the unit may differ depending on the country/area of use.
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1 Initial Setup .............................................................................................15
1.1
Setup ................................................................................................................................16
1.1.1
Factory Defaults .............................................................................................................16
1.1.2
Language Selection for the Unit .....................................................................................16
1.1.3
Basic Network Setup ......................................................................................................16
1.1.4
Overview of Programming ..............................................................................................19
1.1.5
Pre-provisioning .............................................................................................................19
1.1.5.1
What is Pre-provisioning? ............................................................................................19
1.1.5.2
Pre-provisioning when Setting Static IP Addresses ....................................................20
1.1.5.3
Server for Pre-provisioning ..........................................................................................21
1.1.5.4
Pre-provisioning Setting Example ...............................................................................21
1.1.6
Provisioning ....................................................................................................................23
1.1.6.1
What is Provisioning? ..................................................................................................23
1.1.6.2
Protocols for Provisioning ............................................................................................23
1.1.6.3
Configuration File ........................................................................................................23
1.1.6.4
Downloading Configuration Files .................................................................................25
1.1.6.5
Provisioning Server Setting Example ..........................................................................26
1.1.6.6
Encryption ....................................................................................................................27
1.1.7
Web User Interface Programming ..................................................................................29
1.1.7.1
Password for Web User Interface Programming .........................................................29
1.1.7.2
Changing the Language for Web User Interface Programming ..................................29
1.1.8
Phone User Interface Programming ...............................................................................30
1.1.8.1
Changing the Language for Phone User Interface Programming ...............................30
1.1.9
Priority of Setting Methods .............................................................................................30
1.1.10
Other Network Settings ..................................................................................................30
1.1.10.1
Firewall and Router Setup ...........................................................................................30
1.1.10.2
NAT (Network Address Translation) Setup .................................................................31
1.1.10.3
Global Address Detection ............................................................................................32
1.2
Reset and Firmware Update ...........................................................................................33
1.2.1
Reset ..............................................................................................................................33
1.2.1.1
Resetting the Network Settings (IP Reset) ..................................................................33
1.2.1.2
Resetting the Settings Made through the Web User Interface (Reset Web
Settings) ......................................................................................................................34
1.2.2
Firmware Update ............................................................................................................34
2 Phone User Interface Programming .....................................................35
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.6
2.1.7
Phone User Interface Programming ..............................................................................36
Phone User Interface Feature List and Direct Commands .............................................36
Speed/Duplex Settings ...................................................................................................36
VLAN Settings (KX-TGP55x only) ..................................................................................37
IP Reset ..........................................................................................................................38
Terminal Number Settings ..............................................................................................39
Reset Web ID/Password ................................................................................................40
HTTP Authentication Settings ........................................................................................40
3 Web User Interface Programming ........................................................43
3.1
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.3
3.3.1
Web User Interface Setting List .....................................................................................44
Programming Instructions .............................................................................................52
Before Accessing the Web User Interface .....................................................................52
Accessing the Web User Interface .................................................................................54
Status ...............................................................................................................................60
Version Information ........................................................................................................61
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
3
Table of Contents
3.3.1.1
3.3.2
3.3.2.1
3.3.3
3.3.3.1
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.1.1
3.4.1.2
3.4.1.3
3.4.2
3.4.2.1
3.4.2.2
3.4.3
3.4.3.1
3.4.3.2
3.4.3.3
4
Version Information .....................................................................................................61
Model ........................................................................................................................61
Operating BANK .......................................................................................................61
IPL Version ...............................................................................................................61
Firmware Version ......................................................................................................61
Network Status ...............................................................................................................62
Network Status ............................................................................................................62
MAC Address ............................................................................................................62
Ethernet Link Status (LAN Port) ................................................................................62
Ethernet Link Status (PC Port) (KX-TGP55x only) ...................................................62
Connection Mode ......................................................................................................63
IP Address ................................................................................................................63
Subnet Mask .............................................................................................................63
Default Gateway .......................................................................................................63
DNS1 ........................................................................................................................63
DNS2 ........................................................................................................................64
VoIP Status ....................................................................................................................64
VoIP Status ..................................................................................................................64
Line No. .....................................................................................................................64
Phone Number ..........................................................................................................64
VoIP Status ...............................................................................................................65
Network ............................................................................................................................65
Basic Network Settings ..................................................................................................65
Connection Mode ........................................................................................................66
Connection Mode ......................................................................................................66
DHCP Settings ............................................................................................................66
Host Name ................................................................................................................66
Domain Name Server ...............................................................................................67
Static Settings ..............................................................................................................67
Static IP Address ......................................................................................................67
Subnet Mask .............................................................................................................68
Default Gateway .......................................................................................................68
DNS1 ........................................................................................................................68
DNS2 ........................................................................................................................69
Ethernet Port Settings ....................................................................................................69
Link Speed/Duplex Mode ............................................................................................69
LAN Port ...................................................................................................................69
PC Port (KX-TGP55x only) .......................................................................................70
VLAN Settings .............................................................................................................70
Enable VLAN ............................................................................................................70
IP Phone (VLAN ID) ..................................................................................................70
IP Phone (Priority) .....................................................................................................71
PC (VLAN ID) (KX-TGP55x only) .............................................................................71
PC (Priority) (KX-TGP55x only) ................................................................................71
HTTP Client Settings ......................................................................................................72
HTTP Client Settings ...................................................................................................72
HTTP Version ...........................................................................................................72
HTTP User Agent ......................................................................................................72
HTTP Authentication ...................................................................................................73
Authentication ID .......................................................................................................73
Authentication Password ..........................................................................................73
Proxy Server Settings ..................................................................................................73
Enable Proxy .............................................................................................................73
Proxy Server Address ...............................................................................................73
Proxy Server Port ......................................................................................................74
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
Table of Contents
3.4.4
3.4.4.1
3.4.4.2
3.4.5
3.4.5.1
3.4.5.2
3.4.5.3
3.5
3.5.1
3.5.1.1
3.5.2
3.5.2.1
3.5.3
3.5.3.1
3.5.4
3.5.4.1
3.5.5
3.5.5.1
3.5.5.2
3.5.5.3
3.5.5.4
3.5.5.5
3.5.5.6
3.6
3.6.1
3.6.1.1
3.6.1.2
Global Address Detection ...............................................................................................74
Global Address Detection ............................................................................................74
Detection Method ......................................................................................................74
Detection Interval ......................................................................................................75
STUN Server ...............................................................................................................75
STUN Server Address ..............................................................................................75
STUN Server Port .....................................................................................................75
Static NAPT Settings ......................................................................................................75
Global IP Address ........................................................................................................76
Global IP Address .....................................................................................................76
Enable Global IP Address Usage per Line ..................................................................76
Line 1–Line 8 ............................................................................................................76
External RTP Port ........................................................................................................77
Channel 1–3 ..............................................................................................................77
System .............................................................................................................................77
Web Language ...............................................................................................................77
Web Language ............................................................................................................78
Language ..................................................................................................................78
Administrator Password .................................................................................................78
Change Administrator Password .................................................................................78
New Password ..........................................................................................................78
Confirm New Password ............................................................................................79
Change User Password .................................................................................................79
Change User Password ...............................................................................................79
New Password ..........................................................................................................79
Confirm New Password ............................................................................................80
Web Server Settings ......................................................................................................80
Web Server Settings ....................................................................................................80
Web Server Port .......................................................................................................80
Port Close Timer .......................................................................................................81
Time Adjust Settings ......................................................................................................81
Synchronization ...........................................................................................................82
Enable Synchronization by NTP ...............................................................................82
Synchronization Interval ............................................................................................82
Time Server .................................................................................................................82
NTP Server Address .................................................................................................82
Time Zone ...................................................................................................................82
Time Zone .................................................................................................................82
Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time) .........................................................................83
Enable DST (Enable Summer Time) ........................................................................83
DST Offset (Summer Time Offset) ............................................................................83
Start Day and Time of DST (Start Day and Time of Summer Time) ...........................83
Month ........................................................................................................................83
Day of Week .............................................................................................................83
Time ..........................................................................................................................84
End Day and Time of DST (End Day and Time of Summer Time) ..............................84
Month ........................................................................................................................84
Day of Week .............................................................................................................85
Time ..........................................................................................................................86
VoIP ..................................................................................................................................86
SIP Settings ....................................................................................................................86
SIP Setting ...................................................................................................................86
SIP User Agent .........................................................................................................86
Transport Protocol for SIP ...........................................................................................87
Transport Protocol ....................................................................................................87
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
5
Table of Contents
3.6.2
3.6.2.1
3.6.2.2
3.6.2.3
3.6.2.4
3.6.2.5
3.6.2.6
3.6.2.7
3.6.2.8
3.6.2.9
3.6.2.10
3.6.2.11
3.6.2.12
3.6.3
3.6.3.1
3.6.4
3.6.4.1
3.6.4.2
3.6.4.3
3.6.4.4
6
SIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 8] .........................................................................................88
Phone Number ............................................................................................................88
Phone Number ..........................................................................................................88
Line ID .......................................................................................................................89
SIP Server ...................................................................................................................89
Registrar Server Address ..........................................................................................89
Registrar Server Port ................................................................................................89
Proxy Server Address ...............................................................................................89
Proxy Server Port ......................................................................................................89
Presence Server Address .........................................................................................90
Presence Server Port ................................................................................................90
Outbound Proxy Server ...............................................................................................90
Outbound Proxy Server Address ..............................................................................90
Outbound Proxy Server Port .....................................................................................90
SIP Service Domain ....................................................................................................91
Service Domain .........................................................................................................91
SIP Source Port ...........................................................................................................91
Source Port ...............................................................................................................91
SIP Authentication .......................................................................................................91
Authentication ID .......................................................................................................91
Authentication Password ..........................................................................................92
DNS .............................................................................................................................92
Enable DNS SRV lookup ..........................................................................................92
SRV lookup Prefix for UDP .......................................................................................92
SRV lookup Prefix for TCP .......................................................................................93
Timer Settings .............................................................................................................93
T1 Timer ....................................................................................................................93
T2 Timer ....................................................................................................................93
INVITE Retry Count ..................................................................................................93
Non-INVITE Retry Count ..........................................................................................94
Quality of Service (QoS) ..............................................................................................94
SIP Packet QoS (DSCP) ...........................................................................................94
SIP extensions .............................................................................................................95
Supports 100rel (RFC 3262) .....................................................................................95
Supports Session Timer (RFC 4028) ........................................................................95
Keep Alive ...................................................................................................................95
Keep Alive Interval ....................................................................................................95
Security ........................................................................................................................96
Enable SSAF (SIP Source Address Filter) ................................................................96
VoIP Settings ..................................................................................................................96
RTP Settings ...............................................................................................................96
RTP Packet Time ......................................................................................................96
Minimum RTP Port Number ......................................................................................97
Maximum RTP Port Number .....................................................................................97
VoIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 8] .......................................................................................98
Quality of Service (QoS) ..............................................................................................98
RTP Packet QoS (DSCP) .........................................................................................98
Statistical Information ..................................................................................................99
RTCP Interval ...........................................................................................................99
Jitter Buffer ..................................................................................................................99
Maximum Delay ........................................................................................................99
Minimum Delay .......................................................................................................100
Initial Delay .............................................................................................................100
DTMF .........................................................................................................................100
DTMF Type .............................................................................................................100
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
Table of Contents
3.6.4.5
3.6.4.6
3.7
3.7.1
3.7.1.1
3.7.1.2
3.7.2
3.7.2.1
3.7.2.2
3.7.2.3
3.7.3
3.7.3.1
3.7.3.2
3.7.3.3
3.7.3.4
3.7.4
3.7.4.1
Telephone-event Payload Type ..............................................................................101
Call Hold ....................................................................................................................101
Supports RFC 2543 (c=0.0.0.0) ..............................................................................101
CODEC Settings ........................................................................................................101
First CODEC ...........................................................................................................101
Second CODEC ......................................................................................................102
Third CODEC ..........................................................................................................102
Fourth CODEC ........................................................................................................103
Fifth CODEC ...........................................................................................................103
Telephone ......................................................................................................................104
Multi Number Settings ..................................................................................................104
Grouping Handset/Handset selection for receiving calls ...........................................105
Line No. ...................................................................................................................105
Phone Number ........................................................................................................105
Handset No. ............................................................................................................106
Base (KX-TGP55x only) ..........................................................................................106
Handset and Line No. selection for making calls .......................................................106
Handset No. ............................................................................................................106
Base (KX-TGP55x only) ..........................................................................................106
Line No. ...................................................................................................................107
Default .....................................................................................................................107
Call Control ...................................................................................................................107
Call Control ................................................................................................................108
Send SUBSCRIBE to Voice Mail Server ................................................................108
Conference Server Address ...................................................................................108
Inter-digit Timeout ...................................................................................................108
Emergency Call Phone Numbers ..............................................................................109
1–5 ..........................................................................................................................109
Call Rejection Phone Numbers .................................................................................109
1–30 ........................................................................................................................109
Call Control [Line 1]–[Line 8] ........................................................................................110
Call Control ................................................................................................................110
Display Name ..........................................................................................................110
Enable Privacy Mode ..............................................................................................110
Voice Mail Access Number .....................................................................................111
Enable Shared Call .................................................................................................111
Unique ID of Shared Call ........................................................................................112
Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward .......................................................112
Dial Plan ....................................................................................................................112
Dial Plan ..................................................................................................................112
Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match ...................................................................113
Call Features .............................................................................................................113
Block Caller ID ........................................................................................................113
Block Anonymous Call ............................................................................................113
Do Not Disturb ........................................................................................................114
Call Forward ..............................................................................................................114
Unconditional (Enable Call Forward) ......................................................................114
Unconditional (Phone Number) ..............................................................................115
Busy (Enable Call Forward) ....................................................................................115
Busy (Phone Number) ............................................................................................116
No Answer (Enable Call Forward) ..........................................................................116
No Answer (Phone Number) ...................................................................................117
No Answer (Ring Count) .........................................................................................117
Tone Settings ...............................................................................................................118
Dial Tone ...................................................................................................................118
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
7
Table of Contents
3.7.4.2
3.7.4.3
3.7.4.4
3.7.4.5
3.7.4.6
3.7.5
3.7.5.1
3.7.6
3.7.6.1
3.8
3.8.1
3.8.1.1
3.8.2
3.8.2.1
3.8.3
3.8.3.1
3.8.4
3.8.5
Tone Frequencies ...................................................................................................118
Tone Timings ..........................................................................................................118
Busy Tone .................................................................................................................119
Tone Frequencies ...................................................................................................119
Tone Timings ..........................................................................................................119
Ringing Tone .............................................................................................................119
Tone Frequencies ...................................................................................................119
Tone Timings ..........................................................................................................120
Stutter Tone ...............................................................................................................120
Tone Frequencies ...................................................................................................120
Tone Timings ..........................................................................................................120
Reorder Tone ............................................................................................................120
Tone Frequencies ...................................................................................................120
Tone Timings ..........................................................................................................121
Howler Tone ..............................................................................................................121
Tone Frequencies ...................................................................................................121
Tone Timings ..........................................................................................................121
Start Time ...............................................................................................................121
Import Phonebook ........................................................................................................121
Import Phonebook .....................................................................................................122
Handset (or Base Unit) ...........................................................................................122
File Name ................................................................................................................122
Export Phonebook ........................................................................................................123
Export Phonebook .....................................................................................................123
Handset (or Base Unit) ...........................................................................................123
Maintenance ..................................................................................................................124
Firmware Maintenance .................................................................................................124
Firmware Maintenance ..............................................................................................124
Enable Firmware Update ........................................................................................124
Update Type ...........................................................................................................124
Firmware File URL ..................................................................................................125
Local Firmware Update ................................................................................................125
Local Firmware Update .............................................................................................125
Encryption ...............................................................................................................125
File Name ................................................................................................................126
Provisioning Maintenance ............................................................................................126
Provisioning Maintenance .........................................................................................126
Enable Provisioning ................................................................................................126
Standard File URL ..................................................................................................127
Product File URL .....................................................................................................127
Master File URL ......................................................................................................127
Cyclic Auto Resync .................................................................................................128
Resync Interval .......................................................................................................128
Header Value for Resync Event .............................................................................128
Reset to Defaults ..........................................................................................................128
Restart ..........................................................................................................................129
4 Configuration File Programming ........................................................131
4.1
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.3
4.3.1
8
Configuration File Parameter List ...............................................................................132
General Information on the Configuration Files ........................................................138
Configuration File Specifications ..................................................................................138
Configuration File Parameters ......................................................................................140
Characters Available for String Values .........................................................................140
System Settings ............................................................................................................141
Login Account Settings .................................................................................................141
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
Table of Contents
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
4.3.5
4.4
4.4.1
ADMIN_ID .................................................................................................................141
ADMIN_PASS ...........................................................................................................141
USER_ID ...................................................................................................................142
USER_PASS .............................................................................................................142
System Time Settings ..................................................................................................142
TIME_ZONE ..............................................................................................................142
DST_ENABLE ...........................................................................................................143
DST_OFFSET ...........................................................................................................143
DST_START_MONTH ...............................................................................................144
DST_START_ORDINAL_DAY ..................................................................................144
DST_START_DAY_OF_WEEK .................................................................................144
DST_START_TIME ...................................................................................................145
DST_STOP_MONTH ................................................................................................145
DST_STOP_ORDINAL_DAY ....................................................................................145
DST_STOP_DAY_OF_WEEK ...................................................................................145
DST_STOP_TIME .....................................................................................................146
Syslog Settings .............................................................................................................146
SYSLOG_EVENT_SIP ..............................................................................................146
SYSLOG_EVENT_CFG ............................................................................................147
SYSLOG_EVENT_VOIP ...........................................................................................147
SYSLOG_EVENT_TEL .............................................................................................147
SYSLOG_ADDR ........................................................................................................147
SYSLOG_PORT ........................................................................................................148
SYSLOG_RTPSMLY_INTVL_[1–8] ...........................................................................148
Firmware Update Settings ............................................................................................148
FIRM_UPGRADE_ENABLE ......................................................................................148
FIRM_VER_EUDECT ................................................................................................148
FIRM_VER_USDECT ................................................................................................149
FIRM_UPGRADE_AUTO ..........................................................................................149
FIRM_FILE_PATH .....................................................................................................149
Provisioning Settings ....................................................................................................150
OPTION66_ENABLE .................................................................................................150
OPTION66_REBOOT ................................................................................................151
PROVISION_ENABLE ..............................................................................................151
CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH ................................................................................151
CFG_PRODUCT_FILE_PATH ..................................................................................152
CFG_MASTER_FILE_PATH .....................................................................................153
CFG_FILE_KEY1 ......................................................................................................154
CFG_FILE_KEY2 ......................................................................................................155
CFG_FILE_KEY3 ......................................................................................................155
CFG_FILE_KEY_LENGTH ........................................................................................155
CFG_CYCLIC ............................................................................................................155
CFG_CYCLIC_INTVL ................................................................................................156
CFG_RTRY_INTVL ...................................................................................................156
CFG_RESYNC_TIME ...............................................................................................156
CFG_RESYNC_FROM_SIP ......................................................................................157
Network Settings ...........................................................................................................157
IP Settings ....................................................................................................................157
CONNECTION_TYPE ...............................................................................................157
HOST_NAME ............................................................................................................158
DHCP_DNS_ENABLE ...............................................................................................158
STATIC_IP_ADDRESS .............................................................................................158
STATIC_SUBNET .....................................................................................................159
STATIC_GATEWAY ..................................................................................................159
USER_DNS1_ADDR .................................................................................................160
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
9
Table of Contents
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.4
4.4.5
4.4.6
4.4.7
4.5
4.5.1
4.5.2
4.5.3
10
USER_DNS2_ADDR .................................................................................................160
DNS Settings ................................................................................................................160
DNS_QRY_PRLL ......................................................................................................160
DNS_PRIORITY ........................................................................................................161
DNS1_ADDR .............................................................................................................161
DNS2_ADDR .............................................................................................................161
Ethernet Port Settings ..................................................................................................162
VLAN_ENABLE .........................................................................................................162
VLAN_ID_IP_PHONE ...............................................................................................162
VLAN_PRI_IP_PHONE .............................................................................................162
VLAN_ID_PC (KX-TGP55x only) ..............................................................................163
VLAN_PRI_PC (KX-TGP55x only) ............................................................................163
HTTP Settings ..............................................................................................................163
HTTPD_PORTOPEN_AUTO ....................................................................................163
HTTP_VER ................................................................................................................164
HTTP_USER_AGENT ...............................................................................................164
HTTP_SSL_VERIFY .................................................................................................165
CFG_ROOT_CERTIFICATE_PATH ..........................................................................165
Time Adjust Settings ....................................................................................................166
NTP_ADDR ...............................................................................................................166
TIME_SYNC_INTVL ..................................................................................................166
TIME_QUERY_INTVL ...............................................................................................166
STUN Settings ..............................................................................................................166
STUN_SERV_ADDR .................................................................................................166
STUN_SERV_PORT .................................................................................................167
STUN_2NDSERV_ADDR ..........................................................................................167
STUN_2NDSERV_PORT ..........................................................................................167
Miscellaneous Network Settings ..................................................................................167
NW_SETTING_ENABLE ...........................................................................................167
CUSTOM_WEB_PAGE .............................................................................................168
Telephone Settings .......................................................................................................168
Multi Number Settings ..................................................................................................168
INCOMING_CALL_GROUP_[1–8] ............................................................................168
OUTGOING_CALL_LINE_HS[1–6] ...........................................................................169
OUTGOING_CALL_LINE_BS ...................................................................................169
DEFAULT_LINE_SELECT_HS[1–6] .........................................................................170
DEFAULT_LINE_SELECT_BS .................................................................................170
Call Control Settings .....................................................................................................171
CONFERENCE_SERVER_ADDRESS .....................................................................171
EMERGENCY_CALL[1–5] ........................................................................................171
FIRSTDIGIT_TIM .......................................................................................................172
INTDIGIT_TIM ...........................................................................................................172
VM_SUBSCRIBE_ENABLE ......................................................................................172
Tone Settings ...............................................................................................................172
DIAL_TONE_FRQ .....................................................................................................172
DIAL_TONE_TIMING ................................................................................................173
BUSY_TONE_FRQ ...................................................................................................173
BUSY_TONE_TIMING ..............................................................................................173
RINGING_TONE_FRQ ..............................................................................................174
RINGING_TONE_TIMING .........................................................................................174
STT_TONE_FRQ ......................................................................................................174
STT_TONE_TIMING .................................................................................................174
REORDER_TONE_FRQ ...........................................................................................175
REORDER_TONE_TIMING ......................................................................................175
HOWLER_TONE_FRQ .............................................................................................175
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
Table of Contents
4.6
4.6.1
4.6.2
4.6.3
4.7
4.7.1
4.7.2
HOWLER_TONE_TIMING ........................................................................................175
HOWLER_START_TIME ..........................................................................................176
BELL_CORE_PATTERN1_TIMING ..........................................................................176
BELL_CORE_PATTERN2_TIMING ..........................................................................176
BELL_CORE_PATTERN3_TIMING ..........................................................................176
BELL_CORE_PATTERN4_TIMING ..........................................................................177
BELL_CORE_PATTERN5_TIMING ..........................................................................177
VoIP Settings .................................................................................................................177
Codec Settings .............................................................................................................177
SDP_CODEC[0–4]_[1–8] ..........................................................................................177
SDP_CKRTE[0–4]_[1–8] ...........................................................................................178
SDP_PARAM[0–4]_[1–8] ..........................................................................................178
SDP_PTYPE[0–4]_[1–8] ...........................................................................................178
CODEC_G711_REQ .................................................................................................179
CODEC_G729_PARAM ............................................................................................179
RTP Settings ................................................................................................................180
TOS_RTP_[1–8] ........................................................................................................180
RTCP_INTVL_[1–8] ...................................................................................................181
MAX_DELAY_[1–8] ...................................................................................................181
MIN_DELAY_[1–8] ....................................................................................................182
NOM_DELAY_[1–8] ..................................................................................................182
RTP_PORT_MIN .......................................................................................................183
RTP_PORT_MAX ......................................................................................................183
RTP_PTIME ..............................................................................................................183
Miscellaneous VoIP Settings ........................................................................................184
OUTBANDDTMF_[1–8] .............................................................................................184
OUTBANDDTMF_VOL ..............................................................................................184
TELEVENT_PTYPE_[1–8] ........................................................................................184
RFC2543_HOLD_ENABLE_[1–8] .............................................................................185
Line Settings ..................................................................................................................185
Call Control Settings .....................................................................................................185
VM_NUMBER_[1–8] ..................................................................................................185
DIAL_PLAN_[1–8] .....................................................................................................185
DIAL_PLAN_NOT_MATCH_ENABLE_[1–8] .............................................................186
SHARED_CALL_ENABLE_[1–8] ..............................................................................186
SHARED_USER_ID_[1–8] ........................................................................................187
SYNCHRONIZATION_ENABLE_[1–8] ......................................................................187
PRIVACY_MODE_[1–8] ............................................................................................188
SIP Settings ..................................................................................................................188
SIP_USER_AGENT ..................................................................................................188
SIP_AUTHID_[1–8] ...................................................................................................188
SIP_PASS_[1–8] .......................................................................................................189
SIP_SRC_PORT_[1–8] .............................................................................................189
SIP_PRXY_ADDR_[1–8] ...........................................................................................189
SIP_PRXY_PORT_[1–8] ...........................................................................................190
SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_[1–8] ........................................................................................190
SIP_RGSTR_PORT_[1–8] ........................................................................................190
SIP_SVCDOMAIN_[1–8] ...........................................................................................190
REG_EXPIRE_TIME_[1–8] .......................................................................................191
REG_INTERVAL_RATE_[1–8] ..................................................................................191
SIP_SESSION_TIME_[1–8] ......................................................................................191
TOS_SIP_[1–8] .........................................................................................................192
SIP_2NDPROXY_ADDR_[1–8] .................................................................................193
SIP_2NDPROXY_PORT_[1–8] .................................................................................194
SIP_2NDRGSTR_ADDR_[1–8] .................................................................................194
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
11
Table of Contents
SIP_2NDRGSTR_PORT_[1–8] .................................................................................194
SIP_TIMER_T1_[1–8] ...............................................................................................194
SIP_TIMER_T2_[1–8] ...............................................................................................195
INVITE_RTXN_[1–8] .................................................................................................195
OTHER_RTXN_[1–8] ................................................................................................195
SIP_FOVR_NORSP_[1–8] ........................................................................................196
SIP_FOVR_MAX_[1–8] .............................................................................................196
SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_[1–8] ........................................................................................196
SIP_UDP_SRV_PREFIX_[1–8] .................................................................................197
SIP_TCP_SRV_PREFIX_[1–8] .................................................................................197
SIP_100REL_ENABLE_[1–8] ....................................................................................198
SIP_18X_RTX_INTVL_[1–8] .....................................................................................198
SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_[1–8] ........................................................................................198
SIP_PRSNC_PORT_[1–8] ........................................................................................199
SIP_2NDPRSNC_ADDR_[1–8] .................................................................................199
SIP_2NDPRSNC_PORT_[1–8] .................................................................................199
USE_DEL_REG_OPEN_[1–8] ..................................................................................199
USE_DEL_REG_CLOSE_[1–8] ................................................................................200
PORT_PUNCH_INTVL_[1–8] ....................................................................................200
SIP_SUBS_EXPIRE_[1–8] ........................................................................................200
SUB_RTX_INTVL_[1–8] ............................................................................................201
REG_RTX_INTVL_[1–8] ...........................................................................................201
SIP_P_PREFERRED_ID_[1–8] .................................................................................201
SIP_PRIVACY_[1–8] .................................................................................................202
ADD_USER_PHONE_[1–8] ......................................................................................202
SDP_USER_ID_[1–8] ................................................................................................202
SUB_INTERVAL_RATE_[1–8] ..................................................................................202
SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_[1–8] ................................................................................203
SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_[1–8] .................................................................................203
SIP_TRANSPORT_[1–8] ...........................................................................................203
SIP_ANM_DISPNAME_[1–8] ....................................................................................204
SIP_ANM_USERNAME_[1–8] ..................................................................................204
SIP_ANM_HOSTNAME_[1–8] ..................................................................................204
SIP_DETECT_SSAF_[1–8] .......................................................................................205
SIP_RCV_DET_HEADER_[1–8] ...............................................................................205
SIP_CONTACT_ON_ACK_[1–8] ...............................................................................206
PHONE_NUMBER_[1–8] ..........................................................................................206
LINE_ID_[1–8] ...........................................................................................................206
DISPLAY_NAME_[1–8] .............................................................................................207
INTERNATIONAL_ACCESS_CODE .........................................................................207
SIP_REQURI_PORT_[1–8] .......................................................................................207
SIP_ADD_RPORT_[1–8] ...........................................................................................208
SIP_SESSION_METHOD_[1–8] ...............................................................................208
VOICE_MESSAGE_AVAILABLE ..............................................................................208
5 Useful Telephone Functions ...............................................................211
5.1
5.1.1
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.3
5.3.1
12
Line Settings for Base Unit and Handset ....................................................................212
Multi Number Settings ..................................................................................................212
Phonebook Import and Export .....................................................................................213
Import/Export Operation ...............................................................................................216
Editing with Microsoft Excel ..........................................................................................217
Exporting Data from Microsoft Outlook ........................................................................219
Dial Plan .........................................................................................................................219
Dial Plan Settings .........................................................................................................220
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
Table of Contents
6 Firmware Update ..................................................................................225
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
Firmware Server Setup .................................................................................................226
Firmware Update Settings ............................................................................................226
Executing Firmware Update .........................................................................................227
Local Firmware Update .................................................................................................227
7 Troubleshooting ...................................................................................229
7.1
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................230
8 Configuration File Examples ...............................................................237
8.1
8.2
8.2.1
8.3
Simplified Example of the Configuration File .............................................................238
Comprehensive Example of the Configuration File ...................................................239
Codec Settings for G729A only ....................................................................................247
Example with Incorrect Descriptions ..........................................................................248
9 Open Source Software .........................................................................251
10 Appendix ...............................................................................................259
10.1
10.1.1
10.1.2
10.1.3
10.1.4
10.1.5
10.1.6
10.1.7
Revision History ............................................................................................................260
KX-TGP500/KX-TGP550 Software File Version 12.04/22.04 or later ..........................260
KX-TGP500/KX-TGP550 Software File Version 12.06/22.06 or later ..........................260
KX-TGP500/KX-TGP550 Software File Version 12.10/22.10 or later ..........................260
KX-TGP551 Software File Version 12.12 or later .........................................................260
KX-TGP500/KX-TGP550 Software File Version 12.17/22.17 or later ..........................261
KX-TGP500/KX-TGP550 Software File Version 12.29/22.29 or later ..........................261
KX-TGP500/KX-TGP550 Software File Version 12.53/22.53 or later ..........................261
Index............................................................................................................263
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
13
Table of Contents
14
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
Section 1
Initial Setup
This section provides an overview of the setup
procedures for the unit.
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
15
1.1.3 Basic Network Setup
1.1 Setup
1.1.1 Factory Defaults
Many of the settings for this unit have been configured before the unit ships.
Where possible, these settings are configured with the optimum or most common values for the setting. For
example, the port number of the SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) server is set to "5060".
However, many of the settings, such as the address of the SIP server or the phone number, have not been
pre-configured, and they must be modified depending on the usage environment. If the port number of the SIP
server is not "5060", the value of this setting must be changed.
This unit thus will not function properly using only the factory default settings. The settings for each feature
must be configured according to the environment in which the unit is used.
1.1.2 Language Selection for the Unit
You can change the language used on the LCD. Because the language settings for the LCD of the base unit
and handsets are not synchronized, you must set the languages individually for the base unit and each handset.
In addition, various settings can be configured by using the Web user interface on a PC connected on the same
network (® see Section 3 Web User Interface Programming). You can select the language for the Web
user interface. You must set the language setting for the Web user interface separately from that of the base
unit and handsets.
The available languages may differ depending on the country/area of use.
Note
•
•
To select the display language for the base unit or handsets, refer to the User Guide on the Panasonic
Web site (® see Introduction).
To select the display language for the Web user interface, see 3.5.1 Web Language.
1.1.3 Basic Network Setup
This section describes the basic network settings that you must configure before you can use the unit on your
network.
You must configure the following network settings:
• TCP/IP settings (DHCP [Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol] or static IP address assignment)
• DNS server settings
TCP/IP Settings (DHCP or Static IP Address Assignment)
A unique IP address must be assigned to the unit so that it can communicate on the network. How you assign
an IP address depends on your network environment. This unit supports the following 2 methods for assigning
an IP address:
Obtaining an IP Address Automatically from a DHCP Server
You can configure the unit to automatically obtain its IP address when it starts up from a DHCP server running
on your network. With this method, the system can efficiently manage a limited number of IP addresses. Note
that the IP address assigned to the unit may vary every time the unit is started up.
For details about the DHCP server, consult your network administrator.
16
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
1.1.3 Basic Network Setup
Using a Static IP Address Specified by Your Network Administrator
If IP addresses for network devices are specified individually by your network administrator, you will need to
manually configure settings such as the IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, and DNS servers from
either the base unit or one of the handsets.
For details about the required network settings, consult your network administrator.
DNS Server Settings
You can configure the unit to use 2 DNS servers: a primary DNS server and a secondary DNS server. If you
set both DNS servers, the primary DNS server receives priority over the secondary DNS server. If the primary
DNS server returns no reply, the secondary DNS server will be used.
For details about configuring the DNS server settings using the base unit and handsets, or using the Web user
interface, see Configuring the Network Settings of the Unit in this section.
DNS Priority Using Configuration File
The setting for DNS server(s) may be configured using the configuration files by your phone system dealer
(® see "DNS1_ADDR" and "DNS2_ADDR" in 4.4.2 DNS Settings).
• If the DNS server addresses specified in the configuration file (® see "DNS_PRIORITY" in 4.4.2 DNS
Settings) are given priority, the unit first sends its requests to those DNS servers. If a match is not found,
the unit then sends its request to the DNS servers that were specified by the DHCP server, or the primary/
secondary DNS servers that were specified on the unit or via the Web user interface.
• If the DNS servers that were specified by the DHCP server, or the primary/secondary DNS servers that
were specified on the unit or via the Web user interface are given priority, the unit first sends its requests
to those DNS servers. If a match is not found, the unit then sends its request to the DNS servers that were
specified using the configuration file.
Configuring the Network Settings of the Unit
The following procedures explain how to change the network settings via each interface.
For details about the individual network settings that can be configured via the base unit and handsets, or using
the Web user interface, refer to the Quick Guide on the Panasonic Web site (® see Introduction) or see
3.4.1 Basic Network Settings.
Configuring Settings from the Base Unit (KX-TGP55x only)/Handset
To configure network settings automatically
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in English alphabet
1. Base unit: [MENU] (middle soft key) ® [#][5][0][0]
Handset: [MENU] (center of joystick) ® [#][5][0][0]
2. [ ]/[ ]: Select "On" for DHCP ® [SAVE]
3. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Automatic" for DNS ® [SAVE]
• Select "Manual" to enter the addresses for DNS1 (primary DNS server) and, if necessary, DNS2
(secondary DNS server) manually ® [SAVE]
4. Base unit: [EXIT]
Handset: [OFF]
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
17
1.1.3 Basic Network Setup
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in symbols/pictures
(middle soft key) ® [#][5][0][0]
1. Base unit:
Handset:
(center of joystick) ® [#][5][0][0]
2. [ ]/[ ]: Select "On" for DHCP ®
3. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Automatic" for DNS ®
• Select "Manual" to enter the addresses for DNS1 (primary DNS server) and, if necessary, DNS2
(secondary DNS server) manually ®
4. Base unit: [
]
Handset: [
]
To configure network settings manually
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in English alphabet
1. Base unit: [MENU] (middle soft key) ® [#][5][0][0]
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Handset: [MENU] (center of joystick) ® [#][5][0][0]
[ ]/[ ]: Select "Off" for DHCP ® [SAVE]
Base unit: [EXIT]
Handset: [OFF]
Base unit: [MENU] (middle soft key) ® [#][5][0][1]
Handset: [MENU] (center of joystick) ® [#][5][0][1]
[ ]/[ ]: Enter the IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, DNS1 (primary DNS server), and, if
necessary, DNS2 (secondary DNS server) ® [SAVE]
Base unit: [EXIT]
Handset: [OFF]
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in symbols/pictures
1. Base unit:
(middle soft key) ® [#][5][0][0]
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Handset:
(center of joystick) ® [#][5][0][0]
[ ]/[ ]: Select "Off" for DHCP ®
Base unit: [
]
Handset: [
]
(middle soft key) ® [#][5][0][1]
Base unit:
Handset:
(center of joystick) ® [#][5][0][1]
[ ]/[ ]: Enter the IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, DNS1 (primary DNS server), and, if
necessary, DNS2 (secondary DNS server) ®
Base unit: [
]
Handset: [
]
Configuring Settings from the Web User Interface
To configure network settings automatically
1. Click the [Network] tab, and then click [Basic Network Settings].
2. Select [DHCP] for [Connection Mode].
3. Enter a host name in [Host Name].
4. Select [Receive DNS server address automatically] for [Domain Name Server].
• Select [Use the following settings] for [Domain Name Server] to enter the address for primary and
secondary DNS servers manually.
18
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
1.1.5 Pre-provisioning
To configure network settings manually
1. Click the [Network] tab, and then click [Basic Network Settings].
2. Select [Static] for [Connection Mode].
3. Enter an IP address in [Static IP Address].
4. Enter the subnet mask in [Subnet Mask].
5. Enter a default gateway address in [Default Gateway].
6. Enter the address for the primary DNS server in [DNS1].
7. If necessary, enter the address for the secondary DNS server in [DNS2].
Note
•
•
•
If your phone system dealer does not allow you these settings, you cannot change them even though
the unit shows the setting menu. Contact your phone system dealer for further information.
If you select "On" for DHCP on the unit, or you select [DHCP] for [Connection Mode] in the Web user
interface, all the settings concerning static connection will be ignored, even if they have been specified.
If you select "On" for DHCP and "Automatic" for DNS on the unit, or you select [DHCP] for
[Connection Mode] and [Receive DNS server address automatically] for [Domain Name
Server] in the Web user interface, the DNS server settings (DNS1 and DNS2) will be ignored, even if
they have been specified.
1.1.4 Overview of Programming
You can specify various settings beforehand by creating configuration files. This is called "pre-provisioning".
Once you have created the configuration files, which contain the pre-configured settings, the unit can then
download the files from a server on the Internet and configure its own settings. This is called "provisioning".
In addition, you can also configure the settings manually. To configure them manually, use the Web user
interface on a PC that is connected to the same network as the unit (Web user interface programming), or
perform setting operations on the unit (phone user interface programming).
1.1.5 Pre-provisioning
1.1.5.1 What is Pre-provisioning?
To perform pre-provisioning, you must set the IP address of a TFTP server to the DHCP server option 66 so
that the unit can acquire the TFTP server address. When the unit starts up and no configuration has been
applied, it will automatically acquire the address of the TFTP server and download the configuration file.
For details about the configuration file, see 1.1.6.3 Configuration File.
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
19
1.1.5 Pre-provisioning
For details about the settings that can be configured with the configuration files and how to specify the settings,
see Section 4 Configuration File Programming.
Factory
Preset
Phone system dealer
Pre-provisioning
Pre-provisioning data
Factory defaults
Factory defaults
Pre-provisioning can aid the installation process by allowing phone system dealers to configure beforehand
the minimum settings required to operate the unit.
For example, phone system dealers can store on the TFTP server a configuration file that contains only the
URL of a server where another configuration file is stored. This second configuration file contains settings
configured specifically for the usage environment of the user. The user will be able to start using the unit by
just connecting it to the network.
Pre-provisioning is performed only once after the unit has been shipped. Once any configuration (such as
pre-provisioning, provisioning, or Web user interface programming) has been applied, pre-provisioning will not
be performed again.
Note that the settings configured by pre-provisioning cannot be restored once it has been performed. If you
want to restore them, consult your phone system dealer.
Although pre-provisioning is often used to specify the location of the configuration files for provisioning, you
can configure any of the settings through pre-provisioning. The unit can be made fully operational by configuring
settings through pre-provisioning.
1.1.5.2 Pre-provisioning when Setting Static IP Addresses
To perform pre-provisioning, the unit needs to acquire the TFTP server address from option 66 on a DHCP
server. Therefore, pre-provisioning cannot be performed if you use static IP addressing on your network. If you
use static IP addressing and want to perform pre-provisioning, construct a small, separate network and connect
a DHCP and TFTP server to that network.
In addition, if option 66 of the DHCP server cannot be set, or if you are unauthorized to change this setting,
perform pre-provisioning on the separate network, and then connect the unit to the actual network.
20
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
1.1.5 Pre-provisioning
1.1.5.3 Server for Pre-provisioning
The DHCP server and TFTP server play important roles in performing pre-provisioning. This section explains
their purposes, uses, and brief descriptions.
Server
DHCP server
Purpose
Description
Used to provide the address
of a TFTP server, set in option
66 of the DHCP server, to
units that have not been
configured yet.
In option 66 of the DHCP server, specify the IP
address or FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name) of
the TFTP server.
For details, refer to the documentation for your
DHCP server.
Note
•
TFTP server
Used to store configuration
files, and is set as the access
point for downloading them
automatically.
The maximum length of FQDN text is 64
bytes.
The unit will download the configuration file "(model
name).cfg" stored in the root directory of the TFTP
server.
For example, if the model name is KX-TGP500B01,
the unit will download the configuration file "/
KX-TGP500B01.cfg".
DHCP and TFTP servers may be supplied with your operating system, provided through commercial services,
and are also distributed freely on the Internet. Use a server setup that best matches your environment.
When installing and setting up the DHCP server and TFTP server, refer to the documentation supplied with
the product. For details about connecting servers to the network and managing them, consult your network
administrator.
1.1.5.4 Pre-provisioning Setting Example
This section gives an example of how to perform pre-provisioning.
Assumptions
Description/Setting
Item
TFTP server address
192.168.0.130
Distribution directory of TFTP server
/tftproot
Model name of the unit
KX-TGP500B01
MAC address of the unit
0080F0123456
Provisioning server name (where the
configuration file used for provisioning is to be
stored)
provisioning.example.com
Distribution directory of the provisioning server
/Panasonic
File name of the configuration file used for
provisioning
Config0080F0123456.cfg
URL of the configuration file used for
provisioning
http://provisioning.example.com/Panasonic/
Config0080F0123456.cfg
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
21
1.1.5 Pre-provisioning
Prior Settings
Item
Description/Setting
DHCP server option 66
192.168.0.130
IP address range assigned by DHCP server
192.168.0.16 to 192.168.0.63
File name of the configuration file used for
pre-provisioning
KX-TGP500B01.cfg
URL of the configuration file used for
provisioning that is entered in the configuration
file
CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH="http://
provisioning.example.com/Panasonic/
Config{MAC}.cfg"
Note
•
Stored location of the configuration file on the
TFTP server
"{MAC}" is replaced by the MAC address of the
unit.
(e.g., "0080F0123456")
Configuration file "KX-TGP500B01.cfg" is stored in the
directory "/tftproot".
To set up the server for pre-provisioning
1. Start up the DHCP server and TFTP server, and configure the settings as specified above.
2. Connect the unit to the network, and turn the power on.
a. The IP address "192.168.0.16" is assigned to the unit by the DHCP server.
b. The unit acquires the TFTP server address "192.168.0.130" from the DHCP server using DHCP server
option 66.
c. The unit downloads the configuration file for pre-provisioning from the TFTP server:
tftp://192.168.0.130/KX-TGP500B01.cfg
d. The URL of the server where the configuration file for provisioning is stored (provisioning server) is set
to the unit:
http://provisioning.example.com/Panasonic/Config{MAC}.cfg
e. When pre-provisioning has completed successfully, the status LED lights in the following order:
Red ® Green ® Orange ® Red ® …
3. When the status LED lights as described in step e, turn off the unit’s power.
The unit will restart automatically depending on the configuration file programming (® see
"OPTION66_REBOOT" in 4.3.5 Provisioning Settings).
When the unit is distributed to end users and started up in real circumstances, provisioning will be
performed correctly.
Note
•
22
This example describes the case when only one unit is connected. However, multiple units can be
configured through the same procedure without changing any settings, because the MAC address is
specified by the {MAC} macro.
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
1.1.6 Provisioning
1.1.6 Provisioning
1.1.6.1 What is Provisioning?
After pre-provisioning has been performed (® see 1.1.5 Pre-provisioning), you can set up the unit
automatically by downloading the configuration file stored on the provisioning server into the unit. This is called
"provisioning".
Phone system dealer
End user
User
configuration
Provisioning
User modified data
Provisioning data
Pre-provisioning data
Pre-provisioning data
Factory defaults
Factory defaults
1.1.6.2 Protocols for Provisioning
Provisioning can be performed over HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, and TFTP. The protocol you should use differs
depending on how you will perform provisioning. Normally, HTTP, HTTPS, or FTP is used for provisioning. If
you are transmitting encrypted configuration files, it is recommended that you use HTTP. If you are transmitting
unencrypted configuration files, it is recommended that you use HTTPS. You may not be able to use FTP
depending on the conditions of the network router or the network to be used.
1.1.6.3 Configuration File
This section gives concrete examples of the functions of the configuration file and how to manage it.
The configuration file is a text file that contains the various settings that are necessary for operating the unit.
The files are normally stored on a server maintained by your phone system dealer, and will be downloaded to
the units as required. All configurable settings can be specified in the configuration file. You can ignore settings
that already have the desired values. Only change parameters as necessary.
For details about setting parameters and their descriptions, see Section 4 Configuration File
Programming and Section 8 Configuration File Examples.
Using 3 Types of Configuration Files
The unit can download up to 3 configuration files. One way to take advantage of this is by classifying the
configuration files into the following 3 types:
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
23
1.1.6 Provisioning
Type
Master configuration file
Usage
Configure settings that are common to all units, such as the SIP
server address, and the IP addresses of the DNS and NTP (Network
Time Protocol) servers managed by your phone system dealer. This
configuration file is used by all the units.
Example of the configuration file’s URL:
http://prov.example.com/Panasonic/ConfigCommon.cfg
Product configuration file
Configure settings that are required for a particular model, such as
the default setting of the privacy mode. This configuration file is used
by all the units that have the same model name.
The same number of configuration files as models being used on the
network are stored on the provisioning server, and units with the
same model name download the corresponding configuration file.
Example of the configuration file’s URL:
http://prov.example.com/Panasonic/Config{MODEL}.cfg
Note
•
Standard configuration file
When a unit requests the configuration file, "{MODEL}" is
replaced by the model name of the unit.
Configure settings that are unique to each unit, such as the phone
number, user ID, password, etc.
The same number of configuration files as units are stored on the
provisioning server, and each unit downloads the corresponding
standard configuration file.
Example of the configuration file’s URL:
http://prov.example.com/Panasonic/Config{MAC}.cfg
Note
•
When a unit requests the configuration file, "{MAC}" is
replaced by the MAC address of the unit.
Depending on the situation, you can use all 3 types of configuration files, and can also use only a standard
configuration file.
The above example shows only one possible way to use configuration files. Depending on the requirements
of your phone system dealer, there are a number of ways to use configuration files effectively.
Using 2 Types of Configuration Files
The following table shows an example of using 2 types of configuration files: a master configuration file to
configure settings common to all units, and product configuration files to configure settings common to
particular groups.
Using Product Configuration Files According to the Position Groups
You can use product configuration files for different groups or for multiple users within the same group.
Department Name
Sales
24
Administrator Guide
URL of Product Configuration File
http://prov.example.com/Panasonic/ConfigSales.cfg
Document Version
2012-03
1.1.6 Provisioning
Department Name
Planning
URL of Product Configuration File
http://prov.example.com/Panasonic/ConfigPlanning.cfg
1.1.6.4 Downloading Configuration Files
A unit downloads configuration files when it starts up, at regular intervals, and when directed to do so by the
server. In addition, you can prohibit units from downloading the configuration files. For details about the
settings, see 3.8.3 Provisioning Maintenance and 4.3.5 Provisioning Settings.
Explanation
Download Timing
Startup
The configuration files are downloaded when the unit starts up.
At regular intervals
The configuration files are downloaded periodically under the following
conditions:
• In the configuration file:
– Add the line, CFG_CYCLIC="Y".
– Set an interval (minutes) by specifying "CFG_CYCLIC_INTVL".
• In the Web user interface:
– Click the [Maintenance] tab, click [Provisioning Maintenance],
and then select [Yes] for [Cyclic Auto Resync].
– Enter an interval (minutes) in [Resync Interval].
Note
•
•
When directed
Document Version
2012-03
The interval may be determined by your phone system dealer. A
maximum of 28 days (4 weeks) can be set on the unit.
If any valid value other than an empty string is specified for
"CFG_RESYNC_TIME" in 4.3.5 Provisioning Settings in the
configuration file, the unit downloads the configuration files at the
fixed time, not at regular intervals.
When a setting needs to be changed immediately, units can be directed to
download the configuration files by sending them a NOTIFY message that
includes a special event from the SIP server.
• In the configuration file:
– Specify the special event text in "CFG_RESYNC_FROM_SIP".
• In the Web user interface:
– Click the [Maintenance] tab, click [Provisioning Maintenance],
and then enter the special event text in [Header Value for Resync
Event].
Generally, "check-sync" or "resync" is set as the special event text.
Administrator Guide
25
1.1.6 Provisioning
Download Timing
None (prohibited)
Explanation
If you want to prohibit units from changing their settings by downloading
configuration files, you can enable this function from the Web user interface.
The following operations will be prohibited:
– Pre-provisioning
– Provisioning at startup
– Provisioning at regular intervals
– Provisioning by sending a NOTIFY message
• In the configuration file:
– Add the line, PROVISION_ENABLE="N".
• In the Web user interface:
– Click the [Maintenance] tab, click [Provisioning Maintenance],
and then select [No] for [Enable Provisioning].
• To enable provisioning again, in the Web user interface
– Click the [Maintenance] tab, click [Provisioning Maintenance],
and then select [Yes] for [Enable Provisioning].
1.1.6.5 Provisioning Server Setting Example
This section gives an example of how to set up the units and provisioning server when configuring 2 units with
configuration files. The standard configuration files and the master configuration file are used in this example.
Conditions
Description/Setting
Item
Provisioning server FQDN
prov.example.com
Units’ MAC addresses
•
•
URL of the configuration files
Configure the following 2 settings either by pre-provisioning or through the
Web user interface. The values of both settings must be the same.
• CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH="http://prov.example.com/
Panasonic/Config{MAC}.cfg"
• CFG_MASTER_FILE_PATH="http://prov.example.com/
Panasonic/ConfigCommon.cfg"
Directory on the provisioning
server containing the
configuration files
Create the "Panasonic" directory just under the HTTP root directory of the
provisioning server.
File name of configuration
files
Store the following configuration files in the "Panasonic" directory.
• Contains the common settings for the 2 units:
– ConfigCommon.cfg
• Contains the settings unique to each unit:
– Config0080F0111111.cfg
– Config0080F0222222.cfg
0080F0111111
0080F0222222
To set up the provisioning server
1. Connect the units to the network, and turn them on.
a. The unit with the MAC address 0080F0111111 accesses the following URLs:
http://prov.example.com/Panasonic/ConfigCommon.cfg
26
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
1.1.6 Provisioning
http://prov.example.com/Panasonic/Config0080F0111111.cfg
b. The unit with the MAC address 0080F0222222 accesses the following URLs:
http://prov.example.com/Panasonic/ConfigCommon.cfg
http://prov.example.com/Panasonic/Config0080F0222222.cfg
Example Provisioning Direction from the Server
The following figure shows an example NOTIFY message from the server, directing the units to perform
provisioning. The text "check-sync" is specified for "CFG_RESYNC_FROM_SIP".
NOTIFY sip:1234567890@sip.example.com SIP/2.0
Via: SIP/2.0/UDP xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:5060;branch=abcdef-ghijkl
From: sip:prov@sip.example.com
To: sip:1234567890@sip.example.com
Date: Thu, 1 Jan 2009 01:01:01 GMT
Call-ID: 123456-1234567912345678
CSeq: 1 NOTIFY
Contact: sip:xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:5060
Event: check-sync
Content-Length: 0
1.1.6.6 Encryption
Secure Provisioning Methods
In order to perform provisioning securely, there are 2 methods for transferring configuration files securely
between the unit and the server.
Which method is used depends on the environment and equipment available from the phone system.
Method 1: Transferring Encrypted Configuration Files
Unencrypted
configuration
file
CFG_FILE_KEY1
Encrypted
configuration
file
CFG_FILE_KEY1
To use this method, an encryption key is required to encrypt and decrypt the configuration files. A preset
encryption key unique to each unit, an encryption key set by your phone system dealer, etc., is used for the
encryption. When the unit downloads an encrypted configuration file, it will decrypt the file using the same
encryption key, and then configure the settings automatically.
Method 2: Transferring Configuration Files Using HTTPS
This method uses SSL, which is commonly used on the Internet, to transfer configuration files between the
unit and server. For more secure communication, you can use a root certificate.
Notice
•
•
To avoid redundant data transfer over the network, important data, such as the encryption key used
to encrypt the configuration files and the root certificate for SSL, should be configured through
pre-provisioning as much as possible.
It is recommended that you encrypt the data in order to keep the communication secure when
transferring configuration files.
However, if you are using the units within a secure environment, such as within an intranet, it is not
necessary to encrypt the data.
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
27
1.1.6 Provisioning
To decrypt configuration files, the unit uses the encryption key registered to it beforehand. The unit determines
the encryption status by checking the extension of the downloaded configuration file.
For details about encrypting configuration files, contact the appropriate person in your organization.
Extension of Configuration
File
Configuration File Parameters Used for Decrypting
".e1c"
CFG_FILE_KEY1
".e2c"
CFG_FILE_KEY2
".e3c"
CFG_FILE_KEY3
Other than ".e1c", ".e2c", and
".e3c"
Processed as unencrypted configuration files.
The extension ".cfg" should be used for unencrypted configuration files.
Comparison of the 2 Methods
The following table compares the characteristics for the 2 transfer methods.
Transferring Encrypted
Configuration Files
Transferring Configuration Files
Using HTTPS
Provisioning server load
Light
Heavy
(The server encrypts data for each
transmission.)
Operation load
Necessary to encrypt data
beforehand.
Unnecessary to encrypt data
beforehand.
Management of
configuration files
Files must be decrypted and
re-encrypted for maintenance.
It is easy to manage files because
they are not encrypted on the server.
Security of data on the
server when operating
High
Low
(Configuration files are readable by
anyone with access to the server.)
Moreover, there is another method: configuration files are not encrypted while stored on the server, and then,
using the encryption key registered to the unit beforehand, they are encrypted when they are transferred. This
method is particularly useful when several units are configured to download a common configuration file using
different encryption keys. However, as when downloading an unencrypted configuration file using HTTPS, the
server will be heavily burdened when transferring configuration files.
28
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
1.1.7 Web User Interface Programming
1.1.7 Web User Interface Programming
After connecting the unit to your network, you can configure the unit’s settings by accessing the Web user
interface from a PC connected to the same network. For details, see Section 3 Web User Interface
Programming.
Router
Switching
Hub
KX-TGP500
PC
KX-TGP55x
1.1.7.1 Password for Web User Interface Programming
To program the unit via the Web user interface, a login account is required. There are 2 types of accounts, and
each has different access privileges.
• User: User accounts are for use by end users. Users can change the settings that are specific to the unit.
• Administrator: Administrator accounts are for use by administrators to manage the system configuration.
Administrators can change all the settings, including the network settings, in addition to the settings that
can be changed from a User account.
A separate password is assigned to each account.
For details, see Access Levels (IDs and Passwords) in 3.2.1 Before Accessing the Web User Interface.
Notice
•
You should manage the passwords carefully, and change them regularly.
1.1.7.2 Changing the Language for Web User Interface Programming
When accessing the unit via the Web user interface on a PC connected to the same network, various menus
and settings are displayed. You can change the language used for displaying these setting items. Because
the language setting for the Web user interface is not synchronized with those of the base unit or handsets,
you must set the languages for each independently.
The available languages may differ depending on the country/area of use.
For details, see 3.5.1 Web Language.
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
29
1.1.10 Other Network Settings
1.1.8 Phone User Interface Programming
You can change the settings directly from the unit.
For details about the operations, refer to the User Guide on the Panasonic Web site (® see Introduction).
For details about additional features available with direct commands, see Section 2 Phone User Interface
Programming.
1.1.8.1 Changing the Language for Phone User Interface Programming
You can change the language used on the LCD. Because the language settings for the LCD of the base unit
and handsets are not synchronized, you must set the languages individually for the base unit and each handset.
The available languages may differ depending on the country/area of use.
For details about changing the setting, refer to the User Guide on the Panasonic Web site (® see
Introduction).
1.1.9 Priority of Setting Methods
The same settings can be configured by different configuration methods: provisioning, Web user interface
programming, etc. This section explains which value is applied when the same setting is specified by multiple
methods.
The following table shows the priority with which settings from each method are applied (lower numbers indicate
higher priority):
Setting Order
Priority
1
4
The factory default settings for the unit
2
3
Pre-provisioning with the configuration file
3
4
Setting Method
2–3
Provisioning with the master configuration file
2–2
Provisioning with the product configuration file
2–1
Provisioning with the standard configuration file
1
Settings configured from the Web user interface or the phone user
interface
According to the table, settings configured later override previous settings (i.e., settings listed lower in the table
have a higher priority).
If different values are specified for the same setting by the master configuration file and Web user interface
programming, the value specified from the Web user interface is applied. This is because values specified from
the Web user interface have a higher priority.
For settings configured from the Web user interface and the phone user interface, the value specified most
recently receives priority.
1.1.10 Other Network Settings
1.1.10.1 Firewall and Router Setup
When the unit is connected to a network that is protected by a firewall and/or router, you need to configure the
firewall and/or router so that they do not block communication from the IP address and port number used by
the unit.
30
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
1.1.10 Other Network Settings
1.1.10.2 NAT (Network Address Translation) Setup
This section provides information about configuring a router that uses NAT.
Internet
Global IP address:
xxx.yyy.zzz.127
Router
Switching
Hub
PC
Private IP address:
192.168.228.11
SIP Cordless Phone
Private IP address:
192.168.228.12
If the unit is connected to a network that uses a NAT router and a private IP address is assigned to each
terminal on the network, depending on your phone system’s setup, you might need to configure the unit and
router so as to use NAT Traversal techniques.
If your phone system dealer provides an outbound proxy service that supports NAT Traversal, you need only
to set the IP address of the SIP outbound proxy server to the unit—no other settings are necessary.
However, depending on the phone system of the outbound proxy service, no setting may be necessary because
private IP addresses are automatically translated into global IP addresses by the outbound proxy server.
For details about the outbound proxy service, consult your phone system dealer.
When TCP is used to transport the SIP messages, you must always configure the devices for NAT Traversal.
To configure NAT Traversal, you must have the following information:
• The global IP address of the router.
• The port numbers you will specify for [Source Port] and [External RTP Port] through the Web user
interface, so that you can configure the appropriate port forwarding settings.
Note
•
Because the IP address of the router needs to be set in the unit, the IP address must be static.
SIP Setup
It might be necessary to manually set the router’s global IP address and reception port number in the unit.
In addition, it might also be necessary to configure the port forwarding settings of the router so that packets
sent from an outside network are sent to the unit. These settings are required for each individual line. For
details about Web user interface programming, see 3.4.5 Static NAPT Settings and 3.6.2.5 SIP Source
Port.
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
31
1.1.10 Other Network Settings
To set the router’s external (global) IP address and reception port number in the unit
1. In the Web user interface, click the [Network] tab, click [Static NAPT Settings], and then enter the
router’s global IP address in [Global IP Address].
2. Select [Yes] for [Enable Global IP Address Usage per Line] for each line.
• Select [No] to disable the setting for the line.
3. Click the [VoIP] tab, click [SIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 8]], and then enter the router’s source port numbers
(forwarded port numbers, which are the same as the numbers of the WAN and LAN ports set on the router)
in [Source Port].
RTP (Real-time Transport Protocol) Setup
If the unit is connected to a network that uses a NAT router and a private IP address is assigned to each
terminal on the network, you must configure the RTP function for the unit and router so that the units can
perform voice transmission between each other using a peer-to-peer connection.
However, if your phone system supports the SBC (Session Border Controller) function, it is not necessary to
configure these settings.
For details about the SBC function, consult your phone system dealer.
For details about Web user interface programming, see 3.4.5 Static NAPT Settings.
To configure the RTP function on the unit
1. In the Web user interface, click the [Network] tab, click [Static NAPT Settings], and then enter the
router’s global IP address in [Global IP Address].
2. In [External RTP Port], enter the router’s source port numbers (forwarded port numbers).
Note
•
Specify a unique value for each of the 3 ports.
Router Setup
When configuring the port forwarding function, specify the router’s reception port number as the unit’s port
number.
Port forwarding should be configured for the ports specified in [Source Port] (® see SIP Setup in this section)
and [External RTP Port] (® see RTP (Real-time Transport Protocol) Setup in this section).
Set the same port number for the source port and destination port, and set the unit’s private IP address as the
destination address.
Because the unit’s private IP address will have to be set in the router’s port forwarding configuration again if
it is changed, set a static IP address to the unit, or configure the router so that the same IP address is always
assigned to the unit if IP addresses are assigned by a DHCP server.
For details about how to configure the router, refer to the documentation for the router.
Because the port forwarding settings depend on the user’s network environment, they cannot be programmed
using configuration files.
1.1.10.3 Global Address Detection
The global IP address is a unique IP address that is assigned to a particular terminal. If the global IP address
assigned to the firewall or the router is changed, the unit will not be able to communicate.
If the global IP addresses of these terminals are assigned by a DHCP server in the higher level network where
they are connected, the IP address may differ each time the unit transmits data.
The Global Address Detection feature detects the current global IP address and, if the IP address has changed,
sets it automatically to the SIP server. There are 2 methods, using STUN (Simple Traversal of UDP through
32
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
1.2.1 Reset
NATs) or SIP messages, to perform this feature. For details about specifying this setting through the Web user
interface, see 3.4.4 Global Address Detection.
To set Global Address Detection
1. In the Web user interface, click the [Network] tab, click [Global Address Detection], and then select
[STUN] for [Detection Method].
• Select [SIP] for [Detection Method] to perform Global Address Detection by sending SIP messages.
2. Enter the desired detection interval (seconds) in [Detection Interval].
• When you select [SIP] for [Detection Method], the value "0" disables detection and a value other than
"0" enables detection.
3. If you selected [STUN] for [Detection Method], enter the STUN server address (IP address or FQDN) in
[STUN Server Address].
4. If you selected [STUN] for [Detection Method], enter the port number used by the STUN server in [STUN
Server Port].
Note
•
For details about server information, consult your network administrator.
1.2 Reset and Firmware Update
1.2.1 Reset
1.2.1.1 Resetting the Network Settings (IP Reset)
Performing IP Reset from the phone user interface (® see 2.1.4 IP Reset) restores the basic network settings
made through phone user interface programming or Web user interface programming to their factory defaults.
If the unit is unable to connect to the network after changing network settings, you can restore the network
settings to their factory defaults by performing IP Reset, and then try configuring the settings again. Settings
such as the phonebook data, are not cleared by this feature.
The following settings will be reset to their factory defaults:
• DHCP setting (restored to "DHCP on")
• Settings related to static IP addressing (the values for static IP address, subnet mask, default gateway,
DNS1, and DNS2 are cleared)
• DNS settings for DHCP connection (cleared)
• PHY settings (speed and duplex mode of the either LAN or PC port are restored to "automatic")
• VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) settings (disabled)
• Terminal number settings (restored to "automatic")
Notice
•
After performing IP Reset, the unit will restart automatically. To avoid problems, it is recommended that
you save your settings before performing IP Reset.
Note
•
If these settings (with the exception of PHY settings and terminal number settings) were made through
Web user interface programming, the set values made through Web user interface programming
remain effective, even if you perform IP Reset. To reset these settings to their factory defaults, perform
Reset Web Settings from the Web user interface again.
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
33
1.2.2 Firmware Update
•
If these settings (with the exception of PHY settings and terminal number settings) were made through
configuration file programming, the set values made through configuration file programming remain
effective, even if you perform Reset Web Settings.
1.2.1.2 Resetting the Settings Made through the Web User Interface
(Reset Web Settings)
Performing Reset Web Settings from the Web user interface (® see 3.8.4 Reset to Defaults) resets the
settings made through the Web user interface to their default values.
When you use this feature, the unit will return to the status just after performing the most recent provisioning
or pre-provisioning.
Notice
•
After performing Reset Web Settings, the base unit will restart automatically. To avoid problems, it is
recommended that you save your settings before performing Reset Web Settings.
Note
•
The settings configured through the phone user interface only will not be reset. However, settings that
can be configured through both the phone user interface and Web user interface will be reset.
1.2.2 Firmware Update
You can update the unit’s firmware to improve the unit’s operation. You can configure the unit so that it
automatically downloads the new firmware file from a specified location. The firmware update will be executed
when the unit is restarted.
For details, see Section 6 Firmware Update.
Provisioning server
Firmware server
Configuration
file
A
Firmware
C
B
A Download
B Check for update
C Firmware download and update
34
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
Section 2
Phone User Interface Programming
This section explains how to configure the unit by
entering direct commands through the phone user
interface.
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
35
2.1.2 Speed/Duplex Settings
2.1 Phone User Interface Programming
This section provides information about the features that can be configured directly from the base unit or
handsets, but that are not mentioned in the User Guide.
To enter direct commands, use the keys and soft keys on the base unit (KX-TGP55x only) or handset.
For details about the other available features, settings and key operations on the phone user interface, refer
to the User Guide on the Panasonic Web site (® see Introduction).
2.1.1 Phone User Interface Feature List and Direct Commands
The following table shows additional features programmable with direct commands. These commands are
hidden from end users.
Direct
Command
[#][5][3][0]
Feature
Speed/Duplex
Ref.
LAN port
Page 36
PC port*1
VLAN setting*1*2
Enable VLAN
IP Phone
Page 37
VLAN ID
Priority
PC
VLAN ID
Priority
*1
*2
*3
[#][7][3][0]
IP Reset*3
[#][7][3][1]
Terminal No.
[#][7][3][9]
Reset Web ID/Password
Page 38
Page 39
*3
Page 40
Available for KX-TGP55x only.
If your phone system dealer does not allow you these settings, you cannot change them even though the unit shows the setting menu.
Contact your phone system dealer for further information.
Not displayed on the LCD of the unit.
2.1.2 Speed/Duplex Settings
You can select the connection mode (combination of link speed and duplex mode) of the LAN port and PC
port (KX-TGP55x only). You can select from the following values:
• Auto (default)
• 10M/Full
• 10M/Half
• 100M/Full
• 100M/Half
For details about configuring the speed/duplex setting from the Web user interface, see 3.4.2.1 Link Speed/
Duplex Mode.
36
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
2.1.3 VLAN Settings (KX-TGP55x only)
To set the link speed and duplex mode
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in English alphabet
1. Base unit: [MENU] (middle soft key) ® [#][5][3][0]
2.
3.
4.
5.
Handset: [MENU] (center of joystick) ® [#][5][3][0]
• For KX-TGP500 users: go to step 4.
[ ]/[ ]: Select "Speed/Duplex" ® [SELECT]
[ ]/[ ]: Select "LAN port" or "PC port" ® [SELECT]
[ ]/[ ]: Select the desired option ® [SAVE]
Base unit: [EXIT]
Handset: [OFF]
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in symbols/pictures
1. Base unit:
(middle soft key) ® [#][5][3][0]
2.
3.
4.
5.
Handset:
(center of joystick) ® [#][5][3][0]
• For KX-TGP500 users: go to step 4.
[ ]/[ ]: Select "Speed/Duplex" ®
[ ]/[ ]: Select "LAN port" or "PC port" ®
[ ]/[ ]: Select the desired option ®
Base unit: [
]
Handset: [
]
Note
•
•
After you have finished configuring the settings, the base unit will restart automatically once the base
unit or handset returns to idle.
For KX-TGP500 users: only the LAN port setting is available because the unit does not have a PC port.
2.1.3 VLAN Settings (KX-TGP55x only)
You can change the VLAN settings for the unit and for the PC. The default setting for "Enable VLAN" is
"No".
For details about configuring VLAN settings from the Web user interface, see 3.4.2.2 VLAN Settings.
To enable VLAN settings
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in English alphabet
1. Base unit: [MENU] (middle soft key) ® [#][5][3][0]
Handset: [MENU] (center of joystick) ® [#][5][3][0]
2. [ ]/[ ]: Select "VLAN setting" ® [SELECT]
3. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Enable VLAN" ® [SELECT]
4. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Yes" ® [SAVE]
• Select "No" to disable VLAN settings.
5. Base unit: [EXIT]
Handset: [OFF]
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in symbols/pictures
1. Base unit:
(middle soft key) ® [#][5][3][0]
Handset:
(center of joystick) ® [#][5][3][0]
2. [ ]/[ ]: Select "VLAN setting" ®
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
37
2.1.4 IP Reset
3. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Enable VLAN" ®
4. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Yes" ®
• Select "No" to disable VLAN settings.
]
5. Base unit: [
Handset: [
]
To set VLAN for IP Phone/PC
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in English alphabet
1. Base unit: [MENU] (middle soft key) ® [#][5][3][0]
Handset: [MENU] (center of joystick) ® [#][5][3][0]
2. [ ]/[ ]: Select "VLAN setting" ® [SELECT]
3. [ ]/[ ]: Select "IP Phone" or "PC" ® [SELECT]
4. [ ]/[ ]: Select "VLAN ID" ® [SELECT]
5. Use the dial keys to enter the VLAN ID (1–4094).
6. [SAVE]
7. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Priority" ® [SELECT]
8. Use the dial keys to enter the priority value (0–7 [7: highest priority]).
9. [SAVE]
10. Base unit: [EXIT]
Handset: [OFF]
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in symbols/pictures
(middle soft key) ® [#][5][3][0]
1. Base unit:
(center of joystick) ® [#][5][3][0]
Handset:
2. [ ]/[ ]: Select "VLAN setting" ®
3. [ ]/[ ]: Select "IP Phone" or "PC" ®
4. [ ]/[ ]: Select "VLAN ID" ®
5. Use the dial keys to enter the VLAN ID (1–4094).
6.
7. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Priority" ®
8. Use the dial keys to enter the priority value (0–7 [7: highest priority]).
9.
10. Base unit: [
]
Handset: [
]
Note
•
After you have finished configuring the settings, the base unit will restart automatically once the base
unit or handset returns to idle.
2.1.4 IP Reset
IP Reset returns the basic network settings to their factory defaults. You can perform this operation from the
base unit or one of the handsets.
The following settings will be reset to their factory defaults:
• DHCP setting (restored to "DHCP on")
• Settings related to static IP addressing (the values for static IP address, subnet mask, default gateway,
DNS1, and DNS2 are cleared)
• DNS settings for DHCP connection (cleared)
38
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
2.1.5 Terminal Number Settings
•
•
•
PHY settings (speed and duplex mode of the either LAN or PC port are restored to "automatic")
VLAN settings (disabled)
Terminal number settings (restored to "automatic")
To perform IP Reset
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in English alphabet
1. Base unit: [MENU] (middle soft key) ® [#][7][3][0]
Handset: [MENU] (center of joystick) ® [#][7][3][0]
2. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Yes" ® [SELECT]
The settings are returned to their factory defaults, and the base unit will restart.
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in symbols/pictures
1. Base unit:
(middle soft key) ® [#][7][3][0]
Handset:
(center of joystick) ® [#][7][3][0]
2. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Yes" ®
The settings are returned to their factory defaults, and the base unit will restart.
Notice
•
Once you press [#][7][3][0], IP Reset is performed immediately and without asking for confirmation,
regardless of the communication status. As a result, the base unit is disconnected from the IP network
immediately.
Note
•
•
If these settings (with the exception of PHY settings and terminal number settings) were made through
Web user interface programming, the set values made through Web user interface programming
remain effective, even if you perform IP Reset. To reset these settings to their factory defaults, perform
Reset Web Settings from the Web user interface again.
If these settings (with the exception of PHY settings and terminal number settings) were made through
configuration file programming, the set values made through configuration file programming remain
effective, even if you perform Reset Web Settings.
2.1.5 Terminal Number Settings
You can select the terminal number of the unit that you are using from "Terminal 1"–"Terminal 9", and
"Auto". The default setting is "Auto". "Auto" does not assign a fixed terminal number to the unit.
If multiple units try to access the same router simultaneously, errors can occur. Assigning a terminal number
1 to 9 to each of the units may prevent such errors.
To assign a terminal number to the unit
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in English alphabet
1. Base unit: [MENU] (middle soft key) ® [#][7][3][1]
Handset: [MENU] (center of joystick) ® [#][7][3][1]
2. [ ]/[ ]: Select the desired terminal number ("Auto", "Terminal 1"–"Terminal 9") ® [SAVE]
3. Base unit: [EXIT]
Handset: [OFF]
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in symbols/pictures
1. Base unit:
(middle soft key) ® [#][7][3][1]
Handset:
Document Version
2012-03
(center of joystick) ® [#][7][3][1]
Administrator Guide
39
2.1.7 HTTP Authentication Settings
2. [ ]/[ ]: Select the desired terminal number ("Auto", "Terminal 1"–"Terminal 9") ®
3. Base unit: [
]
Handset: [
]
2.1.6 Reset Web ID/Password
Reset Web ID/Password resets all the IDs and passwords required for users and administrators to access the
Web user interface (® see Access Levels (IDs and Passwords) in 3.2.1 Before Accessing the Web User
Interface) to their factory defaults. You can perform this operation from the base unit or one of the handsets.
To perform Reset Web ID/Password
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in English alphabet
1. Base unit: [MENU] (middle soft key) ® [#][7][3][9]
Handset: [MENU] (center of joystick) ® [#][7][3][9]
2. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Yes" ® [SELECT]
All the IDs and passwords are reset, and the base unit will restart.
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in symbols/pictures
(middle soft key) ® [#][7][3][9]
1. Base unit:
Handset:
(center of joystick) ® [#][7][3][9]
2. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Yes" ®
All the IDs and passwords are reset, and the base unit will restart.
Notice
•
Once you press [#][7][3][9], Reset Web ID/Password is performed immediately and without asking for
confirmation, regardless of the communication status. As a result, the base unit is disconnected from
the IP network immediately. For security reasons, it is recommended that the passwords are set again
immediately (® see 3.5.2 Administrator Password or 3.5.3 Change User Password).
2.1.7 HTTP Authentication Settings
To set Authentication ID
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in English alphabet
1. Handset: [MENU] (center of joystick)
2. [ ]/[ ]: Select "IP Service" ® [SELECT]
3. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Call Features" ® [SELECT]
4. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Settings" ® [SELECT]
5. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Authentication" ® [SELECT]
6. [ ]/[ ]: Select "ID" ® [SELECT]
7. Enter the Authentication ID (16 characters max.).
8. [SAVE]
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in symbols/pictures
1. Handset:
(center of joystick)
2. [ ]/[ ]: Select "IP Service" ®
3. [ ]/[ ]: Select Call Features ®
4. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Settings" ®
40
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
2.1.7 HTTP Authentication Settings
5. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Authentication" ®
6. [ ]/[ ]: Select "ID" ®
7. Enter the Authentication ID (16 characters max.).
8.
To set Authentication Password
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in English alphabet
1. Handset: [MENU] (center of joystick)
2. [ ]/[ ]: Select "IP Service" ® [SELECT]
3. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Call Features" ® [SELECT]
4. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Settings" ® [SELECT]
5. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Authentication" ® [SELECT]
6. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Password" ® [SELECT]
7. Enter the Authentication Password (16 characters max.).
8. [SAVE]
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in symbols/pictures
1. Handset:
(center of joystick)
2. [ ]/[ ]: Select "IP Service" ®
3. [ ]/[ ]: Select Call Features ®
4. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Settings" ®
5. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Authentication" ®
6. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Password" ®
7. Enter the Authentication Password (16 characters max.).
8.
Notice
•
•
After these parameters are set, phone will reboot automatically.
If you set above-mentioned ID or password by WEB User Interface, this menu is not displayed (® see
3.4.3.2 HTTP Authentication).
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
41
2.1.7 HTTP Authentication Settings
42
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
Section 3
Web User Interface Programming
This section provides information about the settings
available in the Web user interface.
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
43
3.1 Web User Interface Setting List
3.1 Web User Interface Setting List
The following tables show all the settings that you can configure from the Web user interface and the access
levels. For details about each setting, see the reference pages listed.
Status
Menu Item
Version
Information
Network Status
VoIP Status
*1
44
Section Title
Version Information
Network Status
VoIP Status
Setting
Access
Level*1
Ref.
U
A
Model
ü
ü
Page 61
Operating BANK
ü
ü
Page 61
IPL Version
ü
ü
Page 61
Firmware Version
ü
ü
Page 61
MAC Address
ü
ü
Page 62
Ethernet Link Status (LAN
Port)
ü
ü
Page 62
Ethernet Link Status (PC Port)
ü
ü
Page 62
Connection Mode
ü
ü
Page 63
IP Address
ü
ü
Page 63
Subnet Mask
ü
ü
Page 63
Default Gateway
ü
ü
Page 63
DNS1
ü
ü
Page 63
DNS2
ü
ü
Page 64
Line No.
ü
ü
Page 64
Phone Number
ü
ü
Page 64
VoIP Status
ü
ü
Page 65
The access levels are abbreviated as follows:
U: User; A: Administrator
A check mark indicates that the setting is available for that access level.
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
3.1 Web User Interface Setting List
Network
Menu Item
Basic Network
Settings
Section Title
Setting
Connection Mode
Connection Mode*2
DHCP Settings
Host Name*4
Ethernet Port
Settings
U
A
ü*3
ü
Page 66
ü
Page 66
ü
ü
Page 67
Static IP Address*2
ü*3
ü
Page 67
Subnet Mask*2
ü*3
ü
Page 68
Default Gateway*2
ü*3
ü
Page 68
DNS1*2
ü*3
ü
Page 68
DNS2*2
ü*3
ü
Page 69
*2
Link Speed/Duplex
Mode
LAN Port*5
ü
Page 69
PC Port*5
ü
Page 70
VLAN Settings
Enable VLAN*2
ü
Page 70
–
–
VLAN ID*2
ü
Page 70
Priority*2
ü
Page 71
–
–
ü
Page 71
ü
Page 71
HTTP Version*4
ü
Page 72
HTTP User Agent*4
ü
Page 72
IP Phone
–
PC
VLAN ID
–
*2
Priority*2
HTTP Client
Settings
HTTP Client Settings
HTTP Authentication
Authentication ID
ü
ü
Page 73
Authentication Password
ü
ü
Page 73
Enable Proxy
ü
Page 73
Proxy Server Address
ü
Page 73
Proxy Server Port
ü
Page 74
Global Address
Detection
Detection Method
ü
Page 74
Detection Interval
ü
Page 75
STUN Server
STUN Server Address*4
ü
Page 75
STUN Server Port*4
ü
Page 75
Proxy Server Settings
Global Address
Detection
Document Version
2012-03
Ref.
*3
Domain Name Server
Static Settings
Access
Level*1
Administrator Guide
45
3.1 Web User Interface Setting List
Menu Item
Section Title
Setting
Access
Level*1
U
Static NAPT
Settings
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
Ref.
A
Global IP Address
Global IP Address
ü
Page 76
Enable Global IP
Address Usage per Line
Line 1–Line 8
ü
Page 76
External RTP Port
Channel 1–3
ü
Page 77
The access levels are abbreviated as follows:
U: User; A: Administrator
A check mark indicates that the setting is available for that access level.
This setting can also be configured through other programming methods (phone user interface programming or configuration file
programming).
If your phone system dealer allows you these settings, you can see the setting menu. Contact your phone system dealer for further
information.
This setting can also be configured through configuration file programming.
This setting can also be configured through phone user interface programming.
System
Menu Item
46
Section Title
Setting
Access
Level*1
Ref.
U
A
ü
ü
Page 78
Web Language
Web Language
Language
Administrator
Password
Change Administrator
Password
New Password*2
ü
Page 78
Confirm New Password*2
ü
Page 79
Change User
Password
Change User Password
New Password*2
ü
ü
Page 79
Confirm New Password*2
ü
ü
Page 80
Web Server
Settings
Web Server Settings
Web Server Port
ü
Page 80
Port Close Timer
ü
Page 81
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
3.1 Web User Interface Setting List
Menu Item
Time Adjust
Settings
Section Title
Setting
Access
Level*1
Ref.
U
A
Enable Synchronization by
NTP
ü*3
ü
Page 82
Synchronization Interval*2
ü*3
ü
Page 82
Time Server
NTP Server Address*2
ü*3
ü
Page 82
Time Zone
Time Zone*2
ü*3
ü
Page 82
Daylight Saving Time
(Summer Time)
Enable DST (Enable Summer
Time)*2
ü*3
ü
Page 83
DST Offset (Summer Time
Offset)*2
ü*3
ü
Page 83
Month*2
ü*3
ü
Page 83
*3
ü
ü
Page 83
Time*2
ü*3
ü
Page 84
Month*2
ü*3
ü
Page 84
Day of Week*2
ü*3
ü
Page 85
Time*2
ü*3
ü
Page 86
Synchronization
Start Day and Time of
DST (Start Day and
Time of Summer Time)
End Day and Time of
DST (End Day and Time
of Summer Time)
Day of Week
*2
The access levels are abbreviated as follows:
U: User; A: Administrator
A check mark indicates that the setting is available for that access level.
This setting can also be configured through configuration file programming.
If your phone system dealer allows you these settings, you can see the setting menu. Contact your phone system dealer for further
information.
*1
*2
*3
VoIP
Menu Item
Section Title
Setting
Access
Level*1
U
SIP Settings
Document Version
2012-03
Ref.
A
SIP Setting
SIP User Agent*2
ü
Page 86
Transport Protocol for
SIP
Transport Protocol*2
ü
Page 87
Administrator Guide
47
3.1 Web User Interface Setting List
Menu Item
Section Title
Access
Level*1
Setting
U
SIP Settings
[Line 1]–[Line 8]
Phone Number
Phone Number*2
ü
Page 88
Line ID*2
ü
Page 89
Registrar Server Address*2
ü
Page 89
Registrar Server Port*2
ü
Page 89
Proxy Server Address*2
ü
Page 89
ü
Page 89
ü
Page 90
Presence Server Port*2
ü
Page 90
Outbound Proxy Server
Address*2
ü
Page 90
Outbound Proxy Server Port*2
ü
Page 90
SIP Service Domain
Service Domain*2
ü
Page 91
SIP Source Port
Source Port*2
ü
Page 91
SIP Authentication
Authentication ID*2
ü
Page 91
Authentication Password*2
ü
Page 92
Enable DNS SRV lookup*2
ü
Page 92
SRV lookup Prefix for UDP*2
ü
Page 92
SRV lookup Prefix for TCP*2
ü
Page 93
T1 Timer*2
ü
Page 93
T2 Timer
ü
Page 93
INVITE Retry Count*2
ü
Page 93
Non-INVITE Retry Count*2
ü
Page 94
Quality of Service (QoS)
SIP Packet QoS (DSCP)*2
ü
Page 94
SIP extensions
Supports 100rel (RFC 3262)*2
ü
Page 95
Supports Session Timer (RFC
4028)*2
ü
Page 95
Keep Alive
Keep Alive Interval*2
ü
Page 95
Security
Enable SSAF (SIP Source
Address Filter)*2
ü
Page 96
RTP Settings
RTP Packet Time*2
ü
Page 96
Minimum RTP Port Number*2
ü
Page 97
Maximum RTP Port Number*2
ü
Page 97
SIP Server
Proxy Server Port*2
Presence Server Address
Outbound Proxy Server
DNS
Timer Settings
*2
*2
VoIP Settings
48
Administrator Guide
Ref.
A
Document Version
2012-03
3.1 Web User Interface Setting List
Menu Item
Section Title
Setting
Access
Level*1
U
VoIP Settings
[Line 1]–[Line 8]
Quality of Service (QoS)
RTP Packet QoS (DSCP)*2
ü
Page 98
Statistical Information
RTCP Interval*2
ü
Page 99
Jitter Buffer
Maximum Delay*2
ü
Page 99
Minimum Delay*2
ü
Page 100
Initial Delay*2
ü
Page 100
DTMF Type*2
ü
Page 100
Telephone-event Payload
Type*2
ü
Page 101
Call Hold
Supports RFC 2543
(c=0.0.0.0)*2
ü
Page 101
CODEC Settings
First CODEC*2
ü
Page 101
Second CODEC*2
ü
Page 102
Third CODEC*2
ü
Page 102
Fourth CODEC*2
ü
Page 103
Fifth CODEC*2
ü
Page 103
DTMF
*1
*2
Ref.
A
The access levels are abbreviated as follows:
U: User; A: Administrator
A check mark indicates that the setting is available for that access level.
This setting can also be configured through configuration file programming.
Telephone
Menu Item
Multi Number
Settings
Section Title
Grouping Handset/
Handset selection for
receiving calls
Handset and Line No.
selection for making
calls
Document Version
2012-03
Setting
Access
Level*1
Ref.
U
A
Line No.*2
ü*3
ü
Page 105
Phone Number*2
ü*3
ü
Page 105
Handset No.
*3
ü
ü
Page 106
Base*2
ü*3
ü
Page 106
Handset No.*2
ü*3
ü
Page 106
Base*2
ü*3
ü
Page 106
Line No.*2
ü*3
ü
Page 107
Default*2
ü*3
ü
Page 107
*2
Administrator Guide
49
3.1 Web User Interface Setting List
Menu Item
Section Title
Access
Level*1
Setting
U
Call Control
Call Control [Line
1]–[Line 8]
Call Control
Send SUBSCRIBE to Voice
Mail Server*2
ü
Page 108
Conference Server Address*2
ü
Page 108
Inter-digit Timeout*2
ü
Page 108
Emergency Call Phone
Numbers
1–5*2
ü
Page 109
Call Rejection Phone
Numbers
1–30
ü
ü
Page 109
Call Control
Display Name*2
ü
ü
Page 110
ü
Page 110
ü
Page 111
Enable Shared Call*2
ü
Page 111
Unique ID of Shared Call*2
ü
Page 112
Synchronize Do Not Disturb
and Call Forward*2
ü
Page 112
Dial Plan*2
ü
Page 112
Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not
Match*2
ü
Page 113
Enable Privacy Mode*2
Voice Mail Access Number
Dial Plan
Call Features
Call Forward
ü
ü
Page 113
Block Anonymous Call
ü
ü
Page 113
Do Not Disturb
ü
ü
Page 114
Unconditional
–
–
–
Enable Call Forward
ü
ü
Page 114
Phone Number
ü
ü
Page 115
–
–
–
Enable Call Forward
ü
ü
Page 115
Phone Number
ü
ü
Page 116
–
–
–
Enable Call Forward
ü
ü
Page 116
Phone Number
ü
ü
Page 117
Ring Count
ü
ü
Page 117
No Answer
Administrator Guide
*2
Block Caller ID
Busy
50
Ref.
A
Document Version
2012-03
3.1 Web User Interface Setting List
Menu Item
Section Title
Setting
Access
Level*1
U
Tone Settings
Dial Tone
Busy Tone
Ringing Tone
Stutter Tone
Reorder Tone
Howler Tone
*1
*2
*3
Import
Phonebook
Import Phonebook
Export
Phonebook
Export Phonebook
Ref.
A
Tone Frequencies*2
ü
Page 118
Tone Timings*2
ü
Page 118
Tone Frequencies*2
ü
Page 119
Tone Timings*2
ü
Page 119
Tone Frequencies*2
ü
Page 119
Tone Timings*2
ü
Page 120
ü
Page 120
Tone Timings*2
ü
Page 120
Tone Frequencies*2
ü
Page 120
Tone Timings*2
ü
Page 121
Tone Frequencies*2
ü
Page 121
Tone Timings*2
ü
Page 121
Start Time*2
ü
Page 121
Tone Frequencies
*2
Handset (or Base Unit)
ü
ü
Page 122
File Name
ü
ü
Page 122
Handset (or Base Unit)
ü
ü
Page 123
The access levels are abbreviated as follows:
U: User; A: Administrator
A check mark indicates that the setting is available for that access level.
This setting can also be configured through configuration file programming.
If your phone system dealer allows you these settings, you can see the setting menu. Contact your phone system dealer for further
information.
Maintenance
Menu Item
Section Title
Setting
Access
Level*1
U
Firmware
Maintenance
Local Firmware
Update
Document Version
2012-03
Firmware Maintenance
Local Firmware Update
Ref.
A
Enable Firmware Update*2
ü
Page 124
Update Type*2
ü
Page 124
Firmware File URL*2
ü
Page 125
Encryption
ü
Page 125
File Name
ü
Page 126
Administrator Guide
51
3.2.1 Before Accessing the Web User Interface
Menu Item
Section Title
Setting
Access
Level*1
U
Provisioning
Maintenance
*1
*2
Provisioning
Maintenance
Ref.
A
Enable Provisioning*2
ü
Page 126
Standard File URL*2
ü
Page 127
Product File URL*2
ü
Page 127
Master File URL*2
ü
Page 127
Cyclic Auto Resync*2
ü
Page 128
Resync Interval*2
ü
Page 128
Header Value for Resync
Event*2
ü
Page 128
Reset to Defaults
–
–
ü
Page 128
Restart
–
–
ü
Page 129
The access levels are abbreviated as follows:
U: User; A: Administrator
A check mark indicates that the setting is available for that access level.
This setting can also be configured through configuration file programming.
3.2 Programming Instructions
3.2.1 Before Accessing the Web User Interface
Recommended Environment
This unit supports the following specifications:
HTTP Version
HTTP/1.0 (RFC 1945), HTTP/1.1 (RFC 2616)
Authentication Method
Digest (or Basic)
The Web user interface will operate correctly in the following environments:
Operating System
Microsoft® Windows® XP or Windows Vista® operating system
Web Browser
Internet Explorer® 6.0 (Windows XP only), Internet Explorer 7.0, or
Internet Explorer 8.0 internet browser
Language (recommended)
English
Opening/Closing the Web Port
To access the Web user interface, you must open the unit’s Web port beforehand. For details, refer to the
User Guide on the Panasonic Web site (® see Introduction).
52
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
3.2.1 Before Accessing the Web User Interface
Configuring Settings from the Base Unit (KX-TGP55x only)/Handset
To open the unit’s Web port
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in English alphabet
1. Base unit: [MENU] (middle soft key) ® [#][5][3][4]
Handset: [MENU] (center of joystick) ® [#][5][3][4]
2. [ ]/[ ]: Select "On" for "Embedded web" ® [SAVE]
3. Base unit: [EXIT]
Handset: [OFF]
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in symbols/pictures
1. Base unit:
(middle soft key) ® [#][5][3][4]
Handset:
(center of joystick) ® [#][5][3][4]
2. [ ]/[ ]: Select "On" for "Embedded web" ®
3. Base unit: [
]
Handset: [
]
To close the unit’s Web port
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in English alphabet
1. Base unit: [MENU] (middle soft key) ® [#][5][3][4]
Handset: [MENU] (center of joystick) ® [#][5][3][4]
2. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Off" for "Embedded web" ® [SAVE]
3. Base unit: [EXIT]
Handset: [OFF]
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in symbols/pictures
1. Base unit:
(middle soft key) ® [#][5][3][4]
(center of joystick) ® [#][5][3][4]
Handset:
2. [ ]/[ ]: Select "Off" for "Embedded web" ®
3. Base unit: [
]
Handset: [
]
Configuring Settings from the Web User Interface
To close the unit’s Web port
1. In the Web user interface, click [Web Port Close].
2. Click OK.
Note
•
The Web port of the unit will be closed automatically in the following conditions:
– The port close timer configured through the Web user interface expires (® see [Port Close
Timer] in 3.5.4.1 Web Server Settings).
– 3 consecutive unsuccessful login attempts occur.
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
53
3.2.2 Accessing the Web User Interface
Access Levels (IDs and Passwords)
2 accounts with different access privileges are provided for accessing the Web user interface: User and
Administrator. Each account has its own ID and password, which are required to log in to the Web user
interface.
Account
User
Target User
End users
ID
(default)
user
Password
(default)
-blank(NULL)
Password Restrictions
•
•
Administrator
Network
administrators,
etc.
admin
adminpass
•
•
When logged in as User, you can
change the password for the
User account (® see
3.5.3 Change User Password).
The password can consist of 6 to
16 ASCII characters
(case-sensitive) (® see
Entering Characters in
3.2.2 Accessing the Web User
Interface).
When logged in as Administrator,
you can change the password for
both the User and Administrator
accounts (® see
3.5.2 Administrator
Password).
The password can consist of 6 to
16 ASCII characters
(case-sensitive) (® see
Entering Characters in
3.2.2 Accessing the Web User
Interface).
Notice
•
•
•
•
•
Only one account can be logged in to the Web user interface at a time. If you try to access the Web
user interface while someone is logged in, you will be denied access.
You cannot log in to the Web user interface even under the same account as someone who is already
logged in.
The user password is required to change the settings.
The IDs can be changed through configuration file programming (® see "ADMIN_ID" and
"USER_ID" in 4.3.1 Login Account Settings).
You can reset the account IDs and passwords to their factory default settings by performing Reset Web
ID/Password from the base unit or one of the handsets. For details, see 2.1.6 Reset Web ID/
Password.
3.2.2 Accessing the Web User Interface
The unit can be configured from the Web user interface.
54
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
3.2.2 Accessing the Web User Interface
To access the Web user interface
1. Open your Web browser, and then enter "http://" followed by the unit’s IP address into the address field of
your browser.
Note
•
To determine the unit’s IP address, perform the following operations on the base unit
(KX-TGP55x only) or handset:
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in English alphabet
1. Base unit: [MENU] (middle soft key) ® [#][5][0][1]
Handset: [MENU] (center of joystick) ® [#][5][0][1]
2. Base unit: [EXIT]
Handset: [OFF]
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in symbols/pictures
1. Base unit:
(middle soft key) ® [#][5][0][1]
(center of joystick) ® [#][5][0][1]
]
Handset:
2. Base unit: [
Handset: [
]
2. For authentication, enter your ID (username) and password, and then click OK.
Notice
•
•
•
The default ID for the User account is "user", and the default password is blank. The ID cannot be
changed from the Web user interface, but it can be changed through configuration file
programming.
When you log in as User to the Web user interface for the first time, the [Change User
Password] screen (® see 3.5.3 Change User Password) will be displayed. Enter a new
password, and then perform authentication again with the new password to log in to the Web user
interface.
The default ID for the Administrator account is "admin", and the default password is "adminpass".
The ID cannot be changed from the Web user interface, but it can be changed through configuration
file programming.
3. The Web user interface window is displayed. Configure the settings for the unit as desired.
4. You can log out from the Web user interface at any time by clicking [Web Port Close].
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
55
3.2.2 Accessing the Web User Interface
Controls on the Window
The Web user interface window contains various controls for navigating and configuring settings. The following
figure shows the controls that are displayed on the [Basic Network Settings] screen as an example:
A
B
C
D
Note
•
The screen shots shown are taken from the Web user interface of the KX-TGP550T04, so the model
name may differ from that shown on your PC.
• Actual default values may vary depending on your phone system dealer.
• When you log in to the Web user interface with the User account, the languages of messages displayed
on the configuration screen may differ depending on the country/area of use.
Tabs
Tabs are the top categories for classifying settings. When you click a tab, the corresponding menu items
and the configuration screen of the first menu item appear. There are 6 tabs for the Administrator account
and 4 tabs for the User account. For details about the account types, see Access Levels (IDs and
Passwords) in this section.
Menu
The menu displays the sub-categories of the selected tab.
Configuration Screen
Clicking a menu displays the corresponding configuration screen, which contains the actual settings,
grouped into sections. For details, see 3.3 Status to 3.8.5 Restart.
Buttons
The following standard buttons are displayed in the Web user interface:
Button
56
Function
Web Port Close
Closes the Web port of the unit and logs you out of the Web user interface after
a confirmation message is displayed.
Save
Applies changes and displays a result message (® see Result Messages in
this section).
Cancel
Discards changes. The settings on the current screen will return to the values
they had before being changed.
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
3.2.2 Accessing the Web User Interface
Button
Refresh
Function
Updates the status information displayed on the screen. This button is
displayed in the upper-right area of the [Network Status] and [VoIP Status]
screens.
Entering Characters
In the Web user interface, when specifying a name, message, password, or other text item, you can enter any
of the ASCII characters displayed in the following table with a white background.
However, there are additional limitations for certain types of fields as follows:
• Number field
– You may only enter a sequence of numeric characters.
– You cannot leave the field empty.
• IP Address field
– You can enter the IP address using dotted-decimal notation (i.e., "n.n.n.n" where n=0–255).
– You cannot enter invalid IP addresses, for example, "0.0.0.0", "255.255.255.255", or "127.0.0.1".
• FQDN field
– The field cannot contain ", &, ', <, >, or trailing spaces.
– You can enter the IP address using dotted-decimal notation (i.e., "n.n.n.n" where n=0–255).
– You cannot enter invalid IP addresses, for example, "0.0.0.0", "255.255.255.255", or "127.0.0.1".
• Authentication ID/Password field
– The field cannot contain ", &, ', :, <, >, or space.
– The length of user password and administrator password must be from 6 to 16 characters.
• Display Name field (® see [Display Name] in 3.7.3.1 Call Control)
– This is the only field in which you can enter Unicode characters.
Result Messages
When you click [Save] after changing the settings on the current configuration screen, one of the following
messages will appear in the upper-left area of the current configuration screen:
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
57
3.2.2 Accessing the Web User Interface
Result Message
Description
Complete
The operation has successfully completed.
All screens except
3.7.6 Export Phonebook
Failed (Parameter Error)
The operation failed because:
• Some specified values are out of range
or invalid.
All screens
Failed (Memory Access
Failure)
The operation failed because:
• Access error to the flash memory
occurred while reading or writing the
data.
All screens
Failed (Transfer Failure)*1
The operation failed because:
• A network error occurred during the
data transmission.
All screens
Failed (Busy)
The operation failed because:
• The base unit or handset is in an
operation that accesses the flash
memory of the base unit.
All screens
•
When attempting to import/export the
phonebook data, the base unit
(KX-TGP55x only) or handset is on a
call.
While transferring the phonebook data,
a call arrived at the base unit
(KX-TGP55x only) or handset.
When attempting to import/export the
phonebook data, a menu operation that
communicates with the base unit is
being performed on the target handset.
3.7.5 Import Phonebook
3.7.6 Export Phonebook
When updating the firmware, the base
unit or handset is on a call.
3.8.2 Local Firmware
Update
•
•
•
58
Applicable Screens
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
3.2.2 Accessing the Web User Interface
Result Message
Failed (Canceled)
Failed (Invalid File)
Document Version
2012-03
Description
Applicable Screens
The operation failed because:
• While transferring the phonebook data,
– The following key was pressed on
the handset.
In cases when buttons/soft key
icons are shown in English
alphabet
[OFF]
In cases when buttons/soft key
icons are shown in symbols/
pictures
[
]
– IP Reset was performed on the
base unit (KX-TGP55x only) or
handset.
3.7.5 Import Phonebook
•
While transferring the firmware file, IP
Reset was performed on the base unit
(KX-TGP55x only) or handset.
3.8.2 Local Firmware
Update
•
While transferring the phonebook data,
– The following key was pressed on
the base unit (KX-TGP55x only) or
handset.
In cases when buttons/soft key
icons are shown in English
alphabet
Base unit: [EXIT]
Handset: [OFF]
In cases when buttons/soft key
icons are shown in symbols/
pictures
Base unit: [
]
Handset: [
]
– IP Reset was performed on the
base unit (KX-TGP55x only) or
handset.
3.7.6 Export Phonebook
•
While transferring the phonebook data,
the connection with the base unit
(KX-TGP55x only) or handset was
interrupted.
3.7.5 Import Phonebook
3.7.6 Export Phonebook
The operation failed because:
• The imported UTF-16 text file has an
invalid BOM (Byte-order Mark).
3.7.5 Import Phonebook
•
3.8.2 Local Firmware
Update
The firmware file is corrupted or invalid.
Administrator Guide
59
3.3 Status
Result Message
Failed (File Size Error)
*1
Description
Applicable Screens
The operation failed because:
• The size of the imported phonebook is
too large.
3.7.5 Import Phonebook
•
3.8.2 Local Firmware
Update
The size of the firmware file is
insufficient.
Failed (No Handset, or Busy)
The operation failed because:
• When attempting to import/export the
phonebook data, the handset had not
been registered yet, or the connection
with the base unit (KX-TGP55x only) or
handset has been disconnected.
• When attempting to import/export the
phonebook data, a menu operation
was being performed on the handset,
preventing communication with the
base unit.
3.7.5 Import Phonebook
3.7.6 Export Phonebook
Memory Full
The operation failed because:
• When attempting to import the
phonebook data, the total number of
phonebook entries, including the
existing entries, exceeds the limit (of up
to 100 entries).
3.7.5 Import Phonebook
No Data
The operation failed because:
• The imported phonebook file contains
no valid phonebook entries.
3.7.5 Import Phonebook
•
3.7.6 Export Phonebook
No phonebook entry is registered in the
export source base unit (KX-TGP55x
only) or handset.
"Failed (Transfer Failure)" may not be displayed depending on your Web browser.
Notice
•
Do not click the navigation buttons of your Web browser or open a new window to display the screen.
Otherwise, an error ("403 Forbidden") will occur when you click [Save].
3.3 Status
This section provides detailed descriptions about all the settings classified under the [Status] tab.
60
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
3.3.1 Version Information
3.3.1 Version Information
This screen allows you to view the current version information such as the model number and the firmware
version of the unit.
3.3.1.1 Version Information
Model
Description
Indicates the model number of the unit (reference only).
Value Range
Model number
Default Value
Current model number
Operating BANK
Description
Indicates the storage area of the firmware that is currently operating
(reference only).
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
Not applicable.
Bank1
Bank2
IPL Version
Description
Indicates the version of the IPL (Initial Program Load) that runs when
starting the unit (reference only).
Value Range
IPL version ("nn.nn" [n=0–9])
Default Value
Current IPL version
Firmware Version
Description
Indicates the version of the firmware that is currently installed on the
unit (reference only).
Value Range
Bank1 (Bank2): Firmware version ("nn.nn" [n=0–9])
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
61
3.3.2 Network Status
Default Value
Current firmware version
3.3.2 Network Status
This screen allows you to view the current network information of the unit, such as the MAC address, IP
address, Ethernet port status, etc.
Clicking [Refresh] updates the information displayed on the screen.
3.3.2.1 Network Status
MAC Address
Description
Indicates the MAC address of the unit (reference only).
Value Range
Not applicable.
Default Value
Default MAC address (example: 0080F0ABCDEF)
Ethernet Link Status (LAN Port)
Description
Indicates the current connection status of the Ethernet LAN port
(reference only).
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
Not applicable.
Connected
Not connected
Ethernet Link Status (PC Port) (KX-TGP55x only)
62
Description
Indicates the current connection status of the Ethernet PC port
(reference only).
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
Not applicable.
Administrator Guide
Connected
Not connected
Document Version
2012-03
3.3.2 Network Status
Connection Mode
Description
Indicates whether the IP address of the unit is assigned automatically
(DHCP) or manually (static) (reference only).
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
Not applicable.
DHCP
Static
IP Address
Description
Indicates the currently assigned IP address of the unit (reference only).
Value Range
IP address
Default Value
Current IP address
Subnet Mask
Description
Indicates the specified subnet mask for the unit (reference only).
Value Range
Subnet mask
Default Value
Current subnet mask
Default Gateway
Description
Indicates the specified IP address of the default gateway for the network
(reference only).
Note
•
If the default gateway address is not specified, this field will be
left blank.
Value Range
IP address of the default gateway
Default Value
Not applicable.
DNS1
Description
Indicates the specified IP address of the primary DNS server (reference
only).
Note
•
If the primary DNS server address is not specified, this field will
be left blank.
Value Range
IP address of the primary DNS server
Default Value
Not applicable.
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
63
3.3.3 VoIP Status
DNS2
Description
Indicates the specified IP address of the secondary DNS server
(reference only).
Note
•
If the secondary DNS server address is not specified, this field
will be left blank.
Value Range
IP address of the secondary DNS server
Default Value
Not applicable.
3.3.3 VoIP Status
This screen allows you to view the current VoIP status of each line’s unit.
Clicking [Refresh] updates the information displayed on the screen.
3.3.3.1 VoIP Status
Line No.
Description
Indicates the line number (1–8) to which a phone number is assigned
(reference only).
Value Range
Line 1–Line 8
Default Value
Not applicable.
Phone Number
Description
Indicates the currently assigned phone numbers (reference only).
Note
•
Value Range
64
Administrator Guide
The corresponding field is blank if a line has not yet been leased
or if the unit has not been configured.
Max. 24 digits
Document Version
2012-03
3.4.1 Basic Network Settings
Default Value
Not applicable.
VoIP Status
Description
Indicates the current VoIP status of each line (reference only).
Value Range
•
•
•
Registered: The unit has been registered to the SIP server, and the
line can be used.
Registering: The unit is being registered to the SIP server, and the
line cannot be used.
Blank: The line has not been leased, or the unit has not been
configured yet.
Note
•
Default Value
Immediately after starting up the unit, the phone numbers of the
lines will be displayed, but the status of the line may not be
displayed because the unit is still being registered to the SIP
server. To display the status, wait about 30 to 60 seconds, and
then click [Refresh] to obtain updated status information.
Not applicable.
3.4 Network
This section provides detailed descriptions about all the settings classified under the [Network] tab.
3.4.1 Basic Network Settings
This screen allows you to change basic network settings such as whether to use a DHCP server, and the IP
address of the unit.
Note
•
Changes to the settings on this screen are applied when the message "Complete" appears after clicking
[Save]. Because the IP address of the unit will probably be changed if you change these settings, you
will not be able to continue using the Web user interface. To continue configuring the unit from the Web
user interface, log in to the Web user interface again after confirming the newly assigned IP address
of the unit using the phone user interface. In addition, if the IP address of the PC from which you try to
access the Web user interface has been changed, close the Web port once by selecting "Off" for
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
65
3.4.1 Basic Network Settings
"Embedded web" on the base unit (KX-TGP55x only) or handset (® see Opening/Closing the Web
Port in 3.2.1 Before Accessing the Web User Interface).
3.4.1.1 Connection Mode
Connection Mode
Description
Selects whether to assign the IP address automatically (DHCP) or
manually (static).
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
DHCP
Phone User Interface
Reference
Configuring Settings from the Base Unit (KX-TGP55x only)/Handset
(Page 17)
Configuration File Reference
CONNECTION_TYPE (Page 157)
DHCP
Static
3.4.1.2 DHCP Settings
Host Name
Description
Specifies the host name for the unit to send to the DHCP server.
Note
•
Value Range
This setting is available only when [Connection Mode] is set
to [DHCP].
Max. 63 characters
Note
•
66
Administrator Guide
You cannot leave this field empty.
Document Version
2012-03
3.4.1 Basic Network Settings
Default Value
Model number (example: TGP5nn)
Configuration File Reference
HOST_NAME (Page 158)
Domain Name Server
Description
Selects whether to receive DNS server addresses automatically or to
assign a DNS server addresses (up to 2) manually.
Note
•
Value Range
•
•
This setting is available only when [Connection Mode] is set
to [DHCP].
Receive DNS server address automatically
Use the following settings
– DNS1
– DNS2
Note
•
If you select [Use the following settings], specify the IP
address(es) of the primary and, if necessary, secondary DNS
server(s) manually. The permissible values are:
Max. 15 characters ("n.n.n.n" [n=0–255], except "0.0.0.0",
"255.255.255.255", "127.0.0.1", etc.)
Default Value
Receive DNS server address automatically
Phone User Interface
Reference
Configuring Settings from the Base Unit (KX-TGP55x only)/Handset
(Page 17)
Configuration File Reference
DHCP_DNS_ENABLE (Page 158)
3.4.1.3 Static Settings
Static IP Address
Description
Specifies the IP address for the unit.
Note
•
This setting is available only when [Connection Mode] is set
to [Static].
Value Range
Max. 15 characters ("n.n.n.n" [n=0–255], except "0.0.0.0",
"255.255.255.255", "127.0.0.1", etc.)
Default Value
Not stored.
Phone User Interface
Reference
Configuring Settings from the Base Unit (KX-TGP55x only)/Handset
(Page 17)
Configuration File Reference
STATIC_IP_ADDRESS (Page 158)
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
67
3.4.1 Basic Network Settings
Subnet Mask
Description
Specifies the subnet mask for the unit.
Note
•
This setting is available only when [Connection Mode] is set
to [Static].
Value Range
Max. 15 characters ("n.n.n.n" [n=0–255], except "0.0.0.0",
"255.255.255.255", "127.0.0.1", etc.)
Default Value
Not stored.
Phone User Interface
Reference
Configuring Settings from the Base Unit (KX-TGP55x only)/Handset
(Page 17)
Configuration File Reference
STATIC_SUBNET (Page 159)
Default Gateway
Description
Specifies the IP address of the default gateway for the network where
the unit is connected.
Note
•
This setting is available only when [Connection Mode] is set
to [Static].
Value Range
Max. 15 characters ("n.n.n.n" [n=0–255], except "0.0.0.0",
"255.255.255.255", "127.0.0.1", etc.)
Default Value
Not stored.
Phone User Interface
Reference
Configuring Settings from the Base Unit (KX-TGP55x only)/Handset
(Page 17)
Configuration File Reference
STATIC_GATEWAY (Page 159)
DNS1
Description
Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.
Note
•
68
This setting is available only when [Connection Mode] is set
to [Static].
Value Range
Max. 15 characters ("n.n.n.n" [n=0–255], except "0.0.0.0",
"255.255.255.255", "127.0.0.1", etc.)
Default Value
Not stored.
Phone User Interface
Reference
Configuring Settings from the Base Unit (KX-TGP55x only)/Handset
(Page 17)
Configuration File Reference
USER_DNS1_ADDR (Page 160)
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
3.4.2 Ethernet Port Settings
DNS2
Description
Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.
Note
•
This setting is available only when [Connection Mode] is set
to [Static].
Value Range
Max. 15 characters ("n.n.n.n" [n=0–255], except "0.0.0.0",
"255.255.255.255", "127.0.0.1", etc.)
Default Value
Not stored.
Phone User Interface
Reference
Configuring Settings from the Base Unit (KX-TGP55x only)/Handset
(Page 17)
Configuration File Reference
USER_DNS2_ADDR (Page 160)
3.4.2 Ethernet Port Settings
This screen allows you to change the connection mode of the Ethernet ports and the VLAN settings.
Note
•
•
When you change the settings on this screen and click [Save], after the message "Complete" has been
displayed, the base unit will restart automatically with the new settings applied. If a unit is on a call
when "Complete" has been displayed, the base unit will restart after the unit returns to idle.
Incorrect settings may cause a network failure. In such a case, you cannot access the Web user
interface anymore. To access it again, you need to correct the speed/duplex settings (® see
2.1.2 Speed/Duplex Settings) or perform IP Reset (® see 2.1.4 IP Reset) through phone user
interface programming.
3.4.2.1 Link Speed/Duplex Mode
LAN Port
Description
Document Version
2012-03
Selects the connection mode (link speed and duplex mode) of the LAN
port.
Administrator Guide
69
3.4.2 Ethernet Port Settings
Value Range
•
•
•
•
•
Default Value
Auto Negotiation
Phone User Interface
Reference
2.1.2 Speed/Duplex Settings (Page 36)
Auto Negotiation
100 Mbps/Full Duplex
100 Mbps/Half Duplex
10 Mbps/Full Duplex
10 Mbps/Half Duplex
PC Port (KX-TGP55x only)
Description
Selects the connection mode (link speed and duplex mode) of the PC
port.
Value Range
•
•
•
•
•
Default Value
Auto Negotiation
Phone User Interface
Reference
2.1.2 Speed/Duplex Settings (Page 36)
Auto Negotiation
100 Mbps/Full Duplex
100 Mbps/Half Duplex
10 Mbps/Full Duplex
10 Mbps/Half Duplex
3.4.2.2 VLAN Settings
Enable VLAN
Description
Selects whether to use the VLAN feature to perform VoIP
communication securely.
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
No
Phone User Interface
Reference
2.1.3 VLAN Settings (KX-TGP55x only) (Page 37)
Configuration File Reference
VLAN_ENABLE (Page 162)
Yes
No
IP Phone (VLAN ID)
70
Description
Specifies the VLAN ID for this unit.
Value Range
1–4094
Default Value
2
Phone User Interface
Reference
2.1.3 VLAN Settings (KX-TGP55x only) (Page 37)
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
3.4.2 Ethernet Port Settings
Configuration File Reference
VLAN_ID_IP_PHONE (Page 162)
IP Phone (Priority)
Description
Selects the priority number for the unit.
Value Range
0–7
Default Value
7
Phone User Interface
Reference
2.1.3 VLAN Settings (KX-TGP55x only) (Page 37)
Configuration File Reference
VLAN_PRI_IP_PHONE (Page 162)
PC (VLAN ID) (KX-TGP55x only)
Description
Specifies the VLAN ID for the PC.
Value Range
1–4094
Default Value
1
Phone User Interface
Reference
2.1.3 VLAN Settings (KX-TGP55x only) (Page 37)
Configuration File Reference
VLAN_ID_PC (KX-TGP55x only) (Page 163)
PC (Priority) (KX-TGP55x only)
Description
Selects the priority number for the PC.
Value Range
0–7
Default Value
0
Phone User Interface
Reference
2.1.3 VLAN Settings (KX-TGP55x only) (Page 37)
Configuration File Reference
VLAN_PRI_PC (KX-TGP55x only) (Page 163)
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
71
3.4.3 HTTP Client Settings
3.4.3 HTTP Client Settings
This screen allows you to change the HTTP client settings for the unit in order to access the HTTP server of
your phone system and download configuration files.
3.4.3.1 HTTP Client Settings
HTTP Version
Description
Selects which version of the HTTP protocol to use for HTTP
communication.
Value Range
•
•
HTTP/1.0
HTTP/1.1
Note
•
For this unit, it is strongly recommended that you select [HTTP/
1.0]. However, if the HTTP server does not function well with
HTTP/1.0, try changing the setting [HTTP/1.1].
Default Value
HTTP/1.0
Configuration File Reference
HTTP_VER (Page 164)
HTTP User Agent
Description
72
Administrator Guide
Specifies the text string to send as the user agent in the header of HTTP
requests.
Document Version
2012-03
3.4.3 HTTP Client Settings
Value Range
Max. 40 characters
Note
•
•
•
•
•
You cannot leave this field empty.
If "{mac}" is included in this field, it will be replaced with the
unit’s MAC address in lower-case.
If "{MAC}" is included in this field, it will be replaced with the
unit’s MAC address in upper-case.
If "{MODEL}" is included in this field, it will be replaced with the
unit’s model name.
If "{fwver}" is included in this field, it will be replaced with the
firmware version of the unit.
Default Value
Panasonic_{MODEL}/{fwver} ({mac})
Configuration File Reference
HTTP_USER_AGENT (Page 164)
3.4.3.2 HTTP Authentication
Authentication ID
Description
Specifies the authentication ID required to access the HTTP server.
Value Range
Max. 64 characters (except ", &, ', :, <, >, and space)
Default Value
Not stored.
Authentication Password
Description
Specifies the authentication password used to access the HTTP server.
Value Range
Max. 64 characters (except ", &, ', :, <, >, and space)
Default Value
Not stored.
3.4.3.3 Proxy Server Settings
Enable Proxy
Description
Selects whether to use the proxy server.
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
No
Yes
No
Proxy Server Address
Description
Document Version
2012-03
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the proxy server.
Administrator Guide
73
3.4.4 Global Address Detection
Value Range
Max. 127 characters
Note
•
Default Value
You cannot leave this field empty if [Enable Proxy] is set to
[Yes].
Not stored.
Proxy Server Port
Description
Specifies the port number of the proxy server.
Value Range
1–65535
Default Value
8080
3.4.4 Global Address Detection
This screen allows you to configure the Global Address Detection feature and STUN server settings. The global
IP address of the network the unit is connected to will be detected periodically. If the global IP address has
changed, the new address will be registered to the SIP server.
Note
•
If the unit is connected directly to the Internet, or the network global address is static (i.e., does not
change), you do not need to configure Global Address Detection.
3.4.4.1 Global Address Detection
Detection Method
74
Description
Selects the method to use for detecting the global IP address.
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
STUN
Administrator Guide
STUN
SIP
Document Version
2012-03
3.4.5 Static NAPT Settings
Detection Interval
Description
Specifies the interval, in seconds, to wait between attempts to detect
the global IP address.
Value Range
0, 10–65535 (0: Disable)
Note
•
Default Value
When [Detection Method] is set to [SIP], the value "0" disables
detection and a value other than "0" enables detection.
0
3.4.4.2 STUN Server
STUN Server Address
Description
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the STUN server.
Value Range
Max. 127 characters
Default Value
Not stored.
Configuration File Reference
STUN_SERV_ADDR (Page 166)
STUN Server Port
Description
Specifies the port number of the STUN server.
Value Range
1–65535
Default Value
3478
Configuration File Reference
STUN_SERV_PORT (Page 167)
3.4.5 Static NAPT Settings
This screen allows you to configure the NAPT (Network Address Port Translation) settings. If the unit is
connected behind a router that uses NAT/NAPT to translate private IP addresses, global IP addresses, VoIP
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
75
3.4.5 Static NAPT Settings
packets might be blocked by the router, depending on the SIP server. To avoid this problem, this setting is
required. For details, see 1.1.10.2 NAT (Network Address Translation) Setup.
3.4.5.1 Global IP Address
Global IP Address
Description
Specifies the global IP address of your network.
Note
•
•
You must enter a value in this field if at least 1 of [Line 1]–
[Line 8] is set to [Yes], or when port numbers are specified in
[Channel 1–3].
The global IP address will reflect SIP messages and RTP
packets.
Value Range
IP address in dotted-decimal notation ("n.n.n.n" [n=0-255])
Default Value
Not stored.
3.4.5.2 Enable Global IP Address Usage per Line
Line 1–Line 8
76
Description
Selects whether to enable the NAT Traversal feature for each line.
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
No
Administrator Guide
Yes
No
Document Version
2012-03
3.5.1 Web Language
3.4.5.3 External RTP Port
Channel 1–3
Description
Specifies the external RTP port number used for voice communication
for each channel.
Value Range
0, 1024–49150 (0: Disable, even number only)
Note
•
•
•
Default Value
Each channel must be set to a unique port number, and all port
numbers must be an even number.
You cannot specify here the same port number as any of the
port numbers specified for the individual lines in [Source
Port] in 3.6.2.5 SIP Source Port. In addition, you cannot
specify a port number that is 1 less than a port number specified
in [Source Port] if the source port number is an odd number.
All 3 channels must be set to either enable or disable at the
same time.
0
3.5 System
This section provides detailed descriptions about all the settings classified under the [System] tab.
3.5.1 Web Language
This screen allows you to select the language used for the Web user interface. The language setting is only
applicable when you log in to the Web user interface as User.
Note
•
•
•
If you change the language while logged in to the Web user interface with the User account, the
language will be changed after the message "Complete" is displayed. If you are logged in with the
Administrator account, the language will be changed when a user logs in to the Web user interface as
User.
The language used for the Web user interface for the Administrator account is always English.
The language used for the handsets (or the base unit [KX-TGP55x only]) remains unchanged even if
the language for the Web user interface is changed.
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
77
3.5.2 Administrator Password
3.5.1.1 Web Language
Language
Description
Selects the language used for the Web user interface when logged in
with the User account.
Value Range
•
•
•
English (US)
English (UK)
Other languages
Note
•
Default Value
The available languages may differ depending on the country/
area of use.
English (US)
English (UK)
Note
•
The default is one of these, depending on the country/area of
use.
3.5.2 Administrator Password
This screen allows you to change the password used to authenticate the Administrator account when logging
in to the Web user interface.
Note
•
•
For security reasons, the characters entered for the password are masked by special characters, which
differ depending on the Web browser.
After you change the administrator password, the next time you access the Web user interface, the
authentication dialog box appears. 2 consecutive login failures will result in an error ("401
Unauthorized"). This restriction only applies the first time you attempt to log in after changing the
password. In all other circumstances, an error occurs after 3 unsuccessful login attempts.
3.5.2.1 Change Administrator Password
New Password
Description
78
Administrator Guide
Specifies the password to use to authenticate the Administrator account
when logging in to the Web user interface.
Document Version
2012-03
3.5.3 Change User Password
Value Range
6–16 characters (except ", &, ', :, <, >, and space)
Default Value
adminpass
Configuration File Reference
ADMIN_PASS (Page 141)
Confirm New Password
Description
Specifies the same password that you entered in [New Password] for
confirmation.
Value Range
6–16 characters (except ", &, ', :, <, >, and space)
Note
•
This value must be the same as the value entered in [New
Password].
Default Value
adminpass
Configuration File Reference
ADMIN_PASS (Page 141)
3.5.3 Change User Password
This screen allows you to change the password used to authenticate the User account when logging in to the
Web user interface.
Note
•
•
For security reasons, the characters entered for the password are masked by special characters, which
differ depending on the Web browser.
After you change the user password, the next time you access the Web user interface, the
authentication dialog box appears. 2 consecutive login failures will result in an error ("401
Unauthorized"). This restriction only applies the first time you attempt to log in after changing the
password. In all other circumstances, an error occurs after 3 unsuccessful login attempts.
3.5.3.1 Change User Password
New Password
Description
Specifies the password to use to authenticate the User account when
logging in to the Web user interface.
Value Range
6–16 characters (except ", &, ', :, <, >, and space)
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
79
3.5.4 Web Server Settings
Default Value
Not stored.
Note
•
Configuration File Reference
When a user logs in to the Web user interface for the first time,
after clicking OK on the authentication dialog box, the [Change
User Password] screen is displayed automatically to make the
user set a password.
USER_PASS (Page 142)
Confirm New Password
Description
Specifies the same password that you entered in [New Password] for
confirmation.
Value Range
6–16 characters (except ", &, ', :, <, >, and space)
Note
•
This value must be the same as the value entered in [New
Password].
Default Value
Not stored.
Configuration File Reference
USER_PASS (Page 142)
3.5.4 Web Server Settings
This screen allows you to change the Web server settings.
3.5.4.1 Web Server Settings
Web Server Port
Description
Specifies the port number used by the Web server.
Value Range
80, 1024–49151
Note
•
80
Administrator Guide
You cannot specify here the same port number as any of the
port numbers specified for the individual lines in [Source
Port] in 3.6.2.5 SIP Source Port.
Document Version
2012-03
3.5.5 Time Adjust Settings
Default Value
80
Note
•
When you change the default value of the port number to a
value other than "80", such as "8080", enter the URL for
accessing the Web user interface using the following format:
"http://192.168.0.100:8080/"
(192.168.0.100: IP address of the unit)
Port Close Timer
Description
Specifies the length of time, in minutes, to keep the Web port open when
there has been no communication between the unit and the PC. If the
specified length of time elapses without any communication, the Web
port closes automatically. Communication is detected when you click a
tab, menu item, the [Save] button, or by reloading the application or
pressing the F5 key.
Value Range
1–1440
Default Value
30
3.5.5 Time Adjust Settings
This screen allows you to enable automatic clock adjustment using an NTP server and configure the settings
for DST (Daylight Saving Time), also known as Summer Time.
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
81
3.5.5 Time Adjust Settings
3.5.5.1 Synchronization
Enable Synchronization by NTP
Description
Selects whether to enable the unit to automatically adjust its clock
according to the time information provided by an NTP server.
Value Range
•
•
Yes
No
Note
•
Default Value
Even if you select [Yes], this feature will not function properly
if the NTP server address setting is invalid.
Yes
Synchronization Interval
Description
Specifies the interval, in seconds, between synchronizations with the
NTP server.
Value Range
10–86400
Default Value
43200
Configuration File Reference
TIME_QUERY_INTVL (Page 166)
3.5.5.2 Time Server
NTP Server Address
Description
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the NTP server.
Value Range
Max. 127 characters
Default Value
Not stored.
Configuration File Reference
NTP_ADDR (Page 166)
3.5.5.3 Time Zone
Time Zone
82
Description
Selects your time zone.
Value Range
GMT -12:00–GMT +13:00
Default Value
GMT
Configuration File Reference
TIME_ZONE (Page 142)
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
3.5.5 Time Adjust Settings
3.5.5.4 Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time)
Enable DST (Enable Summer Time)
Description
Selects whether to enable DST (Summer Time).
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
No
Configuration File Reference
DST_ENABLE (Page 143)
Yes
No
DST Offset (Summer Time Offset)
Description
Specifies the amount of time, in minutes, to change the time when
[Enable DST (Enable Summer Time)] is set to [Yes].
Value Range
0–720
Default Value
60
Configuration File Reference
DST_OFFSET (Page 143)
3.5.5.5 Start Day and Time of DST (Start Day and Time of Summer Time)
Month
Description
Selects the month in which DST (Summer Time) starts.
Value Range
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Default Value
March
Configuration File Reference
DST_START_MONTH (Page 144)
January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
Day of Week
Using the 2 following settings, specify on which day of the selected month DST (Summer Time) starts. For
example, to specify the second Sunday, select [Second] and [Sunday].
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
83
3.5.5 Time Adjust Settings
Description
Selects the number of the week on which DST (Summer Time) starts.
Value Range
•
•
•
•
•
Default Value
Second
Configuration File Reference
DST_START_ORDINAL_DAY (Page 144)
Description
Selects the day of the week on which DST (Summer Time) starts.
Value Range
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Default Value
Sunday
Configuration File Reference
DST_START_DAY_OF_WEEK (Page 144)
First
Second
Third
Fourth
Last
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Time
Description
Specifies the start time of DST (Summer Time) in minutes after 12:00
AM.
Value Range
0–1439
Default Value
120
Configuration File Reference
DST_START_TIME (Page 145)
3.5.5.6 End Day and Time of DST (End Day and Time of Summer Time)
Month
Description
84
Administrator Guide
Selects the month in which DST (Summer Time) ends.
Document Version
2012-03
3.5.5 Time Adjust Settings
Value Range
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Default Value
October
Configuration File Reference
DST_STOP_MONTH (Page 145)
January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
Day of Week
Using the 2 following settings, specify on which day of the selected month DST (Summer Time) ends. For
example, to specify the second Sunday, select [Second] and [Sunday].
Description
Selects the number of the week on which DST (Summer Time) ends.
Value Range
•
•
•
•
•
Default Value
Second
Configuration File Reference
DST_STOP_ORDINAL_DAY (Page 145)
Description
Selects the day of the week on which DST (Summer Time) ends.
Value Range
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Default Value
Sunday
Configuration File Reference
DST_STOP_DAY_OF_WEEK (Page 145)
Document Version
2012-03
First
Second
Third
Fourth
Last
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Administrator Guide
85
3.6.1 SIP Settings
Time
Description
Specifies the end time of DST (Summer Time) in minutes after 12:00
AM.
Value Range
0–1439
Default Value
120
Configuration File Reference
DST_STOP_TIME (Page 146)
3.6 VoIP
This section provides detailed descriptions about all the settings classified under the [VoIP] tab.
3.6.1 SIP Settings
This screen allows you to change the SIP settings that are common to all lines.
3.6.1.1 SIP Setting
SIP User Agent
Description
86
Administrator Guide
Specifies the text string to send as the user agent in the headers of SIP
messages.
Document Version
2012-03
3.6.1 SIP Settings
Value Range
Max. 40 characters
Note
•
•
•
•
•
You cannot leave this field empty.
If "{mac}" is included in this field, it will be replaced with the
unit’s MAC address in lower-case.
If "{MAC}" is included in this field, it will be replaced with the
unit’s MAC address in upper-case.
If "{MODEL}" is included in this field, it will be replaced with the
unit’s model name.
If "{fwver}" is included in this field, it will be replaced with the
firmware version of the unit.
Default Value
Panasonic_{MODEL}/{fwver} ({mac})
Configuration File Reference
SIP_USER_AGENT (Page 188)
3.6.1.2 Transport Protocol for SIP
Transport Protocol
Description
Selects which transport layer protocol to use for sending SIP packets.
Note
•
If you change this setting, the unit will restart automatically once
the message "Complete" appears. If the unit is on a call, it will
restart after it returns to idle.
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
UDP
Configuration File Reference
SIP_TRANSPORT_[1–8] (Page 203)
Document Version
2012-03
UDP
TCP
Administrator Guide
87
3.6.2 SIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 8]
3.6.2 SIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 8]
This screen allows you to change the SIP settings that are specific to each line.
3.6.2.1 Phone Number
Phone Number
Description
Specifies the phone number to use as the user ID required for
registration to the SIP registrar server.
Note
•
Value Range
When you use characters that are not allowed for this setting,
you must specify this setting and then [Line ID].
Max. 24 characters (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Note
•
88
No other characters are allowed.
Default Value
Not stored.
Configuration File Reference
PHONE_NUMBER_[1–8] (Page 206)
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
3.6.2 SIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 8]
Line ID
Description
Specifies the unique ID used by the SIP registrar server.
Note
•
When you use characters that are not allowed for [Phone
Number], you must specify [Phone Number] and then this
setting.
Value Range
Max. 24 characters (except @)
Default Value
Not stored.
Configuration File Reference
LINE_ID_[1–8] (Page 206)
3.6.2.2 SIP Server
Registrar Server Address
Description
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP registrar server.
Value Range
Max. 127 characters
Default Value
Not stored.
Configuration File Reference
SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_[1–8] (Page 190)
Registrar Server Port
Description
Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP
registrar server.
Value Range
1–65535
Default Value
5060
Configuration File Reference
SIP_RGSTR_PORT_[1–8] (Page 190)
Proxy Server Address
Description
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP proxy server.
Value Range
Max. 127 characters
Default Value
Not stored.
Configuration File Reference
SIP_PRXY_ADDR_[1–8] (Page 189)
Proxy Server Port
Description
Document Version
2012-03
Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP proxy
server.
Administrator Guide
89
3.6.2 SIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 8]
Value Range
1–65535
Default Value
5060
Configuration File Reference
SIP_PRXY_PORT_[1–8] (Page 190)
Presence Server Address
Description
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP presence server.
Value Range
Max. 127 characters
Default Value
Not stored.
Configuration File Reference
SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_[1–8] (Page 198)
Presence Server Port
Description
Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP
presence server.
Value Range
1–65535
Default Value
5060
Configuration File Reference
SIP_PRSNC_PORT_[1–8] (Page 199)
3.6.2.3 Outbound Proxy Server
Outbound Proxy Server Address
Description
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP outbound proxy server.
Value Range
Max. 127 characters
Default Value
Not stored.
Configuration File Reference
SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_[1–8] (Page 203)
Outbound Proxy Server Port
90
Description
Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP
outbound proxy server.
Value Range
1–65535
Default Value
5060
Configuration File Reference
SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_[1–8] (Page 203)
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
3.6.2 SIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 8]
3.6.2.4 SIP Service Domain
Service Domain
Description
Specifies the domain name provided by your phone system dealer. The
domain name is the part of the SIP URI that comes after the "@" symbol.
Value Range
Max. 127 characters
Default Value
Not stored.
Configuration File Reference
SIP_SVCDOMAIN_[1–8] (Page 190)
3.6.2.5 SIP Source Port
Source Port
Description
Specifies the source port number used by the unit for SIP
communication.
Value Range
1024–49151
Note
•
•
•
You cannot specify here the same port number as any of the
port numbers in [Channel 1–3] in 3.4.5.3 External RTP Port
(if they are configured). In addition, you cannot specify a port
number that is 1 greater than a port number specified in
[Channel 1–3].
The SIP port number for each line must be unique.
You cannot specify the same port number as the port number
specified in [Web Server Port] in 3.5.4.1 Web Server
Settings.
Default Value
5060 (for Line 1)
5070 (for Line 2)
5080 (for Line 3)
5090 (for Line 4)
5100 (for Line 5)
5110 (for Line 6)
5120 (for Line 7)
5130 (for Line 8)
Configuration File Reference
SIP_SRC_PORT_[1–8] (Page 189)
3.6.2.6 SIP Authentication
Authentication ID
Description
Specifies the authentication ID required to access the SIP server.
Value Range
Max. 64 characters (except ", &, ', :, <, >, and space)
Default Value
Not stored.
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
91
3.6.2 SIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 8]
Configuration File Reference
SIP_AUTHID_[1–8] (Page 188)
Authentication Password
Description
Specifies the authentication password used to access the SIP server.
Value Range
Max. 64 characters (except ", &, ', :, <, >, and space)
Default Value
Not stored.
Configuration File Reference
SIP_PASS_[1–8] (Page 189)
3.6.2.7 DNS
Enable DNS SRV lookup
Description
Selects whether to request the DNS server to translate domain names
into IP addresses using the SRV record.
Value Range
•
•
Yes
No
Note
•
If you select [Yes], the unit will perform a DNS SRV lookup for
a SIP registrar server, SIP proxy server, SIP outbound proxy
server, or SIP presence server. If you select [No], the unit will
not perform a DNS SRV lookup for a SIP registrar server, SIP
proxy server, SIP outbound proxy server, or SIP presence
server.
Default Value
Yes
Configuration File Reference
SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_[1–8] (Page 196)
SRV lookup Prefix for UDP
Description
Specifies a prefix to add to the domain name when performing a DNS
SRV lookup using UDP.
Note
•
92
This setting is available only when [Enable DNS SRV
lookup] is set to [Yes].
Value Range
Max. 32 characters
Default Value
_sip._udp.
Configuration File Reference
SIP_UDP_SRV_PREFIX_[1–8] (Page 197)
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
3.6.2 SIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 8]
SRV lookup Prefix for TCP
Description
Specifies a prefix to add to the domain name when performing a DNS
SRV lookup using TCP.
Note
•
This setting is available only when [Enable DNS SRV
lookup] is set to [Yes].
Value Range
Max. 32 characters
Default Value
_sip._tcp.
Configuration File Reference
SIP_TCP_SRV_PREFIX_[1–8] (Page 197)
3.6.2.8 Timer Settings
T1 Timer
Description
Selects the default interval, in milliseconds, between transmissions of
SIP messages. For details, refer to RFC 3261.
Value Range
•
•
•
•
•
Default Value
500
Configuration File Reference
SIP_TIMER_T1_[1–8] (Page 194)
250
500
1000
2000
4000
T2 Timer
Description
Selects the maximum interval, in seconds, between transmissions of
SIP messages. For details, refer to RFC 3261.
Value Range
•
•
•
•
•
Default Value
4
Configuration File Reference
SIP_TIMER_T2_[1–8] (Page 195)
2
4
8
16
32
INVITE Retry Count
Description
Selects the number of times that INVITE requests are retransmitted
when no reply is received from the server.
Value Range
1–6
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
93
3.6.2 SIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 8]
Default Value
6
Configuration File Reference
INVITE_RTXN_[1–8] (Page 195)
Non-INVITE Retry Count
Description
Selects the number of times that non-INVITE requests (general SIP
messages) are retransmitted when no reply is received from the server.
Value Range
1–10
Default Value
10
Configuration File Reference
OTHER_RTXN_[1–8] (Page 195)
3.6.2.9 Quality of Service (QoS)
SIP Packet QoS (DSCP)
94
Description
Selects the DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point) level of DiffServ
applied to SIP packets.
Value Range
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Default Value
Best Effort (default) (000 000)
Configuration File Reference
TOS_SIP_[1–8] (Page 192)
Administrator Guide
Best Effort (default) (000 000)
AF11 (Class1/Level Low) (001 010)
AF12 (Class1/Level Medium) (001 100)
AF13 (Class1/Level High) (001 110)
AF21 (Class2/Level Low) (010 010)
AF22 (Class2/Level Medium) (010 100)
AF23 (Class2/Level High) (010 110)
AF31 (Class3/Level Low) (011 010)
AF32 (Class3/Level Medium) (011 100)
AF33 (Class3/Level High) (011 110)
AF41 (Class4/Level Low) (100 010)
AF42 (Class4/Level Medium) (100 100)
AF43 (Class4/Level High) (100 110)
CS1 (Class1) (001 000)
CS2 (Class2) (010 000)
CS3 (Class3) (011 000)
CS4 (Class4) (100 000)
CS5 (Class5) (101 000)
CS6 (Class6) (110 000)
CS7 (Class7) (111 000)
EF (Expedited Forwarding) (101 110)
Document Version
2012-03
3.6.2 SIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 8]
3.6.2.10 SIP extensions
Supports 100rel (RFC 3262)
Description
Selects whether to add the option tag 100rel to the "Supported" header
of the INVITE message. For details, refer to RFC 3262.
Value Range
•
•
Yes
No
Note
•
If you select [Yes], the Reliability of Provisional Responses
function will be enabled. The option tag 100rel will be added to
the "Supported" header of the INVITE message and to the
"Require" header of the "1xx" provisional message. If you select
[No], the option tag 100rel will not be used.
Default Value
No
Configuration File Reference
SIP_100REL_ENABLE_[1–8] (Page 198)
Supports Session Timer (RFC 4028)
Description
Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that the unit waits before
terminating SIP sessions when no reply to repeated requests is
received. For details, refer to RFC 4028.
Value Range
0, 60–65535 (0: Disable)
Default Value
0
Configuration File Reference
SIP_SESSION_TIME_[1–8] (Page 191)
3.6.2.11 Keep Alive
Keep Alive Interval
Description
Specifies the interval, in seconds, between transmissions of the Keep
Alive packet to the unit in order to maintain the NAT binding information.
Note
•
This setting is available only when [Transport Protocol] is set
to [UDP].
Value Range
0, 10–300 (0: Disable)
Default Value
0
Configuration File Reference
PORT_PUNCH_INTVL_[1–8] (Page 200)
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
95
3.6.3 VoIP Settings
3.6.2.12 Security
Enable SSAF (SIP Source Address Filter)
Description
Selects whether to enable SSAF (SIP Source Address Filter) for the
SIP servers (registrar server, proxy server, and presence server).
Value Range
•
•
Yes
No
Note
•
If you select [Yes], the unit receives SIP messages only from
the source addresses stored in the SIP servers (registrar
server, proxy server, and presence server), and not from other
addresses. However, if [Outbound Proxy Server Address] in
3.6.2.3 Outbound Proxy Server is specified, the unit also
receives SIP messages from the source address stored in the
SIP outbound proxy server.
Default Value
No
Configuration File Reference
SIP_DETECT_SSAF_[1–8] (Page 205)
3.6.3 VoIP Settings
This screen allows you to change the VoIP settings that are common to all lines.
3.6.3.1 RTP Settings
RTP Packet Time
Description
96
Administrator Guide
Selects the interval, in milliseconds, between transmissions of RTP
packets.
Document Version
2012-03
3.6.3 VoIP Settings
Value Range
•
•
•
Default Value
20
Configuration File Reference
RTP_PTIME (Page 183)
20
30
40
Minimum RTP Port Number
Description
Specifies the lowest port number that the unit will use for RTP packets.
Note
•
Value Range
If port numbers are specified in [Channel 1–3] in
3.4.5.3 External RTP Port, this setting is ignored and the
corresponding external RTP port is enabled.
1024–48750 (even number only)
Note
•
The value for this setting must be less than or equal to
"[Maximum RTP Port Number] - 400".
Default Value
16000
Configuration File Reference
RTP_PORT_MIN (Page 183)
Maximum RTP Port Number
Description
Specifies the highest port number that the unit will use for RTP packets.
Note
•
Value Range
If port numbers are specified in [Channel 1–3] in
3.4.5.3 External RTP Port, this setting is ignored and the
corresponding external RTP port is enabled.
1424–49150 (even number only)
Note
•
The value for this setting must be greater than or equal to
"[Minimum RTP Port Number] + 400".
Default Value
20000
Configuration File Reference
RTP_PORT_MAX (Page 183)
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
97
3.6.4 VoIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 8]
3.6.4 VoIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 8]
This screen allows you to change the VoIP settings that are specific to each line.
3.6.4.1 Quality of Service (QoS)
RTP Packet QoS (DSCP)
Description
98
Administrator Guide
Selects the DSCP level of DiffServ applied to RTP packets.
Document Version
2012-03
3.6.4 VoIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 8]
Value Range
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Default Value
Best Effort (default) (000 000)
Configuration File Reference
TOS_RTP_[1–8] (Page 180)
Best Effort (default) (000 000)
AF11 (Class1/Level Low) (001 010)
AF12 (Class1/Level Medium) (001 100)
AF13 (Class1/Level High) (001 110)
AF21 (Class2/Level Low) (010 010)
AF22 (Class2/Level Medium) (010 100)
AF23 (Class2/Level High) (010 110)
AF31 (Class3/Level Low) (011 010)
AF32 (Class3/Level Medium) (011 100)
AF33 (Class3/Level High) (011 110)
AF41 (Class4/Level Low) (100 010)
AF42 (Class4/Level Medium) (100 100)
AF43 (Class4/Level High) (100 110)
CS1 (Class1) (001 000)
CS2 (Class2) (010 000)
CS3 (Class3) (011 000)
CS4 (Class4) (100 000)
CS5 (Class5) (101 000)
CS6 (Class6) (110 000)
CS7 (Class7) (111 000)
EF (Expedited Forwarding) (101 110)
3.6.4.2 Statistical Information
RTCP Interval
Description
Specifies the interval, in seconds, between RTCP packets.
Value Range
0, 5–65535 (0: Disable)
Default Value
0
Configuration File Reference
RTCP_INTVL_[1–8] (Page 181)
3.6.4.3 Jitter Buffer
Maximum Delay
Description
Document Version
2012-03
Specifies the maximum delay, in 10-millisecond units, of the jitter buffer.
Administrator Guide
99
3.6.4 VoIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 8]
Value Range
3–50 (´ 10 ms)
Note
•
This setting is subject to the following conditions:
– This value must be greater than [Initial Delay]
– This value must be greater than [Minimum Delay]
– [Initial Delay] must be greater than or equal to [Minimum
Delay]
Default Value
20 (´ 10 ms)
Configuration File Reference
MAX_DELAY_[1–8] (Page 181)
Minimum Delay
Description
Specifies the minimum delay, in 10-millisecond units, of the jitter buffer.
Value Range
1 or 2 (´ 10 ms)
Note
•
This setting is subject to the following conditions:
– This value must be less than or equal to [Initial Delay]
– This value must be less than [Maximum Delay]
– [Maximum Delay] must be greater than [Initial Delay]
Default Value
2 (´ 10 ms)
Configuration File Reference
MIN_DELAY_[1–8] (Page 182)
Initial Delay
Description
Specifies the initial delay, in 10-millisecond units, of the jitter buffer.
Value Range
1–7 (´ 10 ms)
Note
•
This setting is subject to the following conditions:
– This value must be greater than or equal to [Minimum
Delay]
– This value must be less than [Maximum Delay]
Default Value
2 (´ 10 ms)
Configuration File Reference
NOM_DELAY_[1–8] (Page 182)
3.6.4.4 DTMF
DTMF Type
Description
100
Administrator Guide
Selects the method for transmitting DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency)
tones.
Document Version
2012-03
3.6.4 VoIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 8]
Value Range
•
•
Outband
Inband
Note
•
If you select [Outband], DTMF tones will be sent through SDP
(Session Description Protocol), compliant with RFC 2833. If you
select [Inband], DTMF tones will be encoded in the RTP
stream.
Default Value
Outband
Configuration File Reference
OUTBANDDTMF_[1–8] (Page 184)
Telephone-event Payload Type
Description
Specifies the RFC 2833 payload type for DTMF tones.
Note
•
This setting is available only when [DTMF Type] is set to
[Outband].
Value Range
96–127
Default Value
101
Configuration File Reference
TELEVENT_PTYPE_[1–8] (Page 184)
3.6.4.5 Call Hold
Supports RFC 2543 (c=0.0.0.0)
Description
Selects whether to enable the RFC 2543 Call Hold feature on this line.
Value Range
•
•
Yes
No
Note
•
If you select [Yes], the "c=0.0.0.0" syntax will be set in SDP
when sending a re-INVITE message to hold the call. If you
select [No], the "c=x.x.x.x" syntax will be set in SDP.
Default Value
Yes
Configuration File Reference
RFC2543_HOLD_ENABLE_[1–8] (Page 185)
3.6.4.6 CODEC Settings
First CODEC
Description
Document Version
2012-03
Selects which codec to assign the highest priority to.
Administrator Guide
101
3.6.4 VoIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 8]
Value Range
•
•
•
•
•
G722
PCMA (G.711 A-law)
G726-32 (G.726 [32k])
G729A
PCMU (G.711 µ-law)
Note
•
•
•
You can select each codec on once within [CODEC Settings].
A maximum of 5 priorities can be assigned. If only 4 codecs are
specified in a configuration file, you will be able to select from
only 4 codecs, and [Fifth CODEC] will be disabled.
The codec selections that are displayed may vary depending
on the unit or the operating environment.
Default Value
G722
Configuration File Reference
SDP_CODEC[0–4]_[1–8] (Page 177)
Second CODEC
Description
Selects the codec to assign the second highest priority to.
Value Range
•
•
•
•
•
G722
PCMA (G.711 A-law)
G726-32 (G.726 [32k])
G729A
PCMU (G.711 µ-law)
Note
•
•
•
You can select each codec on once within [CODEC Settings].
A maximum of 5 priorities can be assigned. If only 4 codecs are
specified in a configuration file, you will be able to select from
only 4 codecs, and [Fifth CODEC] will be disabled.
The codec selections that are displayed may vary depending
on the unit or the operating environment.
Default Value
PCMA
Configuration File Reference
SDP_CODEC[0–4]_[1–8] (Page 177)
Third CODEC
Description
102
Administrator Guide
Selects the codec to assign the third highest priority to.
Document Version
2012-03
3.6.4 VoIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 8]
Value Range
•
•
•
•
•
G722
PCMA (G.711 A-law)
G726-32 (G.726 [32k])
G729A
PCMU (G.711 µ-law)
Note
•
•
•
You can select each codec on once within [CODEC Settings].
A maximum of 5 priorities can be assigned. If only 4 codecs are
specified in a configuration file, you will be able to select from
only 4 codecs, and [Fifth CODEC] will be disabled.
The codec selections that are displayed may vary depending
on the unit or the operating environment.
Default Value
G726-32
Configuration File Reference
SDP_CODEC[0–4]_[1–8] (Page 177)
Fourth CODEC
Description
Selects the codec to assign the 4th highest priority to.
Value Range
•
•
•
•
•
G722
PCMA (G.711 A-law)
G726-32 (G.726 [32k])
G729A
PCMU (G.711 µ-law)
Note
•
•
•
You can select each codec on once within [CODEC Settings].
A maximum of 5 priorities can be assigned. If only 4 codecs are
specified in a configuration file, you will be able to select from
only 4 codecs, and [Fifth CODEC] will be disabled.
The codec selections that are displayed may vary depending
on the unit or the operating environment.
Default Value
G729A
Configuration File Reference
SDP_CODEC[0–4]_[1–8] (Page 177)
Fifth CODEC
Description
Document Version
2012-03
Selects the codec to assign the lowest priority to.
Administrator Guide
103
3.7.1 Multi Number Settings
Value Range
•
•
•
•
•
G722
PCMA (G.711 A-law)
G726-32 (G.726 [32k])
G729A
PCMU (G.711 µ-law)
Note
•
•
•
You can select each codec on once within [CODEC Settings].
A maximum of 5 priorities can be assigned. If only 4 codecs are
specified in a configuration file, you will be able to select from
only 4 codecs, and [Fifth CODEC] will be disabled.
The codec selections that are displayed may vary depending
on the unit or the operating environment.
Default Value
PCMU
Configuration File Reference
SDP_CODEC[0–4]_[1–8] (Page 177)
3.7 Telephone
This section provides detailed descriptions about all the settings classified under the [Telephone] tab.
3.7.1 Multi Number Settings
This screen allows you to assign phone numbers for incoming and outgoing calls to the base unit
(KX-TGP55x only) and handsets.
A maximum of 8 phone numbers can be assigned for each unit. A maximum of 6 handsets can be registered
to the base unit. For details, see 5.1 Line Settings for Base Unit and Handset.
Note
•
104
You can configure these settings even in the following cases:
– The line has not been leased, or the unit has not been configured yet.
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
3.7.1 Multi Number Settings
– The handset has not been registered yet, or the connection with the base unit (KX-TGP55x only)
or handset has been disconnected.
3.7.1.1 Grouping Handset/Handset selection for receiving calls
Line No.
Description
Indicates the line number (1–8) to which a phone number is assigned
(reference only).
Value Range
Line 1–Line 8
Default Value
Not applicable.
Configuration File Reference
INCOMING_CALL_GROUP_[1–8] (Page 168)
Phone Number
Description
Indicates the currently assigned phone numbers (reference only).
Note
•
The corresponding field is blank if a line has not yet been leased
or if the unit has not been configured.
Value Range
Max. 24 digits
Default Value
Not applicable.
Configuration File Reference
INCOMING_CALL_GROUP_[1–8] (Page 168)
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
105
3.7.1 Multi Number Settings
Handset No.
Description
Selects the handsets (1–6) that calls will arrive at for each line.
Value Range
Selected, Not selected
Note
•
You cannot clear all the check boxes including [Base
(KX-TGP55x only)].
Default Value
Selected (all)
Configuration File Reference
INCOMING_CALL_GROUP_[1–8] (Page 168)
Base (KX-TGP55x only)
Description
Selects whether calls arrive at the base unit for each line.
Value Range
Selected, Not selected
Note
•
You cannot clear all the check boxes including [Handset No.].
Default Value
Selected (all)
Configuration File Reference
INCOMING_CALL_GROUP_[1–8] (Page 168)
3.7.1.2 Handset and Line No. selection for making calls
Handset No.
Description
Indicates the handsets (1–6) that can be used to make a call (reference
only).
Value Range
Not applicable.
Default Value
Not applicable.
Configuration File Reference
OUTGOING_CALL_LINE_HS[1–6] (Page 169)
Base (KX-TGP55x only)
106
Description
Indicates the base unit that can be used to make a call (reference only).
Value Range
Not applicable.
Default Value
Not applicable.
Configuration File Reference
OUTGOING_CALL_LINE_BS (Page 169)
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
3.7.2 Call Control
Line No.
Description
Selects which lines (1–8) can be seized when going off-hook to make
a call for the base unit and each handset.
Value Range
Selected, Not selected
Note
•
If you clear all the check boxes for the base unit and the
handsets, calls cannot be made from either the base unit or the
handsets.
Default Value
Selected (all)
Configuration File Reference
•
•
OUTGOING_CALL_LINE_HS[1–6] (Page 169)
OUTGOING_CALL_LINE_BS (Page 169)
Default
Description
Selects which line to seize automatically when going off-hook to make
a call for the base unit and each handset.
Note
•
Value Range
1–8
Default Value
1
Configuration File Reference
•
•
If the line selected as [Default] is not selected as a line that can
be seized for the corresponding base unit or handset in [Line
No.], the unit cannot make a call.
DEFAULT_LINE_SELECT_HS[1–6] (Page 170)
DEFAULT_LINE_SELECT_BS (Page 170)
3.7.2 Call Control
This screen allows you to configure various call features that are common to all lines.
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
107
3.7.2 Call Control
3.7.2.1 Call Control
Send SUBSCRIBE to Voice Mail Server
Description
Selects whether to send the SUBSCRIBE request to a voice mail
server.
Note
•
Your phone system must support voice mail.
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
No
Configuration File Reference
VM_SUBSCRIBE_ENABLE (Page 172)
Yes
No
Conference Server Address
Description
Specifies the URI for a conference server, which consists of a user part,
the "@" symbol, and a host part, for example,
"conference@example.com".
Note
•
Availability depends on your phone system.
Value Range
Max. 127 characters
Default Value
Not stored.
Configuration File Reference
CONFERENCE_SERVER_ADDRESS (Page 171)
Inter-digit Timeout
108
Description
Specifies the length of time, in seconds, within which subsequent digits
of a dial number must be dialed. When this timer expires after the last
key was pressed, dialing will start.
Value Range
3–10
Default Value
5
Configuration File Reference
INTDIGIT_TIM (Page 172)
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
3.7.2 Call Control
3.7.2.2 Emergency Call Phone Numbers
1–5
Description
Specifies the phone numbers used for making emergency calls. A user
can dial any of the specified phone numbers at any time regardless of
any restrictions imposed on the unit. A maximum of 5 phone numbers
can be specified.
Note
•
When a phone number is specified here, it will be prioritized
over the setting specified in [Dial Plan] in 3.7.3.2 Dial Plan.
Value Range
Max. 24 characters
Default Value
Not stored.
Configuration File Reference
EMERGENCY_CALL[1–5] (Page 171)
3.7.2.3 Call Rejection Phone Numbers
1–30
Description
Specifies the phone numbers to reject incoming calls from. A maximum
of 30 phone numbers can be specified.
Note
•
Value Range
You can also configure this setting through the phone user
interface. If these settings are changed through the phone user
interface while being changed through the Web user interface,
the settings made through the phone user interface will be
overwritten by the settings made through the Web user
interface.
Max. 24 characters
Note
•
Default Value
Document Version
2012-03
Even if you specify nonconsecutive fields (e.g., fields 1, 5, and
30), they will be rearranged into consecutive fields after you
save the settings (i.e., 1, 2, and 3).
Not stored.
Administrator Guide
109
3.7.3 Call Control [Line 1]–[Line 8]
3.7.3 Call Control [Line 1]–[Line 8]
This screen allows you to configure various call features that are specific to each line.
3.7.3.1 Call Control
Display Name
Description
Specifies the name to display as the caller on the other party’s phone
when you make a call.
Value Range
Max. 16 characters
Note
•
You can use Unicode characters for this setting.
Default Value
Not stored.
Configuration File Reference
DISPLAY_NAME_[1–8] (Page 207)
Enable Privacy Mode
Description
110
Administrator Guide
Selects whether to enable privacy mode, which prohibits another
handset or base unit from barging in on a conversation.
Document Version
2012-03
3.7.3 Call Control [Line 1]–[Line 8]
Value Range
•
•
Yes
No
Note
•
If you select [Yes], the conversation cannot be interrupted by
another handset or base unit. If you select [No], the
conversation can be interrupted by another handset or base
unit.
Default Value
Yes
Configuration File Reference
PRIVACY_MODE_[1–8] (Page 188)
Voice Mail Access Number
Description
Specifies the phone number used to access the voice mail server.
Note
•
Value Range
Your phone system must support voice mail.
Max. 24 characters (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Note
•
No other characters are allowed.
Default Value
Not stored.
Configuration File Reference
VM_NUMBER_[1–8] (Page 185)
Enable Shared Call
Description
Selects whether to enable the Shared Call feature of the SIP server,
which is used to share one line among the units.
Note
•
•
Value Range
•
•
You cannot set both [Enable Shared Call] and [Synchronize
Do Not Disturb and Call Forward] to [Yes] at the same time.
Availability depends on your phone system.
Yes
No
Note
•
If you select [Yes], the SIP server will control the line by using
a shared-call signaling method. If you select [No], the SIP
server will control the line by using a standard signaling method.
Default Value
No
Configuration File Reference
SHARED_CALL_ENABLE_[1–8] (Page 186)
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
111
3.7.3 Call Control [Line 1]–[Line 8]
Unique ID of Shared Call
Description
Specifies the unique ID used by the SIP server when [Enable Shared
Call] is set to [Yes].
Value Range
Max. 24 characters
Default Value
Not stored.
Configuration File Reference
SHARED_USER_ID_[1–8] (Page 187)
Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward
Description
Selects whether to synchronize the Do Not Disturb and Call Forward
settings, configured via the Web user interface or phone user interface,
between the unit and the portal server that is provided by your phone
system dealer.
Note
•
•
Even if you select [Yes], this feature may not function properly
if your phone system does not support it. Before you configure
this setting, consult your phone system dealer.
You cannot set both [Enable Shared Call] and [Synchronize
Do Not Disturb and Call Forward] to [Yes] at the same time.
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
No
Configuration File Reference
SYNCHRONIZATION_ENABLE_[1–8] (Page 187)
Yes
No
3.7.3.2 Dial Plan
Dial Plan
Description
Specifies a dial format, such as specific phone numbers, that control
which numbers can be dialed or how to handle the call when making a
call. For details, see 5.3 Dial Plan.
Value Range
Max. 500 characters
Note
•
112
Entering more than 500 characters in this field causes an error
and the previous value remains effective.
Default Value
Not stored.
Configuration File Reference
DIAL_PLAN_[1–8] (Page 185)
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
3.7.3 Call Control [Line 1]–[Line 8]
Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match
Description
Selects whether to make a call even if the dialed number does not
match any of the dial formats specified in [Dial Plan].
Value Range
•
•
Yes
No
Note
•
If you select [Yes], calls will be made even if the dialed number
does not match the dial formats specified in [Dial Plan] (i.e.,
dial plan filtering is disabled). If you select [No], calls will not be
made if the dialed number does not match one of the dial
formats specified in [Dial Plan] (i.e., dial plan filtering is
enabled).
Default Value
Yes
Configuration File Reference
DIAL_PLAN_NOT_MATCH_ENABLE_[1–8] (Page 186)
3.7.3.3 Call Features
Block Caller ID
Description
Selects whether to make calls without transmitting the phone number
to the called party.
Note
•
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
No
Availability depends on your phone system.
Yes
No
Block Anonymous Call
Description
Selects whether to reject incoming calls that do not show the caller’s
number.
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
No
Document Version
2012-03
Yes
No
Administrator Guide
113
3.7.3 Call Control [Line 1]–[Line 8]
Do Not Disturb
Description
Selects whether to enable the Do Not Disturb feature for incoming calls.
Note
•
•
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
No
If Do Not Disturb has been enabled on the server, the server
rejects incoming calls and the unit does not receive any calls,
even if you have selected [No] for this setting.
If you change this setting when [Synchronize Do Not Disturb
and Call Forward] is set to [Yes], the change to this setting is
not immediately applied on this screen. In this case, reload the
screen to confirm that the change is applied.
Yes
No
3.7.3.4 Call Forward
Unconditional (Enable Call Forward)
Description
Selects whether to forward all incoming calls to a specified destination.
Note
•
•
•
•
•
114
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
No
Administrator Guide
If Do Not Disturb has been enabled on the server, the server
rejects incoming calls and the unit does not receive any calls,
even if you have selected [Yes] for this setting.
If you have selected [Yes] for this setting and Call Forward has
been enabled on the server, but the forwarding destinations
differ, incoming calls are forwarded to the destination set on the
server.
If Call Forward has been enabled on the server, incoming calls
are forwarded to the destination set on the server, even if you
have selected [No] for this setting.
You can synchronize the Do Not Disturb and Call Forward
settings from the Web user interface (® see [Synchronize Do
Not Disturb and Call Forward] in 3.7.3.1 Call Control) or
through configuration file programming (® see
"SYNCHRONIZATION_ENABLE_[1–8]" in 4.7.1 Call Control
Settings).
If you change this setting when [Synchronize Do Not Disturb
and Call Forward] is set to [Yes], the change to this setting is
not immediately applied on this screen. In this case, reload the
screen to confirm that the change is applied.
Yes
No
Document Version
2012-03
3.7.3 Call Control [Line 1]–[Line 8]
Unconditional (Phone Number)
Description
Specifies the phone number of the destination to forward all incoming
calls to.
Note
•
Value Range
If you change this setting when [Synchronize Do Not Disturb
and Call Forward] is set to [Yes], the change to this setting is
not immediately applied on this screen. In this case, reload the
screen to confirm that the change is applied.
Max. 24 characters
Note
•
Default Value
You cannot leave this field empty if [Unconditional (Enable
Call Forward)] is set to [Yes].
Not stored.
Busy (Enable Call Forward)
Description
Selects whether to forward incoming calls to a specified destination
when the line is in use.
Note
•
•
•
•
•
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
No
Document Version
2012-03
If Do Not Disturb has been enabled on the server, the server
rejects incoming calls and the unit does not receive any calls,
even if you have selected [Yes] for this setting.
If you have selected [Yes] for this setting and Call Forward has
been enabled on the server, but the forwarding destinations
differ, incoming calls are forwarded to the destination set on the
server.
If Call Forward has been enabled on the server, incoming calls
are forwarded to the destination set on the server, even if you
have selected [No] for this setting.
You can synchronize the Do Not Disturb and Call Forward
settings from the Web user interface (® see [Synchronize Do
Not Disturb and Call Forward] in 3.7.3.1 Call Control) or
through configuration file programming (® see
"SYNCHRONIZATION_ENABLE_[1–8]" in 4.7.1 Call Control
Settings).
If you change this setting when [Synchronize Do Not Disturb
and Call Forward] is set to [Yes], the change to this setting is
not immediately applied on this screen. In this case, reload the
screen to confirm that the change is applied.
Yes
No
Administrator Guide
115
3.7.3 Call Control [Line 1]–[Line 8]
Busy (Phone Number)
Description
Specifies the phone number of the destination to forward calls to when
the line is in use.
Note
•
Value Range
If you change this setting when [Synchronize Do Not Disturb
and Call Forward] is set to [Yes], the change to this setting is
not immediately applied on this screen. In this case, reload the
screen to confirm that the change is applied.
Max. 24 characters
Note
•
Default Value
You cannot leave this field empty if [Busy (Enable Call
Forward)] is set to [Yes].
Not stored.
No Answer (Enable Call Forward)
Description
Selects whether to forward incoming calls to a specified destination
when a call is not answered after it has rung a specified number of
times.
Note
•
•
•
•
•
116
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
No
Administrator Guide
If Do Not Disturb has been enabled on the server, the server
rejects incoming calls and the unit does not receive any calls,
even if you have selected [Yes] for this setting.
If you have selected [Yes] for this setting and Call Forward has
been enabled on the server, but the forwarding destinations
differ, incoming calls are forwarded to the destination set on the
server.
If Call Forward has been enabled on the server, incoming calls
are forwarded to the destination set on the server, even if you
have selected [No] for this setting.
You can synchronize the Do Not Disturb and Call Forward from
the Web user interface (® see [Synchronize Do Not Disturb
and Call Forward] in 3.7.3.1 Call Control) or through
configuration file programming (® see
"SYNCHRONIZATION_ENABLE_[1–8]" in 4.7.1 Call Control
Settings).
If you change this setting when [Synchronize Do Not Disturb
and Call Forward] is set to [Yes], the change to this setting is
not immediately applied on this screen. In this case, reload the
screen to confirm that the change is applied.
Yes
No
Document Version
2012-03
3.7.3 Call Control [Line 1]–[Line 8]
No Answer (Phone Number)
Description
Specifies the phone number of the destination to forward calls to when
a call is not answered after it has rung a specified number of times.
Note
•
Value Range
If you change this setting when [Synchronize Do Not Disturb
and Call Forward] is set to [Yes], the change to this setting is
not immediately applied on this screen. In this case, reload the
screen to confirm that the change is applied.
Max. 24 characters
Note
•
Default Value
You cannot leave this field empty if [No Answer (Enable Call
Forward)] is set to [Yes].
Not stored.
No Answer (Ring Count)
Description
Specifies the number of times that an incoming call rings until the call
is forwarded.
Note
•
If you change this setting when [Synchronize Do Not Disturb
and Call Forward] is set to [Yes], the change to this setting is
not immediately applied on this screen. In this case, reload the
screen to confirm that the change is applied.
Value Range
0, 2–20 (0: No ring)
Default Value
3
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
117
3.7.4 Tone Settings
3.7.4 Tone Settings
This screen allows you to configure the dual-tone frequencies and ring tone patterns of each tone.
3.7.4.1 Dial Tone
Tone Frequencies
Description
Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of dial tones using 2 whole
numbers separated by a comma.
Value Range
0, 200–1000 (0: No tone)
Note
•
If the value for this setting is "350,440", the unit will use a mixed
signal of a 350 Hz tone and a 440 Hz tone.
Default Value
350,440
Configuration File Reference
DIAL_TONE_FRQ (Page 172)
Tone Timings
Description
118
Administrator Guide
Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of dial tones using 4 whole
numbers (on 1, off 1, on 2, off 2) separated by commas.
Document Version
2012-03
3.7.4 Tone Settings
Value Range
0–5000 (0: Infinite time)
Note
•
The unit will play the tone for the duration of the first value, stop
it for the duration of the second value, play it for the duration of
the third value, and then stop it for the duration of the last value.
The whole sequence will then repeat. For example, if the value
for this setting is "100,100,0,0", the unit will play the tone for 100
ms, stop it for 100 ms, and then play it continuously.
Default Value
0,0,0,0 (The unit plays the dial tone continuously.)
Configuration File Reference
DIAL_TONE_TIMING (Page 173)
3.7.4.2 Busy Tone
Tone Frequencies
Description
Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of busy tones using 2
whole numbers separated by a comma.
Value Range
0, 200–1000 (0: No tone)
Default Value
480,620
Configuration File Reference
BUSY_TONE_FRQ (Page 173)
Tone Timings
Description
Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of busy tones using 4 whole
numbers (on 1, off 1, on 2, off 2) separated by commas.
Value Range
0–5000 (0: Infinite time)
Default Value
500,500,500,500
Configuration File Reference
BUSY_TONE_TIMING (Page 173)
3.7.4.3 Ringing Tone
Tone Frequencies
Description
Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of ringback tones using 2
whole numbers separated by a comma.
Value Range
0, 200–1000 (0: No tone)
Default Value
440,480
Configuration File Reference
RINGING_TONE_FRQ (Page 174)
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
119
3.7.4 Tone Settings
Tone Timings
Description
Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of ringback tones using 4 whole
numbers (on 1, off 1, on 2, off 2) separated by commas.
Value Range
0–5000 (0: Infinite time)
Default Value
2000,4000,2000,4000
Configuration File Reference
RINGING_TONE_TIMING (Page 174)
3.7.4.4 Stutter Tone
Tone Frequencies
Description
Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of stutter dial tones to
notify that a voice mail is waiting, using 2 whole numbers separated by
a comma.
Value Range
0, 200–1000 (0: No tone)
Default Value
350,440
Configuration File Reference
STT_TONE_FRQ (Page 174)
Tone Timings
Description
Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of stutter dial tones to notify that
a voice mail is waiting, using 22 whole numbers (on 1, off 1, on 2, off 2,
…, on 11, off 11) separated by commas.
Value Range
0–5000 (0: Infinite time)
Default Value
100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,
100,100,100,100,100,100,100,0,0
Configuration File Reference
STT_TONE_TIMING (Page 174)
3.7.4.5 Reorder Tone
Tone Frequencies
120
Description
Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of reorder tones using 2
whole numbers separated by a comma.
Value Range
0, 200–1000 (0: No tone)
Default Value
480,620
Configuration File Reference
REORDER_TONE_FRQ (Page 175)
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
3.7.5 Import Phonebook
Tone Timings
Description
Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of reorder tones using 8 whole
numbers (on 1, off 1, on 2, off 2, on 3, off 3, on 4, off 4) separated by
commas.
Value Range
0–5000 (0: Infinite time)
Default Value
250,250,250,250,250,250,250,250
Configuration File Reference
REORDER_TONE_TIMING (Page 175)
3.7.4.6 Howler Tone
Tone Frequencies
Description
Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of howler tones (i.e., alarm
tones) using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma.
Value Range
0, 200–3000 (0: No tone)
Default Value
1400,2060
Configuration File Reference
HOWLER_TONE_FRQ (Page 175)
Tone Timings
Description
Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of howler tones (i.e., alarm tones)
using 4 whole numbers (on 1, off 1, on 2, off 2) separated by commas.
Value Range
0–5000 (0: Infinite time)
Default Value
100,100,100,100
Configuration File Reference
HOWLER_TONE_TIMING (Page 175)
Start Time
Description
Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that busy or reorder tones play
until they switch to howler tones.
Value Range
0–120 (0: Disable)
Default Value
30
Configuration File Reference
HOWLER_START_TIME (Page 176)
3.7.5 Import Phonebook
This screen allows you to import phonebook data from a PC to the specified unit. For details, see 5.2.1 Import/
Export Operation.
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
121
3.7.5 Import Phonebook
Note
•
•
If the existing phonebook data has an entry with the same name and phone number as an imported
entry, the imported entry is not added as a new entry. The import is still successful, and the message
"Complete" will be displayed.
When you begin transferring the phonebook data, the "Now Processing File Data" screen is displayed,
and the screen is periodically reloaded. Depending on your Web browser, the screen might not reload
automatically, and you will need to click the text "HERE" before the timer expires in order for the import
operation to function properly.
3.7.5.1 Import Phonebook
Handset (or Base Unit)
Description
Selects the handset or base unit to import the phonebook entries to.
Value Range
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Default Value
Handset 1
Handset 1
Handset 2
Handset 3
Handset 4
Handset 5
Handset 6
Base Unit (KX-TGP55x only)
File Name
Description
Specifies the path of the TSV (Tab-separated Value) file to import from
the PC.
Value Range
No limitation
Note
•
122
Administrator Guide
There are no limitations for the field entry. However, it is
recommended that paths of less than 256 characters be used:
longer paths may cause longer data transfer times and result in
an internal error.
Document Version
2012-03
3.7.6 Export Phonebook
Default Value
Not stored.
3.7.6 Export Phonebook
This screen allows you to save the phonebook data stored in the unit as a TSV file on a PC. For details, see
5.2.1 Import/Export Operation.
Note
•
•
When you begin transferring the phonebook data, the "Now Processing File Data" screen is displayed,
and the screen is periodically reloaded. Click the text "HERE" in the message to display the [Export
Phonebook] screen again. If you do not, the "Now Processing File Data" screen remains displayed
even if the export is complete. Depending on your Web browser, the screen might not reload
automatically, and you will need to click the text "HERE" before the timer expires in order for the export
operation to function properly.
Depending on the security settings of your Web browser, pop-up menus might be blocked at the time
of export. The security warning window may be displayed on another screen even if the Pop-up
Blocker settings are set to enable, and the file may not be exported successfully. In this case, try the
export operation again or disable the Pop-up Blocker feature of your Web browser.
3.7.6.1 Export Phonebook
Handset (or Base Unit)
Description
Selects the handset or base unit to export the phonebook data from.
Value Range
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Default Value
Handset 1
Document Version
2012-03
Handset 1
Handset 2
Handset 3
Handset 4
Handset 5
Handset 6
Base Unit (KX-TGP55x only)
Administrator Guide
123
3.8.1 Firmware Maintenance
3.8 Maintenance
This section provides detailed descriptions about all the settings classified under the [Maintenance] tab.
3.8.1 Firmware Maintenance
This screen allows you to perform firmware updates automatically or manually.
3.8.1.1 Firmware Maintenance
Enable Firmware Update
Description
Selects whether to perform firmware updates when the unit detects a
newer version of firmware.
Note
•
•
Changing this setting may require restarting the unit.
Local firmware updates from the Web user interface (® see
3.8.2 Local Firmware Update) can be performed regardless
of this setting.
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
Yes
Configuration File Reference
FIRM_UPGRADE_ENABLE (Page 148)
Yes
No
Update Type
Description
Selects whether to display a confirmation message asking the user to
perform a firmware update (manual) or perform the firmware update
without asking the user (automatic) when the unit detects a newer
version of firmware.
Note
•
•
124
Administrator Guide
This setting is available only when [Enable Firmware
Update] is set to [Yes].
Changing this setting may require restarting the unit.
Document Version
2012-03
3.8.2 Local Firmware Update
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
Automatic
Configuration File Reference
FIRM_UPGRADE_AUTO (Page 149)
Automatic
Manual
Firmware File URL
Description
Specifies the URL where the firmware file is stored.
Note
•
•
This setting is available only when [Enable Firmware
Update] is set to [Yes].
Changing this setting may require restarting the unit.
Value Range
Max. 255 characters
Default Value
Not stored.
Configuration File Reference
FIRM_FILE_PATH (Page 149)
3.8.2 Local Firmware Update
This screen allows you to manually update the unit’s firmware from a PC by clicking [Update Firmware].
Note
•
After the firmware has been successfully updated, the base unit will restart automatically.
3.8.2.1 Local Firmware Update
Encryption
Description
Selects whether the firmware files are encrypted or not.
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
Yes
Document Version
2012-03
Yes
No
Administrator Guide
125
3.8.3 Provisioning Maintenance
File Name
Description
Specifies the path of the firmware file to be imported.
Value Range
No limitation
Note
•
Default Value
There are no limitations for the field entry. However, it is
recommended that paths of less than 256 characters be used:
longer paths may cause longer data transfer times and result in
an internal error.
Not stored.
3.8.3 Provisioning Maintenance
This screen allows you to change the provisioning setup to download the configuration files from the
provisioning server of your phone system.
Note
•
Each unit can accept up to 3 configuration files. For details about provisioning, see
1.1.6 Provisioning.
3.8.3.1 Provisioning Maintenance
Enable Provisioning
126
Description
Selects whether the unit is automatically configured by downloading the
configuration files from the provisioning server of your phone system.
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
Yes
Configuration File Reference
PROVISION_ENABLE (Page 151)
Administrator Guide
Yes
No
Document Version
2012-03
3.8.3 Provisioning Maintenance
Standard File URL
Description
Specifies the URL of the standard configuration file, which is used when
every unit needs different settings.
Note
•
When you change this setting, set [Enable Provisioning] to
[Yes] at the same time.
Value Range
Max. 255 characters
Default Value
Not stored.
Note
•
Configuration File Reference
The URL specified by your phone system dealer may be preset
in the unit.
CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH (Page 151)
Product File URL
Description
Specifies the URL of the product configuration file, which is used when
all units with the same model number need the same settings.
Note
•
When you change this setting, set [Enable Provisioning] to
[Yes] at the same time.
Value Range
Max. 255 characters
Default Value
Not stored.
Note
•
Configuration File Reference
The URL specified by your phone system dealer may be preset
in the unit.
CFG_PRODUCT_FILE_PATH (Page 152)
Master File URL
Description
Specifies the URL of the master configuration file, which is used when
all units need the same settings.
Note
•
When you change this setting, set [Enable Provisioning] to
[Yes] at the same time.
Value Range
Max. 255 characters
Default Value
Not stored.
Note
•
Document Version
2012-03
The URL specified by your phone system dealer may be preset
in the unit.
Administrator Guide
127
3.8.4 Reset to Defaults
Configuration File Reference
CFG_MASTER_FILE_PATH (Page 153)
Cyclic Auto Resync
Description
Selects whether the unit periodically checks for updates of configuration
files.
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
No
Configuration File Reference
CFG_CYCLIC (Page 155)
Yes
No
Resync Interval
Description
Specifies the interval, in minutes, between periodic checks for updates
of the configuration files.
Value Range
1–40320
Default Value
10080
Configuration File Reference
CFG_CYCLIC_INTVL (Page 156)
Header Value for Resync Event
Description
Specifies the value of the "Event" header sent from the SIP server to
the unit so that the unit can access the configuration files on the
provisioning server.
Value Range
Max. 15 characters
Note
•
If the value for this setting is any value other than an empty
string (typically "check-sync" or "resync" is set), the unit will
access the configuration files on the provisioning server when
the SIP server sends an event to notify the unit.
If the value for this setting is an empty string, the unit will not
access the configuration files on the provisioning server even if
the unit receives a synchronization notification of an event.
Default Value
check-sync
Configuration File Reference
CFG_RESYNC_FROM_SIP (Page 157)
3.8.4 Reset to Defaults
This screen allows you to reset the settings made through the Web user interface to their default values by
clicking [Reset Web Settings]. After you click this button, a dialog box is displayed, asking whether you want
to reset the settings. Click OK to reset, or Cancel not to. For details about the reset, see 1.2.1.2 Resetting
the Settings Made through the Web User Interface (Reset Web Settings).
128
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
3.8.5 Restart
Notice
•
After resetting the settings, the base unit will restart even if it is being accessed through the phone user
interface, or on calls.
Note
•
If you have changed the default password for the Administrator account and successfully reset the
settings (the message "Complete" is displayed), the next time you access the Web user interface, the
authentication dialog box appears.
3.8.5 Restart
This screen allows you to restart the base unit by clicking [Restart]. After you click this button, a dialog box is
displayed, asking whether you want to restart the base unit. Click OK to perform a restart, or Cancel not to.
Notice
•
The base unit will restart even if it is being accessed through the phone user interface, or on calls.
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
129
3.8.5 Restart
130
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
Section 4
Configuration File Programming
This section provides information about the
configuration parameters used in the configuration files.
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
131
4.1 Configuration File Parameter List
4.1 Configuration File Parameter List
The following tables show all the parameters that can be programmed using configuration file programming.
For details about each parameter, see the reference pages listed.
System Settings
Parameter Name
Category
Login Account Settings
System Time Settings
Syslog Settings
Firmware Update Settings
132
Administrator Guide
Ref.
ADMIN_ID
Page 141
ADMIN_PASS*1
Page 141
USER_ID
Page 142
USER_PASS*1
Page 142
TIME_ZONE*1
Page 142
DST_ENABLE*1
Page 143
DST_OFFSET
Page 143
*1
DST_START_MONTH*1
Page 144
DST_START_ORDINAL_DAY*1
Page 144
DST_START_DAY_OF_WEEK*1
Page 144
DST_START_TIME*1
Page 145
DST_STOP_MONTH*1
Page 145
DST_STOP_ORDINAL_DAY*1
Page 145
DST_STOP_DAY_OF_WEEK*1
Page 145
DST_STOP_TIME*1
Page 146
SYSLOG_EVENT_SIP
Page 146
SYSLOG_EVENT_CFG
Page 147
SYSLOG_EVENT_VOIP
Page 147
SYSLOG_EVENT_TEL
Page 147
SYSLOG_ADDR
Page 147
SYSLOG_PORT
Page 148
SYSLOG_RTPSMLY_INTVL_[1–8]
Page 148
FIRM_UPGRADE_ENABLE*1
Page 148
FIRM_VER_EUDECT
Page 148
FIRM_VER_USDECT
Page 149
FIRM_UPGRADE_AUTO*1
Page 149
FIRM_FILE_PATH*1
Page 149
Document Version
2012-03
4.1 Configuration File Parameter List
Category
Provisioning Settings
*1
Parameter Name
Ref.
OPTION66_ENABLE
Page 150
OPTION66_REBOOT
Page 151
PROVISION_ENABLE*1
Page 151
CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH*1
Page 151
CFG_PRODUCT_FILE_PATH*1
Page 152
CFG_MASTER_FILE_PATH*1
Page 153
CFG_FILE_KEY1
Page 154
CFG_FILE_KEY2
Page 155
CFG_FILE_KEY3
Page 155
CFG_FILE_KEY_LENGTH
Page 155
CFG_CYCLIC*1
Page 155
CFG_CYCLIC_INTVL*1
Page 156
CFG_RTRY_INTVL
Page 156
CFG_RESYNC_TIME
Page 156
CFG_RESYNC_FROM_SIP*1
Page 157
This setting can also be configured through the Web user interface.
Network Settings
Parameter Name
Category
IP Settings
DNS Settings
Document Version
2012-03
Ref.
CONNECTION_TYPE*1
Page 157
HOST_NAME*2
Page 158
DHCP_DNS_ENABLE*1
Page 158
STATIC_IP_ADDRESS*1
Page 158
STATIC_SUBNET
Page 159
*1
STATIC_GATEWAY*1
Page 159
USER_DNS1_ADDR*1
Page 160
USER_DNS2_ADDR*1
Page 160
DNS_QRY_PRLL
Page 160
DNS_PRIORITY
Page 161
DNS1_ADDR
Page 161
DNS2_ADDR
Page 161
Administrator Guide
133
4.1 Configuration File Parameter List
Category
Ethernet Port Settings
HTTP Settings
Time Adjust Settings
STUN Settings
Miscellaneous Network Settings
*1
*2
Parameter Name
Ref.
VLAN_ENABLE*1
Page 162
VLAN_ID_IP_PHONE*1
Page 162
VLAN_PRI_IP_PHONE*1
Page 162
VLAN_ID_PC*1
Page 163
VLAN_PRI_PC*1
Page 163
HTTPD_PORTOPEN_AUTO
Page 163
HTTP_VER*2
Page 164
HTTP_USER_AGENT*2
Page 164
HTTP_SSL_VERIFY
Page 165
CFG_ROOT_CERTIFICATE_PATH
Page 165
NTP_ADDR*2
Page 166
TIME_SYNC_INTVL
Page 166
TIME_QUERY_INTVL*2
Page 166
STUN_SERV_ADDR*2
Page 166
STUN_SERV_PORT*2
Page 167
STUN_2NDSERV_ADDR
Page 167
STUN_2NDSERV_PORT
Page 167
NW_SETTING_ENABLE
Page 167
CUSTOM_WEB_PAGE
Page 168
This setting can also be configured through other programming methods (phone user interface programming or Web user interface
programming).
This setting can also be configured through the Web user interface.
Telephone Settings
134
Category
Parameter Name
Multi Number Settings
INCOMING_CALL_GROUP_[1–8]*1
Page 168
OUTGOING_CALL_LINE_HS[1–6]*1
Page 169
OUTGOING_CALL_LINE_BS*1
Page 169
DEFAULT_LINE_SELECT_HS[1–6]*1
Page 170
DEFAULT_LINE_SELECT_BS*1
Page 170
Administrator Guide
Ref.
Document Version
2012-03
4.1 Configuration File Parameter List
Category
Call Control Settings
Tone Settings
Parameter Name
CONFERENCE_SERVER_ADDRESS*1
Page 171
EMERGENCY_CALL[1–5]*1
Page 171
FIRSTDIGIT_TIM
Page 172
INTDIGIT_TIM*1
Page 172
VM_SUBSCRIBE_ENABLE*1
Page 172
DIAL_TONE_FRQ*1
Page 172
DIAL_TONE_TIMING*1
Page 173
BUSY_TONE_FRQ*1
Page 173
*1
Page 173
RINGING_TONE_FRQ*1
Page 174
RINGING_TONE_TIMING*1
Page 174
STT_TONE_FRQ*1
Page 174
STT_TONE_TIMING*1
Page 174
REORDER_TONE_FRQ*1
Page 175
REORDER_TONE_TIMING*1
Page 175
HOWLER_TONE_FRQ*1
Page 175
BUSY_TONE_TIMING
*1
Ref.
HOWLER_TONE_TIMING*1
Page 175
HOWLER_START_TIME
Page 176
*1
BELL_CORE_PATTERN1_TIMING
Page 176
BELL_CORE_PATTERN2_TIMING
Page 176
BELL_CORE_PATTERN3_TIMING
Page 176
BELL_CORE_PATTERN4_TIMING
Page 177
BELL_CORE_PATTERN5_TIMING
Page 177
This setting can also be configured through the Web user interface.
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
135
4.1 Configuration File Parameter List
VoIP Settings
Category
Codec Settings
RTP Settings
Miscellaneous VoIP Settings
*1
Parameter Name
Ref.
SDP_CODEC[0–4]_[1–8]*1
Page 177
SDP_CKRTE[0–4]_[1–8]
Page 178
SDP_PARAM[0–4]_[1–8]
Page 178
SDP_PTYPE[0–4]_[1–8]
Page 178
CODEC_G711_REQ
Page 179
CODEC_G729_PARAM
Page 179
TOS_RTP_[1–8]*1
Page 180
RTCP_INTVL_[1–8]*1
Page 181
MAX_DELAY_[1–8]*1
Page 181
MIN_DELAY_[1–8]*1
Page 182
NOM_DELAY_[1–8]*1
Page 182
RTP_PORT_MIN*1
Page 183
RTP_PORT_MAX*1
Page 183
RTP_PTIME
Page 183
*1
OUTBANDDTMF_[1–8]*1
Page 184
OUTBANDDTMF_VOL
Page 184
TELEVENT_PTYPE_[1–8]*1
Page 184
RFC2543_HOLD_ENABLE_[1–8]*1
Page 185
This setting can also be configured through the Web user interface.
Line Settings
Category
Call Control Settings
Parameter Name
Ref.
Page 185
VM_NUMBER_[1–8]*1
Page 185
DIAL_PLAN_[1–8]*1
DIAL_PLAN_NOT_MATCH_ENABLE_[1–8]
SIP Settings
136
Administrator Guide
*1
Page 186
SHARED_CALL_ENABLE_[1–8]*1
Page 186
SHARED_USER_ID_[1–8]*1
Page 187
SYNCHRONIZATION_ENABLE_[1–8]*1
Page 187
PRIVACY_MODE_[1–8]
Page 188
*1
SIP_USER_AGENT*1
Page 188
SIP_AUTHID_[1–8]*1
Page 188
Document Version
2012-03
4.1 Configuration File Parameter List
Category
Parameter Name
SIP_PASS_[1–8]*1
Page 189
SIP_SRC_PORT_[1–8]*1
Page 189
SIP_PRXY_ADDR_[1–8]*1
Page 189
SIP_PRXY_PORT_[1–8]*1
Page 190
SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_[1–8]*1
Page 190
SIP_RGSTR_PORT_[1–8]*1
Page 190
SIP_SVCDOMAIN_[1–8]*1
Page 190
REG_EXPIRE_TIME_[1–8]
Page 191
REG_INTERVAL_RATE_[1–8]
Page 191
SIP_SESSION_TIME_[1–8]*1
Page 191
TOS_SIP_[1–8]*1
Page 192
SIP_2NDPROXY_ADDR_[1–8]
Page 193
SIP_2NDPROXY_PORT_[1–8]
Page 194
SIP_2NDRGSTR_ADDR_[1–8]
Page 194
SIP_2NDRGSTR_PORT_[1–8]
Page 194
SIP_TIMER_T1_[1–8]*1
Page 194
SIP_TIMER_T2_[1–8]*1
Page 195
INVITE_RTXN_[1–8]
Page 195
*1
OTHER_RTXN_[1–8]*1
Page 195
SIP_FOVR_NORSP_[1–8]
Page 196
SIP_FOVR_MAX_[1–8]
SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_[1–8]
Document Version
2012-03
Ref.
Page 196
*1
Page 196
SIP_UDP_SRV_PREFIX_[1–8]*1
Page 197
SIP_TCP_SRV_PREFIX_[1–8]*1
Page 197
SIP_100REL_ENABLE_[1–8]*1
Page 198
SIP_18X_RTX_INTVL_[1–8]
Page 198
SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_[1–8]*1
Page 198
SIP_PRSNC_PORT_[1–8]*1
Page 199
SIP_2NDPRSNC_ADDR_[1–8]
Page 199
SIP_2NDPRSNC_PORT_[1–8]
Page 199
USE_DEL_REG_OPEN_[1–8]
Page 199
USE_DEL_REG_CLOSE_[1–8]
Page 200
PORT_PUNCH_INTVL_[1–8]*1
Page 200
Administrator Guide
137
4.2.1 Configuration File Specifications
Category
Parameter Name
SIP_SUBS_EXPIRE_[1–8]
Page 200
SUB_RTX_INTVL_[1–8]
Page 201
REG_RTX_INTVL_[1–8]
Page 201
SIP_P_PREFERRED_ID_[1–8]
Page 201
SIP_PRIVACY_[1–8]
Page 202
ADD_USER_PHONE_[1–8]
Page 202
SDP_USER_ID_[1–8]
Page 202
SUB_INTERVAL_RATE_[1–8]
Page 202
*1
Page 203
SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_[1–8]*1
Page 203
SIP_TRANSPORT_[1–8]*1
Page 203
SIP_ANM_DISPNAME_[1–8]
Page 204
SIP_ANM_USERNAME_[1–8]
Page 204
SIP_ANM_HOSTNAME_[1–8]
Page 204
SIP_DETECT_SSAF_[1–8]*1
Page 205
SIP_RCV_DET_HEADER_[1–8]
Page 205
SIP_CONTACT_ON_ACK_[1–8]
Page 206
PHONE_NUMBER_[1–8]
Page 206
SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_[1–8]
*1
Ref.
*1
LINE_ID_[1–8]*1
Page 206
DISPLAY_NAME_[1–8]*1
Page 207
INTERNATIONAL_ACCESS_CODE
Page 207
SIP_REQURI_PORT_[1–8]
Page 207
SIP_ADD_RPORT_[1–8]
Page 208
SIP_SESSION_METHOD_[1–8]
Page 208
VOICE_MESSAGE_AVAILABLE
Page 208
This setting can also be configured through the Web user interface.
4.2 General Information on the Configuration Files
4.2.1 Configuration File Specifications
The specifications of the configuration files are as follows:
138
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
4.2.1 Configuration File Specifications
File Format
The configuration file is in plain text format.
File Size
The maximum size of a configuration file is 32,768 bytes. Regardless of the number of configuration files, the
total size of the configuration files must be 32,768 bytes or less.
Lines in Configuration Files
A configuration file consists of a sequence of lines, with the following conditions:
• Each line must end with "<CR><LF>".
• The maximum length of a line is 537 bytes including "<CR><LF>".
• The following lines are ignored:
– Lines that exceed the limit of 537 bytes
– Empty lines
– Comment lines that start with "#"
• Configuration files must start with a comment line containing the following designated character sequence
(28 bytes):
# PCC Standard Format File #
The hexadecimal notation of this sequence is:
23 20 50 43 43 20 53 74 61 6E 64 61 72 64 20 46
6F 72 6D 61 74 20 46 69 6C 65 20 22
• To prevent the designated character sequence being altered by chance, it is recommended that the
configuration file starts with the comment line shown below:
# PCC Standard Format File # DO NOT CHANGE THIS LINE!
• Configuration files must end with an empty line.
• Each parameter line is written in the form of XXX="yyy" (XXX: parameter name, yyy: parameter value).
The value must be enclosed by double quotation marks.
• A parameter line written over multiple lines is not allowed. It will cause an error on the configuration file,
resulting in invalid provisioning.
Configuration Parameters
• Both the KX-TGP500 and KX-TGP55x support multiple telephone lines. For some parameters, the value
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
for each line must be specified independently. A parameter name with the suffix "_1" is the parameter for
line 1; "_2" for line 2, and so on.
Examples of setting the line (phone number) for accessing a voice mail server:
"VM_NUMBER_1": for line 1,
"VM_NUMBER_2": for line 2, …,
"VM_NUMBER_8": for line 8
The maximum length of a parameter name is 32 characters.
The maximum length of a parameter value is 500 characters excluding double quotation marks.
No space characters are allowed in the line except when the value includes a space character(s).
Example:
DISPLAY_NAME_1="John Smith" (valid)
DISPLAY_NAME_1 = "John Smith" (invalid)
Some parameter values can be specified as "empty" to set the parameter values to empty.
Example:
NTP_ADDR=""
The parameters have no order.
If the same parameter is specified in a configuration file more than once, the value specified first is applied.
All configurable settings can be specified in the configuration file. You can ignore settings that already have
the desired values. Only change parameters as necessary.
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
139
4.2.3 Characters Available for String Values
Note
•
For examples of configuration files, see Section 8 Configuration File Examples.
4.2.2 Configuration File Parameters
The information on each parameter that can be written in a configuration file is shown in the tables below. The
information includes parameter name (as the title of the table), value format, description, permitted value range,
default value of each parameter, phone user interface reference, and Web user interface reference.
Parameter Name
This is the system-predefined parameter name and cannot be changed.
Value Format
Each parameter value is categorized into Integer, Boolean, or String. Some parameters require a composite
form such as "Comma-separated Integer" or "Comma-separated String".
• Integer: a numerical value, described as a sequence of numerical characters, optionally preceded by a
"-" (minus)
An empty string is not allowed.
• Boolean: "Y" or "N"
• String: sequence of alphanumerical characters
For details about available characters, see 4.2.3 Characters Available for String Values.
• Comma-separated Integer: a list of integers, separated by commas
No space characters are allowed.
• Comma-separated String: a list of strings, separated by commas
No space characters are allowed.
Description
Describes the details of the parameter.
Value Range
Indicates the permitted value range of the parameter.
Default Value
Indicates the factory default value of the parameter.
Actual default values may vary depending on your phone system dealer.
Phone User Interface Reference
Provides the reference page of the corresponding parameter in phone user interface programming.
Web User Interface Reference
Provides the reference page of the corresponding parameter in Web user interface programming.
4.2.3 Characters Available for String Values
Unless noted otherwise in "Value Range", only ASCII characters can be used for parameter values. Unicode
characters can also be used in some parameter values.
140
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
4.3.1 Login Account Settings
Available ASCII characters are shown on a white background in the following table:
4.3 System Settings
4.3.1 Login Account Settings
ADMIN_ID
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the account ID used to access the Web user interface with
the Administrator account.
Value Range
Max. 16 characters (except ", &, ', :, <, >, and space)
Note
•
Default Value
An empty string is not allowed.
admin
ADMIN_PASS
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the password to use to authenticate the Administrator account
when logging in to the Web user interface.
Value Range
6–16 characters (except ", &, ', :, <, >, and space)
Default Value
adminpass
Web User Interface Reference
•
•
Document Version
2012-03
New Password (Page 78)
Confirm New Password (Page 79)
Administrator Guide
141
4.3.2 System Time Settings
USER_ID
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the account ID used to access the Web user interface with
the User account.
Value Range
Max. 16 characters (except ", &, ', :, <, >, and space)
Note
•
Default Value
An empty string is not allowed.
user
USER_PASS
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the password to use to authenticate the User account when
logging in to the Web user interface.
Value Range
6–16 characters (except ", &, ', :, <, >, and space)
Default Value
Empty string (only before a user accesses the Web user interface for
the first time)
Web User Interface Reference
•
•
New Password (Page 79)
Confirm New Password (Page 80)
4.3.2 System Time Settings
TIME_ZONE
142
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the offset of local standard time from UTC (GMT), in minutes.
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
4.3.2 System Time Settings
Value Range
-720–780
Note
•
•
Only the following values are available:
-720 (GMT -12:00), -660 (GMT -11:00), -600 (GMT -10:00),
-540 (GMT -09:00), -480 (GMT -08:00), -420 (GMT -07:00),
-360 (GMT -06:00), -300 (GMT -05:00), -240 (GMT -04:00),
-210 (GMT -03:30), -180 (GMT -03:00), -120 (GMT -02:00), -60
(GMT -01:00), 0 (GMT), 60 (GMT +01:00), 120 (GMT +02:00),
180 (GMT +03:00), 210 (GMT +03:30), 240 (GMT +04:00), 270
(GMT +04:30), 300 (GMT +05:00), 330 (GMT +05:30), 345
(GMT +05:45), 360 (GMT +06:00), 390 (GMT +06:30), 420
(GMT +07:00), 480 (GMT +08:00), 540 (GMT +09:00), 570
(GMT +09:30), 600 (GMT +10:00), 660 (GMT +11:00), 720
(GMT +12:00), 780 (GMT +13:00)
If your location is west of Greenwich (0 [GMT]), the value should
be minus. For example, the value for New York City, U.S.A. is
"-300" (Eastern Standard Time being 5 hours behind GMT).
Default Value
0
Web User Interface Reference
Time Zone (Page 82)
DST_ENABLE
Value Format
Boolean
Description
Specifies whether to enable DST (Summer Time).
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
N
Web User Interface Reference
Enable DST (Enable Summer Time) (Page 83)
Y (Enable DST [Summer Time])
N (Disable DST [Summer Time])
DST_OFFSET
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the amount of time, in minutes, to change the time when
"DST_ENABLE" is set to "Y".
Value Range
0–720
Note
•
This parameter is usually set to "60".
Default Value
60
Web User Interface Reference
DST Offset (Summer Time Offset) (Page 83)
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
143
4.3.2 System Time Settings
DST_START_MONTH
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the month in which DST (Summer Time) starts.
Value Range
1–12
Default Value
3
Web User Interface Reference
Month (Page 83)
DST_START_ORDINAL_DAY
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the number of the week on which DST (Summer Time) starts.
The actual start day is specified in "DST_START_DAY_OF_WEEK". For
example, to specify the second Sunday, specify "2" in this parameter,
and "0" in the next parameter.
Value Range
1–5
–
–
–
–
–
1: the first week of the month
2: the second week of the month
3: the third week of the month
4: the fourth week of the month
5: the fifth week of the month
Default Value
2
Web User Interface Reference
Day of Week (Page 83)
DST_START_DAY_OF_WEEK
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the day of the week on which DST (Summer Time) starts.
Value Range
0–6
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
144
0: Sunday
1: Monday
2: Tuesday
3: Wednesday
4: Thursday
5: Friday
6: Saturday
Default Value
0
Web User Interface Reference
Day of Week (Page 83)
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
4.3.2 System Time Settings
DST_START_TIME
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the start time of DST (Summer Time) in minutes after 12:00
AM.
Value Range
0–1439
Default Value
120
Web User Interface Reference
Time (Page 84)
DST_STOP_MONTH
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the month in which DST (Summer Time) ends.
Value Range
1–12
Default Value
10
Web User Interface Reference
Month (Page 84)
DST_STOP_ORDINAL_DAY
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the number of the week on which DST (Summer Time) ends.
The actual end day is specified in "DST_STOP_DAY_OF_WEEK". For
example, to specify the second Sunday, specify "2" in this parameter,
and "0" in the next parameter.
Value Range
1–5
–
–
–
–
–
1: the first week of the month
2: the second week of the month
3: the third week of the month
4: the fourth week of the month
5: the fifth week of the month
Default Value
2
Web User Interface Reference
Day of Week (Page 85)
DST_STOP_DAY_OF_WEEK
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the day of the week on which DST (Summer Time) ends.
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
145
4.3.3 Syslog Settings
Value Range
0–6
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
0: Sunday
1: Monday
2: Tuesday
3: Wednesday
4: Thursday
5: Friday
6: Saturday
Default Value
0
Web User Interface Reference
Day of Week (Page 85)
DST_STOP_TIME
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the end time of DST (Summer Time) in minutes after 12:00
AM.
Value Range
0–1439
Default Value
120
Web User Interface Reference
Time (Page 86)
4.3.3 Syslog Settings
SYSLOG_EVENT_SIP
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies which SIP-related syslog events are sent to the syslog server.
Note
•
•
Value Range
0–6
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Default Value
146
Administrator Guide
If the level of the event is higher than or equal to the set value,
the log is sent to the syslog server.
This setting is not applicable for the current version. No logs will
be sent to the syslog server, even if values "1–6" are specified.
0: no logs sent
1: emergency (highest)
2: alert
3: critical
4: error
5: warning
6: information (lowest)
0
Document Version
2012-03
4.3.3 Syslog Settings
SYSLOG_EVENT_CFG
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the threshold of syslog events regarding configuration.
Note
•
Value Range
0–6
Default Value
0
This setting is not applicable for the current version. No logs will
be sent to the syslog server, even if values "1–6" are specified.
SYSLOG_EVENT_VOIP
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the threshold of syslog events regarding VoIP operation.
Note
•
Value Range
0–6
Default Value
0
This setting is not applicable for the current version. No logs will
be sent to the syslog server, even if values "1–6" are specified.
SYSLOG_EVENT_TEL
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the threshold of syslog events regarding telephone functions.
Note
•
Value Range
0–6
Default Value
0
This setting is not applicable for the current version. No logs will
be sent to the syslog server, even if values "1–6" are specified.
SYSLOG_ADDR
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the syslog server.
Value Range
Max. 127 characters (IP address in dotted-decimal notation or FQDN)
Default Value
Empty string
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
147
4.3.4 Firmware Update Settings
SYSLOG_PORT
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the port number of the syslog server.
Value Range
1–65535
Default Value
514
SYSLOG_RTPSMLY_INTVL_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SYSLOG_RTPSMLY_INTVL_1, SYSLOG_RTPSMLY_INTVL_2, …,
SYSLOG_RTPSMLY_INTVL_8
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the interval, in seconds, to send summarized information of
RTP packets to the syslog server.
Value Range
0, 5–65535 (0: No information sent)
Default Value
20
4.3.4 Firmware Update Settings
FIRM_UPGRADE_ENABLE
Value Format
Boolean
Description
Specifies whether to perform firmware updates when the unit detects a
newer version of firmware.
Note
•
•
Changing this setting may require restarting the unit.
Local firmware updates from the Web user interface (® see
3.8.2 Local Firmware Update) can be performed regardless
of this setting.
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
Y
Web User Interface Reference
Enable Firmware Update (Page 124)
Y (Enable firmware updates)
N (Disable firmware updates)
FIRM_VER_EUDECT
Value Format
148
Administrator Guide
String
Document Version
2012-03
4.3.4 Firmware Update Settings
Description
Specifies the firmware version of the DECT system.
Note
•
•
DECT is a widely used cordless phone system in Europe.
Changing this setting may require restarting the unit.
Value Range
Max. 5 characters ("nn.nn" [n=0–9])
Default Value
00.00
FIRM_VER_USDECT
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the firmware version of the DECT 6.0 system.
Note
•
•
DECT 6.0 is a widely used cordless phone system in North
America.
Changing this setting may require restarting the unit.
Value Range
Max. 5 characters ("nn.nn" [n=0–9])
Default Value
00.00
FIRM_UPGRADE_AUTO
Value Format
Boolean
Description
Specifies whether to display a confirmation message asking the user
to perform a firmware update (manual) or perform the firmware update
without asking the user (automatic) when the unit detects a newer
version of firmware.
Note
•
•
This setting is available only when
"FIRM_UPGRADE_ENABLE" is set to "Y".
Changing this setting may require restarting the unit.
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
Y
Web User Interface Reference
Update Type (Page 124)
Y (Enable automatic firmware update)
N (Disable automatic firmware update)
FIRM_FILE_PATH
Value Format
Document Version
2012-03
String
Administrator Guide
149
4.3.5 Provisioning Settings
Description
Specifies the URL where the firmware file is stored.
Note
•
•
Value Range
This setting is available only when
"FIRM_UPGRADE_ENABLE" is set to "Y".
Changing this setting may require restarting the unit.
Max. 255 characters
Note
•
•
•
•
•
The format must be RFC 1738 compliant, as follows:
"<schema>://<user>:<password>@<host>:<port>/<url-path>".
– "<user>" must be less than 64 characters.
– "<password>" must be less than 64 characters.
– "<user>:<password>@" may be empty.
– The total of "<schema>://" and "<host>:<port>/<url-path>"
must be less than 128 characters.
– ":<port>" can be omitted if you do not need to specify the
port number.
If "{mac}" is included in this URL, it will be replaced with the
unit’s MAC address in lower-case.
If "{MAC}" is included in this URL, it will be replaced with the
unit’s MAC address in upper-case.
If "{MODEL}" is included in this URL, it will be replaced with the
unit’s model name.
If "{fwver}" is included in this URL, it will be replaced with either
"FIRM_VER_EUDECT" or "FIRM_VER_USDECT" depending on
the system. Note that this rule differs from other parameters
such as "SIP_USER_AGENT".
Default Value
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
Firmware File URL (Page 125)
4.3.5 Provisioning Settings
OPTION66_ENABLE
Value Format
Boolean
Description
Specifies whether to enable the unit to look for option 66 to receive the
TFTP server address or FQDN from the DHCP server.
Note
•
150
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
Y
Administrator Guide
The unit will try to download configuration files through the
TFTP server, the IP address or FQDN of which is specified in
the option number 66 field.
Y (Enable option 66)
N (Disable option 66)
Document Version
2012-03
4.3.5 Provisioning Settings
OPTION66_REBOOT
Value Format
Boolean
Description
Specifies whether the unit restarts automatically after pre-provisioning
has completed successfully using DHCP server option 66. For details,
see 1.1.5.4 Pre-provisioning Setting Example.
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
N
Y (Restart automatically)
N (Do not restart automatically)
PROVISION_ENABLE
Value Format
Boolean
Description
Specifies whether the unit is automatically configured by downloading
the configuration files from the provisioning server of your phone
system.
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
Y
Web User Interface Reference
Enable Provisioning (Page 126)
Y (Enable configuration file download)
N (Disable configuration file download)
CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the URL of the standard configuration file, which is used when
every unit needs different settings.
Note
•
Document Version
2012-03
When you change this setting, set "PROVISION_ENABLE" to
"Y" at the same time.
Administrator Guide
151
4.3.5 Provisioning Settings
Value Range
Max. 255 characters
Note
•
•
•
•
•
•
Default Value
The format must be RFC 1738 compliant, as follows:
"<schema>://<user>:<password>@<host>:<port>/<url-path>"
– "<user>" must be less than 64 characters.
– "<password>" must be less than 64 characters.
– "<user>:<password>@" may be empty.
– The total of "<schema>://" and "<host>:<port>/<url-path>"
must be less than 128 characters.
– ":<port>" can be omitted if you do not need to specify the
port number.
If "{mac}" is included in this URL, it will be replaced with the
unit’s MAC address in lower-case.
If "{MAC}" is included in this URL, it will be replaced with the
unit’s MAC address in upper-case.
If "{MODEL}" is included in this URL, it will be replaced with the
unit’s model name.
If "{fwver}" is included in this URL, it will be replaced with the
unit’s firmware version.
If this URL ends with "/" (slash), "Config{mac}.cfg" is
automatically added at the end of the URL.
For example, CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH="http://
host/dir/" becomes
CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH="http://host/dir/
Config{mac}.cfg".
Empty string
Note
•
Web User Interface Reference
The URL specified by your phone system dealer may be preset
in the unit.
Standard File URL (Page 127)
CFG_PRODUCT_FILE_PATH
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the URL of the product configuration file, which is used when
all units with the same model number need the same settings.
Note
•
152
Administrator Guide
When you change this setting, set "PROVISION_ENABLE" to
"Y" at the same time.
Document Version
2012-03
4.3.5 Provisioning Settings
Value Range
Max. 255 characters
Note
•
•
•
•
•
•
Default Value
The format must be RFC 1738 compliant, as follows:
"<schema>://<user>:<password>@<host>:<port>/<url-path>"
– "<user>" must be less than 64 characters.
– "<password>" must be less than 64 characters.
– "<user>:<password>@" may be empty.
– The total of "<schema>://" and "<host>:<port>/<url-path>"
must be less than 128 characters.
– ":<port>" can be omitted if you do not need to specify the
port number.
If "{mac}" is included in this URL, it will be replaced with the
unit’s MAC address in lower-case.
If "{MAC}" is included in this URL, it will be replaced with the
unit’s MAC address in upper-case.
If "{MODEL}" is included in this URL, it will be replaced with the
unit’s model name.
If "{fwver}" is included in this URL, it will be replaced with the
unit’s firmware version.
If this URL ends with "/" (slash), "{MODEL}.cfg" is automatically
added at the end of the URL.
For example, CFG_PRODUCT_FILE_PATH="http://host/
dir/" becomes CFG_PRODUCT_FILE_PATH="http://
host/dir/{MODEL}.cfg".
Empty string
Note
•
Web User Interface Reference
The URL specified by your phone system dealer may be preset
in the unit.
Product File URL (Page 127)
CFG_MASTER_FILE_PATH
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the URL of the master configuration file, which is used when
all units need the same settings.
Note
•
Document Version
2012-03
When you change this setting, set "PROVISION_ENABLE" to
"Y" at the same time.
Administrator Guide
153
4.3.5 Provisioning Settings
Value Range
Max. 255 characters
Note
•
•
•
•
•
•
Default Value
The format must be RFC 1738 compliant, as follows:
"<schema>://<user>:<password>@<host>:<port>/<url-path>"
– "<user>" must be less than 64 characters.
– "<password>" must be less than 64 characters.
– "<user>:<password>@" may be empty.
– The total of "<schema>://" and "<host>:<port>/<url-path>"
must be less than 128 characters.
– ":<port>" can be omitted if you do not need to specify the
port number.
If "{mac}" is included in this URL, it will be replaced with the
unit’s MAC address in lower-case.
If "{MAC}" is included in this URL, it will be replaced with the
unit’s MAC address in upper-case.
If "{MODEL}" is included in this URL, it will be replaced with the
unit’s model name.
If "{fwver}" is included in this URL, it will be replaced with the
unit’s firmware version.
If this URL ends with "/" (slash), "sip.cfg" is automatically added
at the end of the URL.
For example, CFG_MASTER_FILE_PATH="http://host/
dir/" becomes CFG_MASTER_FILE_PATH="http://
host/dir/sip.cfg".
Empty string
Note
•
Web User Interface Reference
The URL specified by your phone system dealer may be preset
in the unit.
Master File URL (Page 127)
CFG_FILE_KEY1
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the encryption key (password) used to decrypt configuration
files.
Note
•
Value Range
If the extension of the configuration file is ".e1c", the
configuration file will be decrypted using this key.
32-byte characters
Note
•
Default Value
154
Administrator Guide
If an empty string is set for this parameter, decryption with this
value is disabled.
A unique value is preset to each unit.
Document Version
2012-03
4.3.5 Provisioning Settings
CFG_FILE_KEY2
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the encryption key (password) used to decrypt configuration
files.
Note
•
Value Range
If the extension of the configuration file is ".e2c", the
configuration file will be decrypted using this key.
32-byte characters
Note
•
Default Value
If an empty string is set for this parameter, decryption with this
value is disabled.
Empty string
CFG_FILE_KEY3
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the encryption key (password) used to decrypt configuration
files.
Note
•
Value Range
If the extension of the configuration file is ".e3c", the
configuration file will be decrypted using this key.
32-byte characters
Note
•
Default Value
If an empty string is set for this parameter, decryption with this
value is disabled.
Empty string
CFG_FILE_KEY_LENGTH
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the key lengths in bits used to decrypt configuration files.
Value Range
•
•
•
Default Value
128
128
192
256
CFG_CYCLIC
Value Format
Document Version
2012-03
Boolean
Administrator Guide
155
4.3.5 Provisioning Settings
Description
Specifies whether the unit periodically checks for updates of
configuration files.
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
N
Web User Interface Reference
Cyclic Auto Resync (Page 128)
Y (Enable periodic synchronization of configuration files)
N (Disable periodic synchronization of configuration files)
CFG_CYCLIC_INTVL
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the interval, in minutes, between periodic checks for updates
of the configuration files.
Value Range
1–40320
Default Value
10080
Web User Interface Reference
Resync Interval (Page 128)
CFG_RTRY_INTVL
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the period of time, in minutes, that the unit will retry checking
for an update of the configuration files after a configuration file access
error has occurred.
Note
•
Value Range
1–1440
Default Value
30
This setting is available only when "CFG_CYCLIC" is set to "Y".
CFG_RESYNC_TIME
156
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the time (hour:minute) that the unit checks for updates of
configuration files.
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
4.4.1 IP Settings
Value Range
00:00–23:59
Note
•
•
Default Value
If the value for this setting is any valid value other than an empty
string, the unit downloads the configuration files at the fixed
time, and the settings specified in "CFG_CYCLIC",
"CFG_CYCLIC_INTVL", and "CFG_RTRY_INTVL" are
disabled.
If the value for this setting is an empty string, downloading the
configuration files at the fixed time are disabled.
Empty string
CFG_RESYNC_FROM_SIP
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the value of the "Event" header sent from the SIP server to
the unit so that the unit can access the configuration files on the
provisioning server.
Value Range
Max. 15 characters
Note
•
•
If the value for this setting is any value other than an empty
string (typically "check-sync" or "resync" is set), the unit will
access the configuration files on the provisioning server when
the SIP server sends an event to notify the unit.
If the value for this setting is an empty string, the unit will not
access the configuration files on the provisioning server even if
the unit receives a synchronization notification of an event.
Default Value
check-sync
Web User Interface Reference
Header Value for Resync Event (Page 128)
4.4 Network Settings
4.4.1 IP Settings
CONNECTION_TYPE
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies whether to assign the IP address automatically (DHCP) or
manually (static).
Note
•
Document Version
2012-03
This setting is available only when "NW_SETTING_ENABLE" is
set to "N".
Administrator Guide
157
4.4.1 IP Settings
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
1
Phone User Interface
Reference
Configuring Settings from the Base Unit (KX-TGP55x only)/Handset
(Page 17)
Web User Interface Reference
Connection Mode (Page 66)
1 (DHCP)
0 (Static)
HOST_NAME
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the host name for the unit to send to the DHCP server.
Note
•
Value Range
This setting is available only when "CONNECTION_TYPE" is set
to "1".
Max. 63 characters
Note
•
An empty string is not allowed.
Default Value
Model number (example: TGP5nn)
Web User Interface Reference
Host Name (Page 66)
DHCP_DNS_ENABLE
Value Format
Boolean
Description
Specifies whether to receive DNS server addresses automatically or to
assign a DNS server addresses (up to 2) manually.
Note
•
Value Range
•
•
This setting is available only when "CONNECTION_TYPE" is set
to "1" and when "NW_SETTING_ENABLE" is set to "N".
Y (Use "USER_DNS1_ADDR" or, "USER_DNS1_ADDR" and
"USER_DNS2_ADDR")
N (Receive DNS server address automatically)
Default Value
N
Phone User Interface
Reference
Configuring Settings from the Base Unit (KX-TGP55x only)/Handset
(Page 17)
Web User Interface Reference
Domain Name Server (Page 67)
STATIC_IP_ADDRESS
Value Format
158
Administrator Guide
String
Document Version
2012-03
4.4.1 IP Settings
Description
Specifies the IP address for the unit.
Note
•
•
This setting is available only when "CONNECTION_TYPE" is set
to "0" and when "NW_SETTING_ENABLE" is set to "N".
When you specify this parameter, you must specify
"STATIC_SUBNET" together in a configuration file.
Value Range
IP address in dotted-decimal notation
Default Value
Empty string
Phone User Interface
Reference
Configuring Settings from the Base Unit (KX-TGP55x only)/Handset
(Page 17)
Web User Interface Reference
Static IP Address (Page 67)
STATIC_SUBNET
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the subnet mask for the unit.
Note
•
•
This setting is available only when "CONNECTION_TYPE" is set
to "0" and when "NW_SETTING_ENABLE" is set to "N".
When you specify this parameter, you must specify
"STATIC_IP_ADDRESS" together in a configuration file.
Value Range
IP address in dotted-decimal notation
Default Value
Empty string
Phone User Interface
Reference
Configuring Settings from the Base Unit (KX-TGP55x only)/Handset
(Page 17)
Web User Interface Reference
Subnet Mask (Page 68)
STATIC_GATEWAY
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the IP address of the default gateway for the network where
the unit is connected.
Note
•
•
This setting is available only when "CONNECTION_TYPE" is set
to "0" and when "NW_SETTING_ENABLE" is set to "N".
When you specify this parameter, you must specify
"STATIC_IP_ADDRESS" and "STATIC_SUBNET" together in a
configuration file.
Value Range
IP address in dotted-decimal notation
Default Value
Empty string
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
159
4.4.2 DNS Settings
Phone User Interface
Reference
Configuring Settings from the Base Unit (KX-TGP55x only)/Handset
(Page 17)
Web User Interface Reference
Default Gateway (Page 68)
USER_DNS1_ADDR
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.
Note
•
This setting is available only when "CONNECTION_TYPE" is set
to "0" and when "NW_SETTING_ENABLE" is set to "N".
Value Range
IP address in dotted-decimal notation
Default Value
Empty string
Phone User Interface
Reference
Configuring Settings from the Base Unit (KX-TGP55x only)/Handset
(Page 17)
Web User Interface Reference
DNS1 (Page 68)
USER_DNS2_ADDR
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.
Note
•
This setting is available only when "CONNECTION_TYPE" is set
to "0" and when "NW_SETTING_ENABLE" is set to "N".
Value Range
IP address in dotted-decimal notation
Default Value
Empty string
Phone User Interface
Reference
Configuring Settings from the Base Unit (KX-TGP55x only)/Handset
(Page 17)
Web User Interface Reference
DNS2 (Page 69)
4.4.2 DNS Settings
DNS_QRY_PRLL
160
Value Format
Boolean
Description
Specifies the DNS query method as parallel or sequential.
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
4.4.2 DNS Settings
Value Range
•
•
Y (Parallel)
N (Sequential)
Note
•
•
Default Value
If set to "Y", the unit sends out all DNS queries at the same time.
The first DNS reply will be accepted and used by the unit.
If set to "N", the unit sends DNS queries sequentially.
The unit sends a request to the DNS server with the highest
priority for a preprogrammed time period (5 seconds). When the
timer expires, the unit sends a request to the DNS server with
the second priority.
Y
DNS_PRIORITY
Value Format
Boolean
Description
Specifies the priority of the DNS server.
Value Range
•
•
Y ("DNS1_ADDR" and "DNS2_ADDR" have first priority.)
N ("DNS1_ADDR" and "DNS2_ADDR" have no priority.)
Note
•
•
Default Value
If set to "Y", the DNS servers specified in "DNS1_ADDR" and
"DNS2_ADDR" will be queried first. If the queries fail, the DNS
server specified by the user (DHCP or static) will be queried.
If set to "N", the DNS server specified by the user (DHCP or
static) will be queried first. If the query fails, the DNS servers
specified in "DNS1_ADDR" and "DNS2_ADDR" will be queried.
N
DNS1_ADDR
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server for your phone
system dealer.
Value Range
IP address in dotted-decimal notation
Default Value
Empty string
DNS2_ADDR
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server for your phone
system dealer.
Value Range
IP address in dotted-decimal notation
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
161
4.4.3 Ethernet Port Settings
Default Value
Empty string
4.4.3 Ethernet Port Settings
VLAN_ENABLE
Value Format
Boolean
Description
Specifies whether to use the VLAN feature to perform VoIP
communication securely.
Note
•
This setting is available only when "NW_SETTING_ENABLE" is
set to "N".
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
N
Phone User Interface
Reference
2.1.3 VLAN Settings (KX-TGP55x only) (Page 37)
Web User Interface Reference
Enable VLAN (Page 70)
Y (Enable)
N (Disable)
VLAN_ID_IP_PHONE
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the VLAN ID for this unit.
Note
•
This setting is available only when "NW_SETTING_ENABLE" is
set to "N".
Value Range
1–4094
Default Value
2
Phone User Interface
Reference
2.1.3 VLAN Settings (KX-TGP55x only) (Page 37)
Web User Interface Reference
IP Phone (VLAN ID) (Page 70)
VLAN_PRI_IP_PHONE
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the priority number for the unit.
Note
•
162
Administrator Guide
This setting is available only when "NW_SETTING_ENABLE" is
set to "N".
Document Version
2012-03
4.4.4 HTTP Settings
Value Range
0–7
Default Value
7
Phone User Interface
Reference
2.1.3 VLAN Settings (KX-TGP55x only) (Page 37)
Web User Interface Reference
IP Phone (Priority) (Page 71)
VLAN_ID_PC (KX-TGP55x only)
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the VLAN ID for the PC.
Note
•
This setting is available only when "NW_SETTING_ENABLE" is
set to "N".
Value Range
1–4094
Default Value
1
Phone User Interface
Reference
2.1.3 VLAN Settings (KX-TGP55x only) (Page 37)
Web User Interface Reference
PC (VLAN ID) (KX-TGP55x only) (Page 71)
VLAN_PRI_PC (KX-TGP55x only)
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the priority number for the PC.
Note
•
This setting is available only when "NW_SETTING_ENABLE" is
set to "N".
Value Range
0–7
Default Value
0
Phone User Interface
Reference
2.1.3 VLAN Settings (KX-TGP55x only) (Page 37)
Web User Interface Reference
PC (Priority) (KX-TGP55x only) (Page 71)
4.4.4 HTTP Settings
HTTPD_PORTOPEN_AUTO
Value Format
Boolean
Description
Specifies whether the unit’s Web port is always open.
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
163
4.4.4 HTTP Settings
Value Range
•
•
Y (Web port is always open)
N (Web port is closed [can be opened temporarily through phone
user interface programming])
Notice
•
Default Value
If you want to set to "Y", please fully recognize the possibility of
unauthorized access to the unit through the Web user interface
and change this setting at your own risk. In addition, please take
full security measures for connecting to an external network and
control all passwords for logging in to the Web user interface.
N
HTTP_VER
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies which version of the HTTP protocol to use for HTTP
communication.
Value Range
•
•
1 (Use HTTP 1.0)
0 (Use HTTP 1.1)
Note
•
For this unit, it is strongly recommended that you specify "1" for
this setting. However, if the HTTP server does not function well
with HTTP 1.0, try changing the setting "0".
Default Value
1
Web User Interface Reference
HTTP Version (Page 72)
HTTP_USER_AGENT
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the text string to send as the user agent in the header of HTTP
requests.
Value Range
Max. 40 characters
Note
•
•
•
•
•
Default Value
164
Administrator Guide
An empty string is not allowed.
If "{mac}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with
the unit’s MAC address in lower-case.
If "{MAC}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with
the unit’s MAC address in upper-case.
If "{MODEL}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced
with the unit’s model name.
If "{fwver}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with
the firmware version of the unit.
Panasonic_{MODEL}/{fwver} ({mac})
Document Version
2012-03
4.4.4 HTTP Settings
Web User Interface Reference
HTTP User Agent (Page 72)
HTTP_SSL_VERIFY
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies whether to enable the verification of the root certificate.
Value Range
•
•
•
0 (No verification of root certificate)
1 (Simple verification of root certificate)
2 (Precise verification of root certificate)
Note
•
•
•
Default Value
If set to "0", the verification of the root certificate is disabled.
If set to "1", the verification of the root certificate is enabled. In
this case, the validity of the certificate’s date, certificate’s chain,
and the confirmation of the root certificate will be verified.
If set to "2", precise certificate verification is enabled. In this
case, the validity of the server name will be verified in addition
to the items verified when "1" is set.
0
CFG_ROOT_CERTIFICATE_PATH
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the URI of the root certificate.
Note
•
Value Range
Changing this setting may require restarting the unit.
Max. 255 characters
Note
•
Default Value
Document Version
2012-03
The format must be RFC 1738 compliant, as follows:
"<schema>://<user>:<password>@<host>:<port>/<url-path>"
– "<user>" must be less than 64 characters.
– "<password>" must be less than 64 characters.
– "<user>:<password>@" may be empty.
– The total of "<schema>://" and "<host>:<port>/<url-path>"
must be less than 128 characters.
– ":<port>" can be omitted if you do not need to specify the
port number.
Empty string
Administrator Guide
165
4.4.6 STUN Settings
4.4.5 Time Adjust Settings
NTP_ADDR
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the NTP server.
Value Range
Max. 127 characters (IP address in dotted-decimal notation or FQDN)
Default Value
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
NTP Server Address (Page 82)
TIME_SYNC_INTVL
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the interval, in seconds, to resynchronize after having
detected no reply from the NTP server.
Value Range
10–86400
Default Value
60
TIME_QUERY_INTVL
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the interval, in seconds, between synchronizations with the
NTP server.
Value Range
10–86400
Default Value
43200
Web User Interface Reference
Synchronization Interval (Page 82)
4.4.6 STUN Settings
STUN_SERV_ADDR
166
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the STUN server.
Value Range
Max. 127 characters (IP address in dotted-decimal notation or FQDN)
Default Value
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
STUN Server Address (Page 75)
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
4.4.7 Miscellaneous Network Settings
STUN_SERV_PORT
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the port number of the STUN server.
Value Range
1–65535
Default Value
3478
Web User Interface Reference
STUN Server Port (Page 75)
STUN_2NDSERV_ADDR
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the IP address of the secondary STUN server.
Note
•
This setting is available only when "STUN_SERV_ADDR" is
specified in IP address notation.
Value Range
IP address in dotted-decimal notation
Default Value
Empty string
STUN_2NDSERV_PORT
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the port number of the secondary STUN server.
Value Range
1–65535
Default Value
3478
4.4.7 Miscellaneous Network Settings
NW_SETTING_ENABLE
Value Format
Boolean
Description
Specifies whether to enable the network settings from the base unit and
handsets.
Note
•
Document Version
2012-03
If you change this setting to "N" when the network settings (with
the exception of "HOST_NAME") in 4.4.1 IP Settings have been
made through Web user interface programming, clear these
settings once by performing Reset Web Settings from the Web
user interface, and then change this setting to "N".
Administrator Guide
167
4.5.1 Multi Number Settings
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
Y
Y (Enable network settings)
N (Disable network settings)
CUSTOM_WEB_PAGE
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies whether to enable the settings in 3.4.1 Basic Network
Settings, 3.5.5 Time Adjust Settings, and 3.7.1 Multi Number
Settings from the Web user interface when logged in with the User
account.
Value Range
0–7
Basic Network
Settings
Time Adjust
Settings
Multi Number
Settings
0
Enable
Enable
Disable
1
Disable
Enable
Disable
2
Enable
Disable
Disable
3
Disable
Disable
Disable
4
Enable
Enable
Enable
5
Disable
Enable
Enable
6
Enable
Disable
Enable
7
Disable
Disable
Enable
Value
Default Value
0
4.5 Telephone Settings
4.5.1 Multi Number Settings
INCOMING_CALL_GROUP_[1–8]
168
Parameter Name Example
INCOMING_CALL_GROUP_1, INCOMING_CALL_GROUP_2, …,
INCOMING_CALL_GROUP_8
Value Format
Comma-separated Integer
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
4.5.1 Multi Number Settings
Description
Specifies the handsets (1–6) and the base unit (KX-TGP55x only) that
calls will arrive at, using 7 whole numbers (0 or 1) separated by
commas.
Value Range
•
•
0 (Disable)
1 (Enable)
Note
•
•
The format must be "x,x,x,x,x,x,y" (x: handsets 1 to 6 starting
from the left, y: base unit).
You cannot set all the values for the handsets and the base unit
(KX-TGP55x only) to "0" in this format.
Default Value
1,1,1,1,1,1,1
Web User Interface Reference
•
•
•
•
Line No. (Page 105)
Phone Number (Page 105)
Handset No. (Page 106)
Base (KX-TGP55x only) (Page 106)
OUTGOING_CALL_LINE_HS[1–6]
Parameter Name Example
OUTGOING_CALL_LINE_HS1, OUTGOING_CALL_LINE_HS2, …,
OUTGOING_CALL_LINE_HS6
Value Format
Comma-separated Integer
Description
Specifies which lines (1–8) can be seized when going off-hook to make
a call for each handset, using 8 whole numbers (0 or 1) separated by
commas.
Value Range
•
•
0 (Disable)
1 (Enable)
Note
•
•
The format must be "x,x,x,x,x,x,x,x" (x: line numbers 1 to 8
starting from the left).
If you set all the values for the lines to "0" in this format, calls
cannot be made from the handsets.
Default Value
1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1
Web User Interface Reference
•
•
Handset No. (Page 106)
Line No. (Page 107)
OUTGOING_CALL_LINE_BS
Value Format
Comma-separated Integer
Description
Specifies which lines (1–8) can be seized when going off-hook to make
a call for the base unit, using 8 whole numbers (0 or 1) separated by
commas.
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
169
4.5.1 Multi Number Settings
Value Range
•
•
0 (Disable)
1 (Enable)
Note
•
•
The format must be "x,x,x,x,x,x,x,x" (x: line numbers 1 to 8
starting from the left).
If you set all the values for the lines to "0" in this format, calls
cannot be made from the base unit.
Default Value
1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1
Web User Interface Reference
•
•
Base (KX-TGP55x only) (Page 106)
Line No. (Page 107)
DEFAULT_LINE_SELECT_HS[1–6]
Parameter Name Example
DEFAULT_LINE_SELECT_HS1, DEFAULT_LINE_SELECT_HS2, …,
DEFAULT_LINE_SELECT_HS6
Value Format
Comma-separated Integer
Description
Specifies which lines (1–8) to seize automatically when going off-hook
to make a call for each handset, using 8 whole numbers (0 or 1)
separated by commas.
Value Range
•
•
0 (Disable)
1 (Enable)
Note
•
•
•
The format must be "x,x,x,x,x,x,x,x" (x: line numbers 1 to 8
starting from the left).
"1" must be specified only once as a line that can be seized
automatically when going off-hook in this format.
If the line specified in this parameter is not specified as a line
that can be seized for the corresponding handset in
"OUTGOING_CALL_LINE_HS[1–6]", the handset cannot
make a call.
Default Value
1,0,0,0,0,0,0,0
Web User Interface Reference
Default (Page 107)
DEFAULT_LINE_SELECT_BS
170
Value Format
Comma-separated Integer
Description
Specifies which lines (1–8) to seize automatically when going off-hook
to make a call for the base unit, using 8 whole numbers (0 or 1)
separated by commas.
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
4.5.2 Call Control Settings
Value Range
•
•
0 (Disable)
1 (Enable)
Note
•
•
•
The format must be "x,x,x,x,x,x,x,x" (x: line numbers 1 to 8
starting from the left).
"1" must be specified only once as a line that can be seized
automatically when going off-hook in this format.
If the line specified in this parameter is not specified as a line
that can be seized for the base unit in
"OUTGOING_CALL_LINE_BS", the base unit cannot make a
call.
Default Value
1,0,0,0,0,0,0,0
Web User Interface Reference
Default (Page 107)
4.5.2 Call Control Settings
CONFERENCE_SERVER_ADDRESS
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the URI for a conference server, which consists of a user part,
the "@" symbol, and a host part, for example,
"conference@example.com".
Note
•
Availability depends on your phone system.
Value Range
Max. 127 characters
Default Value
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
Conference Server Address (Page 108)
EMERGENCY_CALL[1–5]
Parameter Name Example
EMERGENCY_CALL1, EMERGENCY_CALL2, EMERGENCY_CALL3,
EMERGENCY_CALL4, EMERGENCY_CALL5
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the phone numbers used for making emergency calls. A user
can dial any of the specified phone numbers at any time regardless of
any restrictions imposed on the unit. A maximum of 5 phone numbers
can be specified.
Note
•
Value Range
Document Version
2012-03
When a phone number is specified here, it will be prioritized
over the setting specified in "DIAL_PLAN_[1–8]" in 4.7.1 Call
Control Settings.
Max. 24 characters
Administrator Guide
171
4.5.3 Tone Settings
Default Value
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
1–5 (Page 109)
FIRSTDIGIT_TIM
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the length of time, in seconds, within which the first digits of
a dial number must be dialed. When this timer expires, the unit will play
a busy tone.
Value Range
10–600
Default Value
30
INTDIGIT_TIM
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the length of time, in seconds, within which subsequent digits
of a dial number must be dialed. When this timer expires after the last
key was pressed, dialing will start.
Value Range
3–10
Default Value
5
Web User Interface Reference
Inter-digit Timeout (Page 108)
VM_SUBSCRIBE_ENABLE
Value Format
Boolean
Description
Specifies whether to send the SUBSCRIBE request to a voice mail
server.
Note
•
Your phone system must support voice mail.
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
N
Web User Interface Reference
Send SUBSCRIBE to Voice Mail Server (Page 108)
Y (Send the SUBSCRIBE request)
N (Do not send the SUBSCRIBE request)
4.5.3 Tone Settings
DIAL_TONE_FRQ
Value Format
172
Administrator Guide
Comma-separated Integer
Document Version
2012-03
4.5.3 Tone Settings
Description
Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of dial tones using 2 whole
numbers separated by a comma.
Value Range
0, 200–1000 (0: No tone)
Note
•
If the value for this setting is "350,440", the unit will use a mixed
signal of a 350 Hz tone and a 440 Hz tone.
Default Value
350,440
Web User Interface Reference
Tone Frequencies (Page 118)
DIAL_TONE_TIMING
Value Format
Comma-separated Integer
Description
Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of dial tones using 4 whole
numbers (on 1, off 1, on 2, off 2) separated by commas.
Value Range
0–5000 (0: Infinite time)
Note
•
The unit will play the tone for the duration of the first value, stop
it for the duration of the second value, play it for the duration of
the third value, and then stop it for the duration of the last value.
The whole sequence will then repeat. For example, if the value
for this setting is "100,100,0,0", the unit will play the tone for 100
ms, stop it for 100 ms, and then play it continuously.
Default Value
0,0,0,0 (The unit plays the dial tone continuously.)
Web User Interface Reference
Tone Timings (Page 118)
BUSY_TONE_FRQ
Value Format
Comma-separated Integer
Description
Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of busy tones using 2
whole numbers separated by a comma.
Value Range
0, 200–1000 (0: No tone)
Default Value
480,620
Web User Interface Reference
Tone Frequencies (Page 119)
BUSY_TONE_TIMING
Value Format
Comma-separated Integer
Description
Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of busy tones using 4 whole
numbers (on 1, off 1, on 2, off 2) separated by commas.
Value Range
0–5000 (0: Infinite time)
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
173
4.5.3 Tone Settings
Default Value
500,500,500,500
Web User Interface Reference
Tone Timings (Page 119)
RINGING_TONE_FRQ
Value Format
Comma-separated Integer
Description
Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of ringback tones using 2
whole numbers separated by a comma.
Value Range
0, 200–1000 (0: No tone)
Default Value
440,480
Web User Interface Reference
Tone Frequencies (Page 119)
RINGING_TONE_TIMING
Value Format
Comma-separated Integer
Description
Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of ringback tones using 4 whole
numbers (on 1, off 1, on 2, off 2) separated by commas.
Value Range
0–5000 (0: Infinite time)
Default Value
2000,4000,2000,4000
Web User Interface Reference
Tone Timings (Page 120)
STT_TONE_FRQ
Value Format
Comma-separated Integer
Description
Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of stutter dial tones to
notify that a voice mail is waiting, using 2 whole numbers separated by
a comma.
Value Range
0, 200–1000 (0: No tone)
Default Value
350,440
Web User Interface Reference
Tone Frequencies (Page 120)
STT_TONE_TIMING
174
Value Format
Comma-separated Integer
Description
Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of stutter dial tones to notify that
a voice mail is waiting, using 22 whole numbers (on 1, off 1, on 2, off 2,
…, on 11, off 11) separated by commas.
Value Range
0–5000 (0: Infinite time)
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
4.5.3 Tone Settings
Default Value
100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,
100,100,100,100,100,100,100,0,0
Web User Interface Reference
Tone Timings (Page 120)
REORDER_TONE_FRQ
Value Format
Comma-separated Integer
Description
Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of reorder tones using 2
whole numbers separated by a comma.
Value Range
0, 200–1000 (0: No tone)
Default Value
480,620
Web User Interface Reference
Tone Frequencies (Page 120)
REORDER_TONE_TIMING
Value Format
Comma-separated Integer
Description
Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of reorder tones using 8 whole
numbers (on 1, off 1, on 2, off 2, on 3, off 3, on 4, off 4) separated by
commas.
Value Range
0–5000 (0: Infinite time)
Default Value
250,250,250,250,250,250,250,250
Web User Interface Reference
Tone Timings (Page 121)
HOWLER_TONE_FRQ
Value Format
Comma-separated Integer
Description
Specifies the dual-tone frequencies, in hertz, of howler tones (i.e., alarm
tones) using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma.
Value Range
0, 200–3000 (0: No tone)
Default Value
1400,2060
Web User Interface Reference
Tone Frequencies (Page 121)
HOWLER_TONE_TIMING
Value Format
Comma-separated Integer
Description
Specifies the pattern, in milliseconds, of howler tones (i.e., alarm tones)
using 4 whole numbers (on 1, off 1, on 2, off 2) separated by commas.
Value Range
0–5000 (0: Infinite time)
Default Value
100,100,100,100
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
175
4.5.3 Tone Settings
Web User Interface Reference
Tone Timings (Page 121)
HOWLER_START_TIME
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that busy or reorder tones play
until they switch to howler tones.
Value Range
0–120 (0: Disable)
Default Value
30
Web User Interface Reference
Start Time (Page 121)
BELL_CORE_PATTERN1_TIMING
Value Format
Comma-separated Integer
Description
Specifies the cadence, in milliseconds, of pattern ID 1, described in the
LSSGR, GR-506-CORE, "Signaling for Analog Interfaces" section 14,
using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma.
Value Range
0–5000 (0: Infinite time)
Default Value
2000,4000
BELL_CORE_PATTERN2_TIMING
Value Format
Comma-separated Integer
Description
Specifies the cadence, in milliseconds, of pattern ID 2, described in the
LSSGR, GR-506-CORE, "Signaling for Analog Interfaces" section 14,
using 4 whole numbers separated by commas.
Value Range
0–5000 (0: Infinite time)
Default Value
800,400,800,4000
BELL_CORE_PATTERN3_TIMING
176
Value Format
Comma-separated Integer
Description
Specifies the cadence, in milliseconds, of pattern ID 3, described in the
LSSGR, GR-506-CORE, "Signaling for Analog Interfaces" section 14,
using 6 whole numbers separated by commas.
Value Range
0–5000 (0: Infinite time)
Default Value
400,200,400,200,800,4000
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
4.6.1 Codec Settings
BELL_CORE_PATTERN4_TIMING
Value Format
Comma-separated Integer
Description
Specifies the cadence, in milliseconds, of pattern ID 4, described in the
LSSGR, GR-506-CORE, "Signaling for Analog Interfaces" section 14,
using 6 whole numbers separated by commas.
Value Range
0–5000 (0: Infinite time)
Default Value
300,200,1000,200,300,4000
BELL_CORE_PATTERN5_TIMING
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the cadence, in milliseconds, of pattern ID 5, described in the
LSSGR, GR-506-CORE, "Signaling for Analog Interfaces" section 14.
Value Range
0–5000 (0: Infinite time)
Default Value
500
4.6 VoIP Settings
4.6.1 Codec Settings
SDP_CODEC[0–4]_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SDP_CODEC0_1, SDP_CODEC0_2, …, SDP_CODEC0_8,
SDP_CODEC1_1, SDP_CODEC1_2, …, SDP_CODEC1_8, …,
SDP_CODEC4_1, SDP_CODEC4_2, …, SDP_CODEC4_8
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the 1st to 5th priority (from 0–4) codec to be used for each
line (from 1–8) with "SDP_CODECx_y" (x: priority, y: line number).
Value Range
Max. 32 characters
– G722
– PCMA (G.711 A-law)
– G726-32 (G.726 [32k])
– G729A
– PCMU (G.711 µ-law)
– Empty string
Default Value
G722 (for SDP_CODEC0_1 to SDP_CODEC0_8)
PCMA (for SDP_CODEC1_1 to SDP_CODEC1_8)
G726-32 (for SDP_CODEC2_1 to SDP_CODEC2_8)
G729A (for SDP_CODEC3_1 to SDP_CODEC3_8)
PCMU (for SDP_CODEC4_1 to SDP_CODEC4_8)
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
177
4.6.1 Codec Settings
Web User Interface Reference
•
•
•
•
•
First CODEC (Page 101)
Second CODEC (Page 102)
Third CODEC (Page 102)
Fourth CODEC (Page 103)
Fifth CODEC (Page 103)
SDP_CKRTE[0–4]_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SDP_CKRTE0_1, SDP_CKRTE0_2, …, SDP_CKRTE0_8,
SDP_CKRTE1_1, SDP_CKRTE1_2, …, SDP_CKRTE1_8, …,
SDP_CKRTE4_1, SDP_CKRTE4_2, …, SDP_CKRTE4_8
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the sampling rate with "SDP_CKRTEx_y" for the
corresponding encoding name specified by "SDP_CODECx_y" (x:
priority, y: line number).
Value Range
0, 8000, or 16000 (0: Unused SDP, 8000 or 16000: Available SDPs)
Note
•
Default Value
The value "16000" is valid only for the G722 codec.
8000
SDP_PARAM[0–4]_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SDP_PARAM0_1, SDP_PARAM0_2, …, SDP_PARAM0_8,
SDP_PARAM1_1, SDP_PARAM1_2, …, SDP_PARAM1_8, …,
SDP_PARAM4_1, SDP_PARAM4_2, …, SDP_PARAM4_8
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the number of audio channels with "SDP_PARAMx_y" for the
corresponding encoding name specified by "SDP_CODECx_y" (x:
priority, y: line number).
Note
•
For the current version, only the value "0" is supported.
Value Range
0, 1–255 (0: No parameter specification, 1–255: Audio channels)
Default Value
0
SDP_PTYPE[0–4]_[1–8]
178
Parameter Name Example
SDP_PTYPE0_1, SDP_PTYPE0_2, …, SDP_PTYPE0_8,
SDP_PTYPE1_1, SDP_PTYPE1_2, …, SDP_PTYPE1_8, …,
SDP_PTYPE4_1, SDP_PTYPE4_2, …, SDP_PTYPE4_8
Value Format
Integer
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
4.6.1 Codec Settings
Description
Specifies the payload type number with "SDP_PTYPEx_y" for the
corresponding encoding name specified by "SDP_CODECx_y" (x:
priority, y: line number).
Value Range
0–127, 255
Note
•
Default Value
If an empty string is set for "SDP_CODECx_y", "255" must be
set as the value for the corresponding "SDP_PTYPEx_y".
9 (for SDP_PTYPE0_1 to SDP_PTYPE0_8)
8 (for SDP_PTYPE1_1 to SDP_PTYPE1_8)
2 (for SDP_PTYPE2_1 to SDP_PTYPE2_8)
18 (for SDP_PTYPE3_1 to SDP_PTYPE3_8)
0 (for SDP_PTYPE4_1 to SDP_PTYPE4_8)
CODEC_G711_REQ
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies whether to set "PCMU" as a codec selection automatically
when "SDP_CODECx_y" (x: priority, y: line number) is set to any codec
selection other than "PCMU".
Note
•
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
1
Changing this setting may require restarting the unit.
0 (Do not set "PCMU")
1 (Set "PCMU")
CODEC_G729_PARAM
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies whether to add an attribute line, "a=fmtp:18 annexb=no", to
SDP when "SDP_CODECx_y" (x: priority, y: line number) is set to
"G729A".
Note
•
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
0
Document Version
2012-03
Changing this setting may require restarting the unit.
0 (Do not add "a=fmtp:18 annexb=no")
1 (Add "a=fmtp:18 annexb=no")
Administrator Guide
179
4.6.2 RTP Settings
4.6.2 RTP Settings
TOS_RTP_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
TOS_RTP_1, TOS_RTP_2, …, TOS_RTP_8
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the value to be stored in the ToS (Type of Service) field in the
IP header of RTP packets as a DSCP for DiffServ.
Note
•
The structures of the ToS/DS field in an IP header are shown
below.
ToS field
0
1
2
3
Precedence
4
5
6
Currently
unused
Type of Service
3 bits
7
4 bits
1 bit
DS field
0
1
2
3
DSCP
6 bits
4
5
6
7
Currently
unused
2 bits
The ToS field consists of a 3-bit precedence, a 4-bit type of
service, and a 1-bit unused field.
The DS filed consists of a 6-bit DSCP and a 2-bit unused field.
180
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
4.6.2 RTP Settings
Value Range
0–255
Note
•
Because the 6-bit DSCP values (i.e., "xxx 000" where "x"="0"
or "1") in the DS field are converted to the 8-bit DSCP values
(i.e., "xxx 000 00"), you must specify here the fourfold decimal
value for 2 bits shifted left. The following listing shows the DSCP
level of DiffServ and the corresponding decimal value to be
specified in this parameter.
– Best Effort (default) (000 000 00): 0
– AF11 (DSCP 10) (001 010 00): 40
– AF12 (DSCP 12) (001 100 00): 48
– AF13 (DSCP 14) (001 110 00): 56
– AF21 (DSCP 18) (010 010 00): 72
– AF22 (DSCP 20) (010 100 00): 80
– AF23 (DSCP 22) (010 110 00): 88
– AF31 (DSCP 26) (011 010 00): 104
– AF32 (DSCP 28) (011 100 00): 112
– AF33 (DSCP 30) (011 110 00): 120
– AF41 (DSCP 34) (100 010 00): 136
– AF42 (DSCP 36) (100 100 00): 144
– AF43 (DSCP 38) (100 110 00): 152
– CS1 (ToS 1) (001 000 00): 32
– CS2 (ToS 2) (010 000 00): 64
– CS3 (ToS 3) (011 000 00): 96
– CS4 (ToS 4) (100 000 00): 128
– CS5 (ToS 5) (101 000 00): 160
– CS6 (ToS 6) (110 000 00): 192
– CS7 (ToS 7) (111 000 00): 224
– EF (Expedited Forwarding) (DSCP 46) (101 110 00): 184
Default Value
0
Web User Interface Reference
RTP Packet QoS (DSCP) (Page 98)
RTCP_INTVL_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
RTCP_INTVL_1, RTCP_INTVL_2, …, RTCP_INTVL_8
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the interval, in seconds, between RTCP packets.
Value Range
0, 5–65535 (0: Disable)
Default Value
0
Web User Interface Reference
RTCP Interval (Page 99)
MAX_DELAY_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
Document Version
2012-03
MAX_DELAY_1, MAX_DELAY_2, …, MAX_DELAY_8
Administrator Guide
181
4.6.2 RTP Settings
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the maximum delay, in 10-millisecond units, of the jitter buffer.
Value Range
3–50 (´ 10 ms)
Note
•
This setting is subject to the following conditions:
– This value must be greater than "NOM_DELAY"
– This value must be greater than "MIN_DELAY"
– "NOM_DELAY" must be greater than or equal to
"MIN_DELAY"
Default Value
20
Web User Interface Reference
Maximum Delay (Page 99)
MIN_DELAY_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
MIN_DELAY_1, MIN_DELAY_2, …, MIN_DELAY_8
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the minimum delay, in 10-millisecond units, of the jitter buffer.
Value Range
1 or 2 (´ 10 ms)
Note
•
This setting is subject to the following conditions:
– This value must be less than or equal to "NOM_DELAY"
– This value must be less than "MAX_DELAY"
– "MAX_DELAY" must be greater than "NOM_DELAY"
Default Value
2
Web User Interface Reference
Minimum Delay (Page 100)
NOM_DELAY_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
NOM_DELAY_1, NOM_DELAY_2, …, NOM_DELAY_8
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the initial delay, in 10-millisecond units, of the jitter buffer.
Value Range
1–7 (´ 10 ms)
Note
•
182
This setting is subject to the following conditions:
– This value must be greater than or equal to "MIN_DELAY"
– This value must be less than "MAX_DELAY"
Default Value
2
Web User Interface Reference
Initial Delay (Page 100)
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
4.6.2 RTP Settings
RTP_PORT_MIN
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the lowest port number that the unit will use for RTP packets.
Note
•
Value Range
If port numbers are specified in [Channel 1–3] in
3.4.5.3 External RTP Port in the Web user interface, this
setting is ignored and the corresponding external RTP port is
enabled.
1024–48750 (even number only)
Note
•
The value for this setting must be less than or equal to
"RTP_PORT_MAX" - 400.
Default Value
16000
Web User Interface Reference
Minimum RTP Port Number (Page 97)
RTP_PORT_MAX
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the highest port number that the unit will use for RTP packets.
Note
•
Value Range
If port numbers are specified in [Channel 1–3] in
3.4.5.3 External RTP Port in the Web user interface, this
setting is ignored and the corresponding external RTP port is
enabled.
1424–49150 (even number only)
Note
•
The value for this setting must be greater than or equal to
"RTP_PORT_MIN" + 400.
Default Value
20000
Web User Interface Reference
Maximum RTP Port Number (Page 97)
RTP_PTIME
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the interval, in milliseconds, between transmissions of RTP
packets.
Value Range
•
•
•
Document Version
2012-03
20
30
40
Administrator Guide
183
4.6.3 Miscellaneous VoIP Settings
Default Value
20
Web User Interface Reference
RTP Packet Time (Page 96)
4.6.3 Miscellaneous VoIP Settings
OUTBANDDTMF_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
OUTBANDDTMF_1, OUTBANDDTMF_2, …, OUTBANDDTMF_8
Value Format
Boolean
Description
Specifies the method for transmitting DTMF tones.
Value Range
•
•
Y (Outband [use telephone-event])
N (Inband)
Note
•
•
If set to "Y", DTMF tones will be sent through SDP, compliant
with RFC 2833.
If set to "N", DTMF tones will be encoded in the RTP stream.
Default Value
Y
Web User Interface Reference
DTMF Type (Page 100)
OUTBANDDTMF_VOL
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the volume (in decibels [dB]) of the DTMF tone using RFC
2833.
Value Range
-63–0
Default Value
-5
TELEVENT_PTYPE_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
TELEVENT_PTYPE_1, TELEVENT_PTYPE_2, …,
TELEVENT_PTYPE_8
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the RFC 2833 payload type for DTMF tones.
Note
•
184
Value Range
96–127
Default Value
101
Administrator Guide
This setting is available only when "OUTBANDDTMF_[1–8]" is
set to "Y".
Document Version
2012-03
4.7.1 Call Control Settings
Web User Interface Reference
Telephone-event Payload Type (Page 101)
RFC2543_HOLD_ENABLE_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
RFC2543_HOLD_ENABLE_1, RFC2543_HOLD_ENABLE_2, …,
RFC2543_HOLD_ENABLE_8
Value Format
Boolean
Description
Specifies whether to enable the RFC 2543 Call Hold feature on this line.
Value Range
•
•
Y (Enable RFC 2543 Call Hold)
N (Disable RFC 2543 Call Hold)
Note
•
•
If set to "Y", the "c=0.0.0.0" syntax will be set in SDP when
sending a re-INVITE message to hold the call.
If set to "N", the "c=x.x.x.x" syntax will be set in SDP.
Default Value
Y
Web User Interface Reference
Supports RFC 2543 (c=0.0.0.0) (Page 101)
4.7 Line Settings
4.7.1 Call Control Settings
VM_NUMBER_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
VM_NUMBER_1, VM_NUMBER_2, …, VM_NUMBER_8
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the phone number used to access the voice mail server.
Note
•
Value Range
Your phone system must support voice mail.
Max. 24 characters (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Note
•
No other characters are allowed.
Default Value
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
Voice Mail Access Number (Page 111)
DIAL_PLAN_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
Document Version
2012-03
DIAL_PLAN_1, DIAL_PLAN_2, …, DIAL_PLAN_8
Administrator Guide
185
4.7.1 Call Control Settings
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies a dial format, such as specific phone numbers, that control
which numbers can be dialed or how to handle the call when making a
call. For details, see 5.3 Dial Plan.
Value Range
Max. 500 characters
Default Value
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
Dial Plan (Page 112)
DIAL_PLAN_NOT_MATCH_ENABLE_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
DIAL_PLAN_NOT_MATCH_ENABLE_1,
DIAL_PLAN_NOT_MATCH_ENABLE_2, …,
DIAL_PLAN_NOT_MATCH_ENABLE_8
Value Format
Boolean
Description
Specifies whether to enable dial plan filtering so that a call is not made
when the dialed number does not match any of the dial formats
specified in "DIAL_PLAN_[1–8]".
Value Range
•
•
Y (Enable dial plan filtering)
N (Disable dial plan filtering)
Note
•
•
If set to "Y", the dialed number will not be sent to the line when
the number dialed by the user does not match any of the dial
formats specified in the dial plan.
If set to "N", the dialed number will be sent to the line, even if
the number dialed by the user does not match any of the dial
formats specified in the dial plan.
Default Value
N
Web User Interface Reference
Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match (Page 113)
SHARED_CALL_ENABLE_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SHARED_CALL_ENABLE_1, SHARED_CALL_ENABLE_2, …,
SHARED_CALL_ENABLE_8
Value Format
Boolean
Description
Specifies whether to enable the Shared Call feature of the SIP server,
which is used to share one line among the units.
Note
•
•
186
Administrator Guide
You cannot set both "SHARED_CALL_ENABLE_[1–8]" and
"SYNCHRONIZATION_ENABLE_[1–8]" to "Y" at the same
time.
Availability depends on your phone system.
Document Version
2012-03
4.7.1 Call Control Settings
Value Range
•
•
Y (Enable shared call)
N (Disable shared call)
Note
•
•
If set to "Y", the SIP server will control the line by using a
shared-call signaling method.
If set to "N", the SIP server will control the line by using a
standard signaling method.
Default Value
N
Web User Interface Reference
Enable Shared Call (Page 111)
SHARED_USER_ID_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SHARED_USER_ID_1, SHARED_USER_ID_2, …,
SHARED_USER_ID_8
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the unique ID used by the SIP server when
"SHARED_CALL_ENABLE_[1–8]" is set to "Y".
Value Range
Max. 24 characters
Default Value
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
Unique ID of Shared Call (Page 112)
SYNCHRONIZATION_ENABLE_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SYNCHRONIZATION_ENABLE_1, SYNCHRONIZATION_ENABLE_2,
…, SYNCHRONIZATION_ENABLE_8
Value Format
Boolean
Description
Specifies whether to synchronize the Do Not Disturb and Call Forward
settings, configured via the Web user interface or phone user interface,
between the unit and the portal server that is provided by your phone
system dealer.
Note
•
•
Even if you specify "Y", this feature may not function properly if
your phone system does not support it. Before you configure
this setting, consult your phone system dealer.
You cannot set both "SHARED_CALL_ENABLE_[1–8]" and
"SYNCHRONIZATION_ENABLE_[1–8]" to "Y" at the same
time.
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
N
Web User Interface Reference
Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward (Page 112)
Document Version
2012-03
Y (Enable Do Not Disturb/Call Forward synchronization)
N (Disable Do Not Disturb/Call Forward synchronization)
Administrator Guide
187
4.7.2 SIP Settings
PRIVACY_MODE_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
PRIVACY_MODE_1, PRIVACY_MODE_2, …, PRIVACY_MODE_8
Value Format
Boolean
Description
Specifies whether to enable privacy mode, which prohibits another
handset or base unit from barging in on a conversation.
Value Range
•
•
Y (Enable privacy mode)
N (Disable privacy mode)
Note
•
•
If set to "Y", the conversation cannot be interrupted by another
handset or base unit.
If set to "N", the conversation can be interrupted by another
handset or base unit.
Default Value
Y
Web User Interface Reference
Enable Privacy Mode (Page 110)
4.7.2 SIP Settings
SIP_USER_AGENT
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the text string to send as the user agent in the headers of SIP
messages.
Value Range
Max. 40 characters
Note
•
•
•
•
•
An empty string is not allowed.
If "{mac}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with
the unit’s MAC address in lower-case.
If "{MAC}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with
the unit’s MAC address in upper-case.
If "{MODEL}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced
with the unit’s model name.
If "{fwver}" is included in this parameter, it will be replaced with
the firmware version of the unit.
Default Value
Panasonic_{MODEL}/{fwver} ({mac})
Web User Interface Reference
SIP User Agent (Page 86)
SIP_AUTHID_[1–8]
188
Parameter Name Example
SIP_AUTHID_1, SIP_AUTHID_2, …, SIP_AUTHID_8
Value Format
String
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
4.7.2 SIP Settings
Description
Specifies the authentication ID required to access the SIP server.
Value Range
Max. 64 characters (except ", &, ', :, <, >, and space)
Default Value
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
Authentication ID (Page 91)
SIP_PASS_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SIP_PASS_1, SIP_PASS_2, …, SIP_PASS_8
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the authentication password used to access the SIP server.
Value Range
Max. 64 characters (except ", &, ', :, <, >, and space)
Default Value
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
Authentication Password (Page 92)
SIP_SRC_PORT_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SIP_SRC_PORT_1, SIP_SRC_PORT_2, …, SIP_SRC_PORT_8
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the source port number used by the unit for SIP
communication.
Value Range
1024–49151
Note
•
The SIP port number for each line must be unique.
Default Value
5060 (for SIP_SRC_PORT_1)
5070 (for SIP_SRC_PORT_2)
5080 (for SIP_SRC_PORT_3)
5090 (for SIP_SRC_PORT_4)
5100 (for SIP_SRC_PORT_5)
5110 (for SIP_SRC_PORT_6)
5120 (for SIP_SRC_PORT_7)
5130 (for SIP_SRC_PORT_8)
Web User Interface Reference
Source Port (Page 91)
SIP_PRXY_ADDR_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SIP_PRXY_ADDR_1, SIP_PRXY_ADDR_2, …, SIP_PRXY_ADDR_8
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP proxy server.
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
189
4.7.2 SIP Settings
Value Range
Max. 127 characters (IP address in dotted-decimal notation or FQDN)
Default Value
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
Proxy Server Address (Page 89)
SIP_PRXY_PORT_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SIP_PRXY_PORT_1, SIP_PRXY_PORT_2, …, SIP_PRXY_PORT_8
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP proxy
server.
Value Range
1–65535
Default Value
5060
Web User Interface Reference
Proxy Server Port (Page 89)
SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_1, SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_2, …,
SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_8
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP registrar server.
Value Range
Max. 127 characters (IP address in dotted-decimal notation or FQDN)
Default Value
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
Registrar Server Address (Page 89)
SIP_RGSTR_PORT_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SIP_RGSTR_PORT_1, SIP_RGSTR_PORT_2, …,
SIP_RGSTR_PORT_8
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP
registrar server.
Value Range
1–65535
Default Value
5060
Web User Interface Reference
Registrar Server Port (Page 89)
SIP_SVCDOMAIN_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
190
Administrator Guide
SIP_SVCDOMAIN_1, SIP_SVCDOMAIN_2, …, SIP_SVCDOMAIN_8
Document Version
2012-03
4.7.2 SIP Settings
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the domain name provided by your phone system dealer. The
domain name is the part of the SIP URI that comes after the "@" symbol.
Value Range
Max. 127 characters
Default Value
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
Service Domain (Page 91)
REG_EXPIRE_TIME_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
REG_EXPIRE_TIME_1, REG_EXPIRE_TIME_2, …,
REG_EXPIRE_TIME_8
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that the registration remains
valid. This value is set in the "Expires" header of the REGISTER
request.
Value Range
1–4294967295
Default Value
3600
REG_INTERVAL_RATE_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
REG_INTERVAL_RATE_1, REG_INTERVAL_RATE_2, …,
REG_INTERVAL_RATE_8
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the percentage of the "expires" value after which to refresh
registration by sending a new REGISTER message in the same dialog.
Value Range
1–100
Default Value
90
SIP_SESSION_TIME_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SIP_SESSION_TIME_1, SIP_SESSION_TIME_2, …,
SIP_SESSION_TIME_8
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that the unit waits before
terminating SIP sessions when no reply to repeated requests is
received. For details, refer to RFC 4028.
Value Range
0, 60–65535 (0: Disable)
Default Value
0
Web User Interface Reference
Supports Session Timer (RFC 4028) (Page 95)
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
191
4.7.2 SIP Settings
TOS_SIP_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
TOS_SIP_1, TOS_SIP_2, …, TOS_SIP_8
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the value to be stored in the ToS field in the IP header of SIP
messages.
Note
•
The structures of the ToS/DS field in an IP header are shown
below.
ToS field
0
1
2
3
Precedence
4
5
6
Currently
unused
Type of Service
3 bits
7
4 bits
1 bit
DS field
0
1
2
3
DSCP
6 bits
4
5
6
7
Currently
unused
2 bits
The ToS field consists of a 3-bit precedence, a 4-bit type of
service, and a 1-bit unused field.
The DS filed consists of a 6-bit DSCP and a 2-bit unused field.
192
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
4.7.2 SIP Settings
Value Range
0–255
Note
•
Because the 6-bit DSCP values (i.e., "xxx 000" where "x"="0"
or "1") in the DS field are converted to the 8-bit DSCP values
(i.e., "xxx 000 00"), you must specify here the fourfold decimal
value for 2 bits shifted left. The following listing shows the DSCP
level of DiffServ and the corresponding decimal value to be
specified in this parameter.
– Best Effort (default) (000 000 00): 0
– AF11 (DSCP 10) (001 010 00): 40
– AF12 (DSCP 12) (001 100 00): 48
– AF13 (DSCP 14) (001 110 00): 56
– AF21 (DSCP 18) (010 010 00): 72
– AF22 (DSCP 20) (010 100 00): 80
– AF23 (DSCP 22) (010 110 00): 88
– AF31 (DSCP 26) (011 010 00): 104
– AF32 (DSCP 28) (011 100 00): 112
– AF33 (DSCP 30) (011 110 00): 120
– AF41 (DSCP 34) (100 010 00): 136
– AF42 (DSCP 36) (100 100 00): 144
– AF43 (DSCP 38) (100 110 00): 152
– CS1 (ToS 1) (001 000 00): 32
– CS2 (ToS 2) (010 000 00): 64
– CS3 (ToS 3) (011 000 00): 96
– CS4 (ToS 4) (100 000 00): 128
– CS5 (ToS 5) (101 000 00): 160
– CS6 (ToS 6) (110 000 00): 192
– CS7 (ToS 7) (111 000 00): 224
– EF (Expedited Forwarding) (DSCP 46) (101 110 00): 184
Default Value
0
Web User Interface Reference
SIP Packet QoS (DSCP) (Page 94)
SIP_2NDPROXY_ADDR_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SIP_2NDPROXY_ADDR_1, SIP_2NDPROXY_ADDR_2, …,
SIP_2NDPROXY_ADDR_8
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the IP address of the secondary SIP proxy server.
Note
•
This setting is available only when "SIP_PRXY_ADDR_[1–
8]" is specified in IP address notation.
Value Range
IP address in dotted-decimal notation
Default Value
Empty string
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
193
4.7.2 SIP Settings
SIP_2NDPROXY_PORT_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SIP_2NDPROXY_PORT_1, SIP_2NDPROXY_PORT_2, …,
SIP_2NDPROXY_PORT_8
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the port number to use for communication with the secondary
SIP proxy server.
Value Range
1–65535
Default Value
5060
SIP_2NDRGSTR_ADDR_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SIP_2NDRGSTR_ADDR_1, SIP_2NDRGSTR_ADDR_2, …,
SIP_2NDRGSTR_ADDR_8
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the IP address of the secondary SIP registrar server.
Note
•
This setting is available only when "SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_[1–
8]" is specified in IP address notation.
Value Range
IP address in dotted-decimal notation
Default Value
Empty string
SIP_2NDRGSTR_PORT_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SIP_2NDRGSTR_PORT_1, SIP_2NDRGSTR_PORT_2, …,
SIP_2NDRGSTR_PORT_8
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the port number to use for communication with the secondary
SIP registrar server.
Value Range
1–65535
Default Value
5060
SIP_TIMER_T1_[1–8]
194
Parameter Name Example
SIP_TIMER_T1_1, SIP_TIMER_T1_2, …, SIP_TIMER_T1_8
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the default interval, in milliseconds, between transmissions of
SIP messages. For details, refer to RFC 3261.
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
4.7.2 SIP Settings
Value Range
•
•
•
•
•
Default Value
500
Web User Interface Reference
T1 Timer (Page 93)
250
500
1000
2000
4000
SIP_TIMER_T2_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SIP_TIMER_T2_1, SIP_TIMER_T2_2, …, SIP_TIMER_T2_8
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the maximum interval, in seconds, between transmissions of
SIP messages. For details, refer to RFC 3261.
Value Range
•
•
•
•
•
Default Value
4
Web User Interface Reference
T2 Timer (Page 93)
2
4
8
16
32
INVITE_RTXN_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
INVITE_RTXN_1, INVITE_RTXN_2, …, INVITE_RTXN_8
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the number of times that INVITE requests are retransmitted
when no reply is received from the server.
Value Range
1–6
Default Value
6
Web User Interface Reference
INVITE Retry Count (Page 93)
OTHER_RTXN_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
OTHER_RTXN_1, OTHER_RTXN_2, …, OTHER_RTXN_8
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the number of times that non-INVITE requests (general SIP
messages) are retransmitted when no reply is received from the server.
Value Range
1–10
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
195
4.7.2 SIP Settings
Default Value
10
Web User Interface Reference
Non-INVITE Retry Count (Page 94)
SIP_FOVR_NORSP_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SIP_FOVR_NORSP_1, SIP_FOVR_NORSP_2, …,
SIP_FOVR_NORSP_8
Value Format
Boolean
Description
Specifies whether to perform the fail-over process when the unit detects
that the SIP server is not replying to SIP message.
Value Range
•
•
Y (Enable fail-over)
N (Disable fail-over)
Note
•
•
Default Value
If set to "Y", the unit will try to use the other SIP servers via the
DNS SRV and A records.
If set to "N", the unit will not try to use the other SIP servers.
Y
SIP_FOVR_MAX_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SIP_FOVR_MAX_1, SIP_FOVR_MAX_2, …, SIP_FOVR_MAX_8
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the maximum number of servers (including the first [normal]
server) used in the fail-over process.
Value Range
1–4
Default Value
2
SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_[1–8]
196
Parameter Name Example
SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_1, SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_2, …,
SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_8
Value Format
Boolean
Description
Specifies whether to request the DNS server to translate domain names
into IP addresses using the SRV record.
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
4.7.2 SIP Settings
Value Range
•
•
Y (Enable DNS SRV lookup)
N (Disable DNS SRV lookup)
Note
•
•
If set to "Y", the unit will perform a DNS SRV lookup for a SIP
registrar server, SIP proxy server, SIP outbound proxy server,
or SIP presence server.
If set to "N", the unit will not perform a DNS SRV lookup for a
SIP registrar server, SIP proxy server, SIP outbound proxy
server, or SIP presence server.
Default Value
Y
Web User Interface Reference
Enable DNS SRV lookup (Page 92)
SIP_UDP_SRV_PREFIX_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SIP_UDP_SRV_PREFIX_1, SIP_UDP_SRV_PREFIX_2, …,
SIP_UDP_SRV_PREFIX_8
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies a prefix to add to the domain name when performing a DNS
SRV lookup using UDP.
Note
•
This setting is available only when "SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_[1–
8]" is set to "Y".
Value Range
Max. 32 characters
Default Value
_sip._udp.
Web User Interface Reference
SRV lookup Prefix for UDP (Page 92)
SIP_TCP_SRV_PREFIX_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SIP_TCP_SRV_PREFIX_1, SIP_TCP_SRV_PREFIX_2, …,
SIP_TCP_SRV_PREFIX_8
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies a prefix to add to the domain name when performing a DNS
SRV lookup using TCP.
Note
•
This setting is available only when "SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_[1–
8]" is set to "Y".
Value Range
Max. 32 characters
Default Value
_sip._tcp.
Web User Interface Reference
SRV lookup Prefix for TCP (Page 93)
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
197
4.7.2 SIP Settings
SIP_100REL_ENABLE_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SIP_100REL_ENABLE_1, SIP_100REL_ENABLE_2, …,
SIP_100REL_ENABLE_8
Value Format
Boolean
Description
Specifies whether to add the option tag 100rel to the "Supported"
header of the INVITE message. For details, refer to RFC 3262.
Value Range
•
•
Y (Enable 100rel function)
N (Disable 100rel function)
Note
•
•
If set to "Y", the Reliability of Provisional Responses function
will be enabled. The option tag 100rel will be added to the
"Supported" header of the INVITE message and to the
"Require" header of the "1xx" provisional message.
If set to "N", the option tag 100rel will not be used.
Default Value
N
Web User Interface Reference
Supports 100rel (RFC 3262) (Page 95)
SIP_18X_RTX_INTVL_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SIP_18X_RTX_INTVL_1, SIP_18X_RTX_INTVL_2, …,
SIP_18X_RTX_INTVL_8
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the retransmission interval, in seconds, for "18x" responses.
Value Range
0, 1–600 (0: Disable)
Default Value
0
SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_[1–8]
198
Parameter Name Example
SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_1, SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_2, …,
SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_8
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP presence server.
Value Range
Max. 127 characters (IP address in dotted-decimal notation or FQDN)
Default Value
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
Presence Server Address (Page 90)
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
4.7.2 SIP Settings
SIP_PRSNC_PORT_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SIP_PRSNC_PORT_1, SIP_PRSNC_PORT_2, …,
SIP_PRSNC_PORT_8
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP
presence server.
Value Range
1–65535
Default Value
5060
Web User Interface Reference
Presence Server Port (Page 90)
SIP_2NDPRSNC_ADDR_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SIP_2NDPRSNC_ADDR_1, SIP_2NDPRSNC_ADDR_2, …,
SIP_2NDPRSNC_ADDR_8
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the IP address of the secondary presence server.
Note
•
This setting is available only when "SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_[1–
8]" is specified in IP address notation.
Value Range
IP address in dotted-decimal notation
Default Value
Empty string
SIP_2NDPRSNC_PORT_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SIP_2NDPRSNC_PORT_1, SIP_2NDPRSNC_PORT_2, …,
SIP_2NDPRSNC_PORT_8
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the port number to use for communication with the secondary
SIP presence server.
Value Range
1–65535
Default Value
5060
USE_DEL_REG_OPEN_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
USE_DEL_REG_OPEN_1, USE_DEL_REG_OPEN_2, …,
USE_DEL_REG_OPEN_8
Value Format
Boolean
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
199
4.7.2 SIP Settings
Description
Specifies whether to enable cancelation before registration when, for
example, the unit is turned on.
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
N
Y (Enable cancelation before registration)
N (Disable cancelation before registration)
USE_DEL_REG_CLOSE_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
USE_DEL_REG_CLOSE_1, USE_DEL_REG_CLOSE_2, …,
USE_DEL_REG_CLOSE_8
Value Format
Boolean
Description
Specifies whether to enable the cancelation of registration before the
SIP function shuts down when, for example, the configuration has
changed.
Value Range
•
•
Y (Enable registration cancelation before shutting down)
N (Disable registration cancelation before shutting down)
Note
•
•
Default Value
If set to "Y", registration cancelation is enabled.
If set to "N", registration cancelation is disabled even when the
SIP stack is shutting down.
N
PORT_PUNCH_INTVL_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
PORT_PUNCH_INTVL_1, PORT_PUNCH_INTVL_2, …,
PORT_PUNCH_INTVL_8
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the interval, in seconds, between transmissions of the Keep
Alive packet to the unit in order to maintain the NAT binding information.
Note
•
This setting is available only when "SIP_TRANSPORT_[1–
8]" is set to "0" for UDP.
Value Range
0, 10–300 (0: Disable)
Default Value
0
Web User Interface Reference
Keep Alive Interval (Page 95)
SIP_SUBS_EXPIRE_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
200
Administrator Guide
SIP_SUBS_EXPIRE_1, SIP_SUBS_EXPIRE_2, …,
SIP_SUBS_EXPIRE_8
Document Version
2012-03
4.7.2 SIP Settings
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that the subscription remains
valid. This value is set in the "Expires" header of the SUBSCRIBE
request.
Value Range
1–4294967295
Default Value
3600
SUB_RTX_INTVL_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SUB_RTX_INTVL_1, SUB_RTX_INTVL_2, …, SUB_RTX_INTVL_8
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the interval, in seconds, between transmissions of
SUBSCRIBE requests when a subscription results in failure (server no
reply or error reply).
Value Range
10–86400
Default Value
10
REG_RTX_INTVL_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
REG_RTX_INTVL_1, REG_RTX_INTVL_2, …, REG_RTX_INTVL_8
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the interval, in seconds, between transmissions of the
REGISTER request when a registration results in failure (server no
reply or error reply).
Value Range
10–86400
Default Value
10
SIP_P_PREFERRED_ID_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SIP_P_PREFERRED_ID_1, SIP_P_PREFERRED_ID_2, …,
SIP_P_PREFERRED_ID_8
Value Format
Boolean
Description
Specifies whether to add the "P-Preferred-Identity" header to SIP
messages.
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
N
Document Version
2012-03
Y (Add the "P-Preferred-Identity" header)
N (Do not add the "P-Preferred-Identity" header)
Administrator Guide
201
4.7.2 SIP Settings
SIP_PRIVACY_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SIP_PRIVACY_1, SIP_PRIVACY_2, …, SIP_PRIVACY_8
Value Format
Boolean
Description
Specifies whether to add the "Privacy" header to SIP messages.
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
N
Y (Add the "Privacy" header)
N (Do not add the "Privacy" header)
ADD_USER_PHONE_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
ADD_USER_PHONE_1, ADD_USER_PHONE_2, …,
ADD_USER_PHONE_8
Value Format
Boolean
Description
Specifies whether to add "user=phone" to the SIP URI in SIP
messages.
Value Range
•
•
Y (Add "user=phone")
N (Do not add "user=phone")
Note
•
Default Value
SIP URI example:
– "sip:1111@tokyo.example.com;user=phone",
when set to "Y"
– "sip:1111@tokyo.example.com", when set to "N"
N
SDP_USER_ID_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SDP_USER_ID_1, SDP_USER_ID_2, …, SDP_USER_ID_8
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the user ID used in the "o=" line field of SDP.
Value Range
Max. 32 characters (except ", &, ', :, <, >, and space)
Default Value
-
SUB_INTERVAL_RATE_[1–8]
202
Parameter Name Example
SUB_INTERVAL_RATE_1, SUB_INTERVAL_RATE_2, …,
SUB_INTERVAL_RATE_8
Value Format
Integer
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
4.7.2 SIP Settings
Description
Specifies the percentage of the "expires" value after which to refresh
subscriptions by sending a new SUBSCRIBE message in the same
dialog.
Value Range
1–100
Default Value
90
SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_1, SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_2, …,
SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_8
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP outbound proxy server.
Value Range
Max. 127 characters (IP address in dotted-decimal notation or FQDN)
Default Value
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
Outbound Proxy Server Address (Page 90)
SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_1, SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_2, …,
SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_8
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP
outbound proxy server.
Value Range
1–65535
Default Value
5060
Web User Interface Reference
Outbound Proxy Server Port (Page 90)
SIP_TRANSPORT_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SIP_TRANSPORT_1, SIP_TRANSPORT_2, …, SIP_TRANSPORT_8
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies which transport layer protocol to use for sending SIP packets.
Note
•
Document Version
2012-03
Changing this setting may require restarting the unit.
Administrator Guide
203
4.7.2 SIP Settings
Value Range
•
•
0 (UDP)
1 (TCP)
Note
•
All the parameters from "SIP_TRANSPORT_1" to
"SIP_TRANSPORT_8" must have the same value.
Default Value
0
Web User Interface Reference
Transport Protocol (Page 87)
SIP_ANM_DISPNAME_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SIP_ANM_DISPNAME_1, SIP_ANM_DISPNAME_2, …,
SIP_ANM_DISPNAME_8
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the text string to set as the display name in the "From" header
when making anonymous calls.
Value Range
•
•
•
Default Value
1
0 (Use normal display name)
1 (Use "Anonymous" for display name)
2 (Do not send a display name)
SIP_ANM_USERNAME_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SIP_ANM_USERNAME_1, SIP_ANM_USERNAME_2, …,
SIP_ANM_USERNAME_8
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies the text string to set as the user name in the "From" header
when making anonymous calls.
Value Range
•
•
•
Default Value
0
0 (Use normal user name)
1 (Use "anonymous" for user name)
2 (Do not send a user name)
SIP_ANM_HOSTNAME_[1–8]
204
Parameter Name Example
SIP_ANM_HOSTNAME_1, SIP_ANM_HOSTNAME_2, …,
SIP_ANM_HOSTNAME_8
Value Format
Boolean
Description
Specifies whether to set an anonymous host name in the "From" header
when making anonymous calls.
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
4.7.2 SIP Settings
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
N
Y (Use "anonymous.invalid" for host name)
N (Use normal host name)
SIP_DETECT_SSAF_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SIP_DETECT_SSAF_1, SIP_DETECT_SSAF_2, …,
SIP_DETECT_SSAF_8
Value Format
Boolean
Description
Specifies whether to enable SSAF for the SIP servers (registrar server,
proxy server, and presence server).
Value Range
•
•
Y (Enable SSAF)
N (Disable SSAF)
Note
•
If set to "Y", the unit receives SIP messages only from the
source addresses stored in the SIP servers (registrar server,
proxy server, and presence server), and not from other
addresses. However, if "SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_[1–8]" in
4.7.2 SIP Settings is specified, the unit also receives SIP
messages from the source address stored in the SIP outbound
proxy server.
Default Value
N
Web User Interface Reference
Enable SSAF (SIP Source Address Filter) (Page 96)
SIP_RCV_DET_HEADER_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SIP_RCV_DET_HEADER_1, SIP_RCV_DET_HEADER_2, …,
SIP_RCV_DET_HEADER_8
Value Format
Boolean
Description
Specifies whether to check the username part of the SIP URI in the
"To" header when receiving the INVITE message with an incorrect
target SIP URI.
Value Range
•
•
Y (Enable username check)
N (Disable username check)
Note
•
•
Default Value
Document Version
2012-03
If set to "Y", the unit will return an error reply when it receives
the INVITE message with an incorrect target SIP URI.
If set to "N", the unit will not check the username part of the SIP
URI in the "To" header.
N
Administrator Guide
205
4.7.2 SIP Settings
SIP_CONTACT_ON_ACK_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SIP_CONTACT_ON_ACK_1, SIP_CONTACT_ON_ACK_2, …,
SIP_CONTACT_ON_ACK_8
Value Format
Boolean
Description
Specifies whether to add the "Contact" header to SIP ACK message.
Value Range
•
•
Default Value
N
Y (Add the "Contact" header)
N (Do not add the "Contact" header)
PHONE_NUMBER_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
PHONE_NUMBER_1, PHONE_NUMBER_2, …, PHONE_NUMBER_8
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the phone number to use as the user ID required for
registration to the SIP registrar server.
Note
•
Value Range
When you use characters that are not allowed for this setting,
you must specify this setting and then "LINE_ID_[1–8]".
Max. 24 characters (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Note
•
No other characters are allowed.
Default Value
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
Phone Number (Page 88)
LINE_ID_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
LINE_ID_1, LINE_ID_2, …, LINE_ID_8
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the unique ID used by the SIP registrar server.
Note
•
206
When you use characters that are not allowed for
"PHONE_NUMBER_[1–8]", you must specify
"PHONE_NUMBER_[1–8]" and then this setting.
Value Range
Max. 24 characters (except @)
Default Value
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
Line ID (Page 89)
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
4.7.2 SIP Settings
DISPLAY_NAME_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
DISPLAY_NAME_1, DISPLAY_NAME_2, …, DISPLAY_NAME_8
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the name to display as the caller on the other party’s phone
when you make a call.
Value Range
Max. 16 characters
Note
•
You can use Unicode characters for this setting.
Default Value
Empty string
Web User Interface Reference
Display Name (Page 110)
INTERNATIONAL_ACCESS_CODE
Value Format
String
Description
Specifies the number to be shown in the place of the first "+" symbol
when the phone number for incoming international calls contains "+".
Value Range
Max. 8 characters (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Note
•
Default Value
No other characters are allowed.
Empty string ("+" is deleted)
SIP_REQURI_PORT_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SIP_REQURI_PORT_1, SIP_REQURI_PORT_2, …,
SIP_REQURI_PORT_8
Value Format
Boolean
Description
Specifies whether to add the port parameter to Request-Line in the
initial SIP request.
Value Range
•
•
Y (Add the port parameter)
N (Do not add the port parameter)
Note
•
Default Value
Document Version
2012-03
Request-Line (Request-URI of REGISTER) example:
– "Request-Line: REGISTER sip:
192.168.0.10:5060 SIP/2.0", when set to "Y"
– "Request-Line: REGISTER sip:192.168.0.10
SIP/2.0", when set to "N"
Y
Administrator Guide
207
4.7.2 SIP Settings
SIP_ADD_RPORT_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SIP_ADD_RPORT_1, SIP_ADD_RPORT_2, …,
SIP_ADD_RPORT_8
Value Format
Boolean
Description
Specifies whether to add the "rport" parameter to the "Via" header of
SIP messages.
Value Range
•
•
Y (Add the "rport" parameter)
N (Do not add the "rport" parameter)
Note
•
Default Value
"Via" header example:
– "Via: SIP/2.0/UDP
192.168.0.10:5060;branch=abc;rport", when set
to "Y"
– "Via: SIP/2.0/UDP
192.168.0.10:5060;branch=abc", when set to "N"
N
SIP_SESSION_METHOD_[1–8]
Parameter Name Example
SIP_SESSION_METHOD_1, SIP_SESSION_METHOD_2, …,
SIP_SESSION_METHOD_8
Value Format
Integer
Description
Specifies which SIP request method to use for SIP session refresh
requests.
Value Range
•
•
•
Default Value
0
0 (Use the re-INVITE request method)
1 (Use the UPDATE request method)
2 (Use either the UPDATE or re-INVITE request method [UPDATE
takes priority over re-INVITE])
VOICE_MESSAGE_AVAILABLE
Value Format
Boolean
Description
Selects how the existence of voice messages is determined when a
"Messages-Waiting: yes" message is received.
Value Range
•
•
208
Administrator Guide
Y (Determines that voice messages exist when
"Messages-Waiting: yes" is received with a "Voice-Message" line
included.)
N (Determines that voice messages exist when
"Messages-Waiting: yes" is received even without a
"Voice-Message" line included.)
Document Version
2012-03
4.7.2 SIP Settings
Default Value
Document Version
2012-03
Y
Administrator Guide
209
4.7.2 SIP Settings
210
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
Section 5
Useful Telephone Functions
This section explains phone number settings for the
base unit or handsets, dial plan, and phonebook import/
export function.
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
211
5.1.1 Multi Number Settings
5.1 Line Settings for Base Unit and Handset
5.1.1 Multi Number Settings
A unit can be used with a single base unit and 6 handsets.
You can assign a maximum of 8 different phone numbers for the base unit (KX-TGP55x only) and handsets.
Each available phone number (line) can be assigned to the base unit and handsets as desired to handle
incoming and outgoing calls.
Programming Example 1
The following programming example shows a configuration where the base unit and handsets have their own
phone numbers, and the base unit and handsets also share a common phone number.
You can program this table using Web user interface programming (® see 3.7.1.1 Grouping Handset/
Handset selection for receiving calls).
For details about configuring these settings by configuration file programming, see 4.5.1 Multi Number
Settings.
[Grouping Handset/Handset selection for receiving calls]
Line No.
Phone
Number
1
1111
2
2222
3
3333
4
4444
5
5555
6
6666
7
7777
8
8888
Handset No.
Base
1
2
3
4
5
6
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Case 1:
A call dialed to "1111" will be received by handset 1.
Case 2:
A call dialed to "2222" will be received by handset 2.
Case 3:
A call dialed to "8888" will be received by the base unit and handsets 1–6.
212
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
5.2 Phonebook Import and Export
Programming Example 2
The following programming example shows a configuration where handsets 1–3 dial with lines 1–3,
respectively. Each handset uses the line set in [Default] by default.
You can program this table using Web user interface programming (® see 3.7.1.2 Handset and Line No.
selection for making calls).
For details about configuring these settings by configuration file programming, see 4.5.1 Multi Number
Settings.
[Handset and Line No. selection for making calls]
Handset
No.
Line No.
Default
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
ü
ü
ü
1
2
ü
ü
ü
2
3
ü
ü
ü
3
4
5
6
Base
Case 1:
When a user goes off-hook with handset 1, line 1 is seized and dialed by default. Line 2 and line 3 can also
be seized and dialed.
Case 2:
When a user goes off-hook with handset 2, line 2 is seized and dialed by default. Line 1 and line 3 can also
be seized and dialed.
Case 3:
When a user goes off-hook with handset 3, line 3 is seized and dialed by default. Line 1 and line 2 can also
be seized and dialed.
Note
•
You can make a call with one of the phone numbers other than the default phone number. For details
about the operations, refer to the User Guide or Quick Guide on the Panasonic Web site (® see
Introduction).
5.2 Phonebook Import and Export
This section explains how to import and export phonebook data. Phonebook data of the unit includes names
and phone numbers.
Phonebook data on the unit can be exported, edited with editor tools, and imported again. In addition,
phonebook data created with other software can be imported into the unit.
You can use the phonebook import and export functions as follows.
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
213
5.2 Phonebook Import and Export
Editing Phonebook Data on a PC
The phonebook data stored on the unit can be edited using a program such as Microsoft Excel® spreadsheet
software. For details about the operation, see 5.2.2 Editing with Microsoft Excel.
You can export the phonebook data to the PC, edit the exported file using appropriate software, and then import
it into the unit.
A
B
Phonebook
data
D
Microsoft
Excel
C
Importing Address Book Data from a PC
You can import address book data stored in programs, such as Microsoft Outlook® messaging and collaboration
client, into the unit.
First, export address book data from the e-mail software to a program such as Microsoft Excel, edit it as
necessary, and then import the exported data into the unit.
For details about the operation, see 5.2.3 Exporting Data from Microsoft Outlook.
Phonebook
data
Microsoft
Excel
B
C
Microsoft
Outlook
A
Backing up Phonebook Data
You can export the phonebook data from the unit to a PC and keep the file as a backup in case of data loss
or for use when exchanging the base unit or handset.
A
Phonebook
data
B
Importing the Same Phonebook Data to the Base Unit, Handset, or Another Unit
You can export the phonebook data created on a unit to a PC, and then import it into other base units, handsets,
or another unit.
A
Phonebook
data
214
Administrator Guide
B
Document Version
2012-03
5.2 Phonebook Import and Export
You can also import phonebook data created on a PC to other base units, handsets, or another unit.
B
Phonebook
data
Microsoft
Excel
A
Import/Export File Format
The file format used for importing and exporting the phonebook data is "TSV". When importing or exporting
using Microsoft Excel, "CSV (Comma-separated Value)" is generally used as the file format.
A phonebook entry in the unit has only 2 fields: one for the name and one for the phone number. An entry in
the phonebook data is represented in text as "name <TAB> phone number <line break>". Any data after the
phone number is ignored.
The text data can be edited using any text editing software that supports UTF-16 encoding with a BOM and
little endian byte ordering. When you save the text file, it must be saved using the same format, or the text
might become garbled.
Phonebook Data in Text Format
A
B
C
Aaron MacDowel
01234001
Barbara Nicolls
01234002
Carl O’Brien
01234003
Dorothy Parker
01234004
····
····
····
····
A Name
B Tab
C Phone number
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
215
5.2.1 Import/Export Operation
Phonebook Data in Binary Format
A
B
C D
A BOM
B Space between the first name and last name
C Tab
D Line feed
5.2.1 Import/Export Operation
The following procedures explain how to import phonebook data to units, and how to export phonebook data
from units to a PC through the Web user interface.
For details about the settings, see 3.7.5 Import Phonebook or 3.7.6 Export Phonebook.
To import phonebook data
1. Click the [Telephone] tab, and then click [Import Phonebook].
2. In [Import Phonebook], select the base unit (KX-TGP55x only) or the handset that you want to import
data into.
3. In [File Name], enter the full path to the file that you want to import, or click Browse to select the phonebook
data file that you want to import.
4. Click [Import].
To export the phonebook data
1. Click the [Telephone] tab, and then click [Export Phonebook].
2. In [Export Phonebook], select the base unit (KX-TGP55x only) or the handset that you want to export
data from.
3. Click [Export].
4. On the "Now Processing File Data" screen, click the text "HERE" in the displayed message, or wait until
File Download window appears.
Note
•
Depending on the security settings of your Web browser, pop-up menus might be blocked. If the
file cannot be exported successfully, try the export operation again or change the security settings
of your Web browser.
5. Click Save on File Download window.
6. On the Save As window, select a folder to save the exported phonebook data to, enter the file name in
File name, select TSV File for Save as type, and click Save.
If the file is downloaded successfully, the Download complete window appears.
7. Click Close.
8. To exit the operation, click the text "HERE" in the displayed message.
The [Export Phonebook] screen returns.
216
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
5.2.2 Editing with Microsoft Excel
Note
•
•
•
•
Make sure that the import source or target unit (base unit or handset) is in standby mode.
The import source or target unit (base unit or handset) must be specified at the time of import/export.
The imported data is added to the existing phonebook data.
– If the existing phonebook data has an entry with the same name as the imported entry but the
phone number is different, the imported entry is added as a new entry.
– If the existing phonebook data has an entry with the same name and phone number as an imported
entry, the entry is not added.
The phonebook for a unit has the following limitations:
– A maximum of 100 phonebook entries can be stored in the base unit (KX-TGP55x only) and each
of the handsets. If the base unit or handset already has phonebook data, it accepts up to the 100th
entry, including the existing entries. The rest of the entries will not be imported, and the message
"Memory Full" is displayed on the unit.
– The name can contain up to 16 characters.
– The phone number can contain up to 32 digits.
– Phonebook entries exceeding the characters or digits limits cannot be imported properly.
If the export is interrupted by an operation on the base unit (KX-TGP55x only) or handset, only the data
that has been successfully exported before the interruption is exported to a file.
5.2.2 Editing with Microsoft Excel
You can edit exported phonebook data on a PC with software such as Microsoft Excel. You can then import
the phonebook data into units.
To open the phonebook data on a PC
1. Open Microsoft Excel.
2. Click Office Button, and then Open.
Note
•
Make sure to open a TSV file in this procedure. If you change the extension of a TSV file to
".csv", the file will open by simply double-clicking it. However, the character encoding of the file
might not be recognized properly, resulting in garbled characters, or the phone numbers might be
recognized as numbers, resulting in data alteration.
3. Select All Files for the file type, select the exported phonebook data file, and click Open.
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
217
5.2.2 Editing with Microsoft Excel
4. On the Text Import Wizard - Step 1 of 3 window, click Next.
Note
•
Regardless of what is selected for File origin, the file will be processed normally if the format is
appropriate.
5. On the Text Import Wizard - Step 2 of 3 window, select Tab for Delimiters, and then click Next.
6. On the Text Import Wizard - Step 3 of 3 window, select all columns in Data preview, select Text in
Column data format, and then click Finish.
The TSV file will be opened.
Note
•
218
Phone numbers must be treated as text strings. Otherwise, a "0" at the beginning of a phone
number might disappear when exported.
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
5.3 Dial Plan
To save the phonebook data for importing to the unit
1. After editing the phonebook entries, click Office Button, and then Save As.
2. Enter a file name in File name, and select Unicode Text in Save as type.
The file will be saved in UTF-16 little endian with a BOM. Fields will be separated by tabs.
3. Click Save.
A message warning you about file compatibility will be displayed.
4. Click Yes.
The file will be saved as a Unicode text file, with the fields separated by tabs.
Note
•
The procedure may vary depending on the software version of Microsoft Excel. Therefore, files
exported and imported between the unit and Microsoft Excel are not always compatible with each other.
5.2.3 Exporting Data from Microsoft Outlook
You can export address book data stored in programs such as Microsoft Outlook, and then edit the exported
data with a program such as Microsoft Excel in order to import it to the unit.
To export the Microsoft Outlook address book data
1. In Microsoft Outlook, click File, and then click Import and Export.
2. Select Export to a file, and click Next.
3. Select Tab Separated Values (Windows), and click Next.
4. Select Contacts, and click Next.
5. Click Browse, select a folder, and then enter the file name to export the data to.
6. Click OK.
7. On the Export to a File window, click Next.
8. Click Map Custom Fields.
9. Clear all items in the To list by clicking Clear Map. Then, drag only Last Name and Business Phone from
the From list to the To list, and click OK.
10. On the Export to a File window, click Finish.
The data will be exported.
Note
•
•
•
•
You can export data from Microsoft Outlook Express by using a similar procedure. It is also possible
to export data from other applications that are compatible with Microsoft Excel.
You can open the exported file in Microsoft Excel, and then import it to the unit. For details, see
5.2.2 Editing with Microsoft Excel.
First and middle names are not exported using this procedure. You can export all necessary items and
edit the entry before importing them to the unit.
In the file exported from Microsoft Outlook, fields are separated by tabs and encoded using the default
character encoding for your operating system.
5.3 Dial Plan
The dial plan settings control how numbers dialed by the user are transmitted over the network. Dial plan
settings can be configured on a per-line basis. These settings can be programmed either through the Web
user interface (® see 3.7.3.2 Dial Plan) or by configuration file programming (® see 4.7.1 Call Control
Settings).
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
219
5.3.1 Dial Plan Settings
[Dial Plan Flowchart]
When a user dials a single digit on a unit, the following sequence of events begins.
A user dials a single digit on the unit.
A
The unit stores the dialed digits.
The unit compares the dialed digits with each dial plan.
No
Do the dialed digits fully or
partially match in the dial plan?
No Match
Yes
Complete Match
Does the dial
plan contain "!"
for number
barring?
Yes
No
Does the dial plan
contain "." for element
repetition?
Yes
No
Does the dialed number of
digits exceed the number
of digits up to 2 characters
before "." in the dial plan?
The call is denied.
No
No
B
Yes
Yes
Does the user
press the # key?
Has [Call Even If
Dial Plan Does Not
Match] been set to
[Yes]?
Yes
The call is initiated.
Does the user
press the # key?
B
The call is denied.
The call is denied.
Does the user
press the # key?
The call is initiated.
No
No
Yes
No
To
Has [Call Even If
Dial Plan Does
Not Match] been
set to [Yes]?
Partial Match
The inter-digit timer starts.
Yes
The call is initiated.
No
Does the user dial
the subsequent digit
before the inter-digit timer
expires?
The inter-digit timer starts.
Yes
Yes
Yes
The call is initiated.
No
Does the user dial
the subsequent digit
before the inter-digit
timer expires?
Yes
To
A
No
To
Has [Call Even If
Dial Plan Does Not
Match] been set to
[Yes]?
No
The call is initiated.
The call is denied.
5.3.1 Dial Plan Settings
To set Dial Plan
1. In the Web user interface, click the [Telephone] tab, and then click [Call Control [Line 1]–[Line 8]].
2. In [Dial Plan], enter the desired dial format.
The dial plan settings can be configured for each line separately.
220
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
A
5.3.1 Dial Plan Settings
For details about available characters for the dial format, see Available Values for the Dial Plan Field in
this section.
3. Select [Yes] or [No] for [Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match].
• If you select [Yes], the call will be made even if the user dials a phone number that does not match
the dial format in [Dial Plan].
• If you select [No], the call will be made only if the user dials a phone number that matches the dial
format in [Dial Plan].
Note
•
For details about configuring these settings by configuration file programming, see "DIAL_PLAN_[1–
8]" and "DIAL_PLAN_NOT_MATCH_ENABLE_[1–8]" in 4.7.1 Call Control Settings.
Available Values for the Dial Plan Field
The following table explains which characters you can use in the dial format, and what the characters mean.
Available Value
Description
String
0–9, [, -, ], <, :, >, *, #, !,
S, s, X, x, ., |
You can enter dial plan descriptions using a combination of
the characters listed as available values.
Digit
0–9, *, #
Example: "123"
If the dialed phone number is "123", the call is made
immediately.
Wildcard
X, x
Example: "12xxxxx"
If the dialed phone number is "12" followed by any 5-digit
number, the call is made immediately.
Range
[]
Example: "[123]"
If the dialed phone number is either one of "1", "2", or "3", the
call is made immediately.
Subrange
-
Example: "[1-5]"
If the dialed phone number is "1", "2", "3", "4", or "5", the call
is made immediately.
• A subrange is only valid for single-digit numbers. For
example, "[4-9]" is valid, but "[12-21]" is invalid.
Repeat
.
Example: "1."
If the dialed phone number is "1" followed by zero or more
"1"s (e.g., "11", "111"), the call is made.
Substitution
<(before):(after)>
Example: "<101:9999>"
If the dialed phone number is "101", "101" is replaced by
"9999", and then the call is made immediately.
Timer
S, s (second)
Example: "1x.S2"
If the dialed phone number begins with "1", the call is made
after a lapse of 2 seconds.
• The number (0–9) followed by "S" or "s" shows the
duration in seconds until the call is made.
Reject
!
Example: "123xxx!"
If the dialed phone number is "123" followed by 3 digits, the
call is not made.
Element
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
221
5.3.1 Dial Plan Settings
Element
Alternation
Available Value
|
Description
Example: "1xxxx|2xxx"
If the dialed phone number is "1" followed by 4 digits, or "2"
followed by 3 digits, the call is made immediately.
You can use this element to specify multiple numbers.
Note
•
•
•
•
You can enter up to 500 characters in [Dial Plan].
You can assign up to 20 dial plans separated by "|" in [Dial Plan].
You can assign up to 32 digits per dial plan in [Dial Plan].
After the user completes dialing, the unit immediately sends all the dialed digits if [Call Even If Dial
Plan Does Not Match] is set to [Yes] in the Web user interface or if
"DIAL_PLAN_NOT_MATCH_ENABLE_[1-8]" is set to "N" in a configuration file. The unit recognizes
the end of dialing as follows:
– The inter-digit timer expires (® see [Inter-digit Timeout] in 3.7.2.1 Call Control in the Web user
interface or "INTDIGIT_TIM" in 4.5.2 Call Control Settings in the configuration file).
– The user presses the # key.
– The call is initiated after going off-hook (pre-dial).
Dial Plan Example
The following example shows dial plans containing character sequences separated by "|".
Example: "[2346789]11|01[2-9]xx.|[2-9]xxxxxxxxx"
Complete Match:
Example: "[2346789]11|01[2-9]xx.|[2-9]xxxxxxxxx"
• If the dialed phone number is "211", "911" and so on, the call is made immediately.
Example: "[2346789]11|01[2-9]xx.|[2-9]xxxxxxxxx"
If the dialed phone number is "2123456789", "5987654321" and so on, the call is made immediately.
•
Partial Match (when the dial plan contains "."):
Example: "[2346789]11|01[2-9]xx.|[2-9]xxxxxxxxx"
If the dialed phone number is "01254", "012556" and so on, the call is made after the inter-digit timer expires.
If the dialed phone number is "01254#", "012556#" and so on, the call is made immediately.
•
•
Partial Match (when the dial plan does not contain "."):
Example: "[2346789]11|01[2-9]xx.|[2-9]xxxxxxxxx"
• If the dialed phone number is "21", "91" and so on when [Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match] is set
to [Yes], the call is made after the inter-digit timer expires.
• If the dialed phone number is "21#", "91#" and so on when [Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match] is
set to [Yes], the call is made immediately.
• If the dialed phone number is "21", "91" and so on when [Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match] is set
to [No], the call is denied after the inter-digit timer expires.
• If the dialed phone number is "21#", "91#" and so on when [Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match] is
set to [No], the call is denied.
Example: "[2346789]11|01[2-9]xx.|[2-9]xxxxxxxxx"
If the dialed phone number is "21234567", "598765432" and so on when [Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not
Match] is set to [Yes], the call is made after the inter-digit timer expires.
•
222
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
5.3.1 Dial Plan Settings
•
•
•
If the dialed phone number is "21234567#", "598765432#" and so on when [Call Even If Dial Plan Does
Not Match] is set to [Yes], the call is made immediately.
If the dialed phone number is "21234567", "598765432" and so on when [Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not
Match] is set to [No], the call is denied after the inter-digit timer expires.
If the dialed phone number is "21234567#", "598765432#" and so on when [Call Even If Dial Plan Does
Not Match] is set to [No], the call is denied.
No Match:
Example: "[2346789]11|01[2-9]xx.|[2-9]xxxxxxxxx"
• If the dialed phone number is "0011", "1011" and so on when [Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match] is
set to [Yes], the call is made after the inter-digit timer expires.
• If the dialed phone number is "0011#", "1011#" and so on when [Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not
Match] is set to [Yes], the call is made immediately.
• If the dialed phone number is "0011", "1011" and so on when [Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match] is
set to [No], the call is denied.
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
223
5.3.1 Dial Plan Settings
224
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
Section 6
Firmware Update
This section explains how to update the firmware of the
unit.
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
225
6.2 Firmware Update Settings
6.1 Firmware Server Setup
No special server is necessary for the firmware update. You can use an HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, or TFTP server
as the firmware server by simply setting its URL.
6.2 Firmware Update Settings
Firmware updates are provided by the manufacturer when necessary.
The firmware update will be executed by setting the corresponding parameters using configuration file
programming (® see 4.3.4 Firmware Update Settings) or Web user interface programming (® see
3.8.1 Firmware Maintenance). The following shows the parameters and the setting procedures:
Firmware Update Enable/Disable
• In a configuration file, add the line, FIRM_UPGRADE_ENABLE="Y".
• In the Web user interface, click the [Maintenance] tab, click [Firmware Maintenance], and then select
[Yes] for [Enable Firmware Update].
Firmware Version Number for Europe Model
• In a configuration file, specify the new version number of the Europe model in "FIRM_VER_EUDECT".
Firmware Version Number for North America Model
• In a configuration file, specify the new version number of the North America model in
"FIRM_VER_USDECT".
Automatic Update
• In a configuration file, add the line, FIRM_UPGRADE_AUTO="Y".
• In the Web user interface, click the [Maintenance] tab, click [Firmware Maintenance], and then select
[Automatic] for [Update Type].
Firmware Server URL
• In a configuration file, specify the URL in "FIRM_FILE_PATH".
• In the Web user interface, click the [Maintenance] tab, click [Firmware Maintenance], and then enter the
URL in [Firmware File URL].
Configuration Parameter Example
By setting the parameters as shown in the following example, the unit will automatically download the firmware
file from the specified URL, "http://firm.example.com/firm/EUDECT01.05.fw", and perform the update operation
if the currently used firmware version is older than 01.05.
Example
FIRM_UPGRADE_ENABLE="Y"
FIRM_VER_EUDECT="01.05"
# FIRM_VER_USDECT # not needed for EU-DECT phone
FIRM_UPGRADE_AUTO="Y"
FIRM_FILE_PATH="http://firm.example.com/firm/EUDECT01.05.fw"
226
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
6.4 Local Firmware Update
6.3 Executing Firmware Update
After configuring the firmware update settings in the configuration file, the firmware will be updated when the
configuration file is downloaded.
The firmware update will be performed only when a newer version of the firmware file (i.e., one that has a larger
version number) than the firmware currently used is specified in the downloaded configuration file.
If the firmware update settings are properly configured in the configuration file, the firmware update will be
executed when the unit is restarted. You can restart the unit to execute firmware update immediately.
For details about downloading configuration files, see 1.1.6.4 Downloading Configuration Files.
6.4 Local Firmware Update
When an updated version of the firmware is provided on a Web site or other means, you can perform the
firmware update manually using Web user interface programming.
For details about the local firmware update, see 3.8.2 Local Firmware Update.
To manually update the firmware
1. In the Web user interface, click the [Maintenance] tab, and then click [Local Firmware Update].
2. Click Browse, select the folder where the firmware file is stored, and specify the firmware file on your PC.
3. Click [Update Firmware].
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
227
6.4 Local Firmware Update
228
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
Section 7
Troubleshooting
This section provides information about
troubleshooting.
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
229
7.1 Troubleshooting
7.1 Troubleshooting
If you still have difficulties after following the instructions in this section, disconnect the base unit’s AC adaptor,
then reconnect the base unit’s AC adaptor. Remove the batteries from the handset, and then insert the batteries
into the handset again.
General Use
Cause/Solution
Problem
I cannot hear a dial tone.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
230
Administrator Guide
Confirm that the Ethernet cable is properly connected. For
details, refer to the Quick Guide on the Panasonic Web site
(® see Introduction).
Network settings may not be correct.
Many installation issues can be resolved by resetting all
the equipment. First, shut down your modem, router, hub,
base unit, and PC. Then turn the devices back on, one at
a time, in this order: modem, router, hub, base unit, PC.
If you cannot access Internet Web pages using your PC,
check to see if your phone system is having connection
issues in your area.
Check the VoIP status in the Web user interface and
confirm that each line is registered properly (® see To
check the setting status in the Web user interface in
this section).
Check that the SIP server address, URLs of the
configuration files, encryption key, and other required
settings are correct.
Check the firewall and port forwarding settings on the
router (® see 1.1.10 Other Network Settings).
For details about the settings, consult your network
administrator or phone system dealer.
Document Version
2012-03
7.1 Troubleshooting
STATUS Indicator (in cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in English alphabet) or
Indicator (in cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in symbols/pictures)
Problem
The STATUS indicator or
indicator
continues flashing in amber.
Cause/Solution
•
An IP address may not have been acquired or the static IP
address is not appropriate. Check the unit’s IP address:
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in
English alphabet
Base unit (KX-TGP55x only):
[MENU] (middle soft key) ® [#][5][0][1]
Handset:
[MENU] (center of joystick) ® [#][5][0][1]
•
•
•
•
•
•
indicator
The STATUS indicator or
flashes in amber rapidly although the IP
address was acquired.
Document Version
2012-03
•
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in
symbols/pictures
Base unit (KX-TGP55x only):
(middle soft key) ® [#][5][0][1]
Handset:
(center of joystick) ® [#][5][0][1]
It is recommended to perform the following.
– If necessary, change the unit’s static IP address.
– If an IP address was not acquired, check your network
devices’ (router, modem, etc.) connections. If the
connections are made properly but the problem
persists, check your network devices’ (router, modem,
etc.) settings.
Many installation issues can be resolved by resetting all
the equipment. First, shut down your modem, router, hub,
base unit, and PC. Then turn the devices back on, one at
a time, in this order: modem, router, hub, base unit, PC.
If you cannot access Internet Web pages using your PC,
check to see if your phone system is having connection
issues in your area.
Check the VoIP status in the Web user interface and
confirm that each line is registered properly (® see To
check the setting status in the Web user interface in
this section).
Even when one line fails to register, the indicator will flash
in amber.
Check that the SIP server address, URLs of the
configuration files, encryption key, and other required
settings are correct.
Check the firewall and port forwarding settings on the
router (® see 1.1.10 Other Network Settings).
For details about settings, consult your network
administrator or phone system dealer.
Unplug the unit’s AC adaptor to reset the unit, then
reconnect the AC adaptor. If the STATUS indicator or
indicator is still flashing in amber rapidly, there may be
a problem with the base unit hardware. Contact your phone
system dealer.
Administrator Guide
231
7.1 Troubleshooting
Problem
The STATUS indicator or
indicator
lights in amber although the Ethernet cable
is connected properly.
Cause/Solution
•
The unit’s IP address may conflict with the IP addresses of
other devices on your local network. Check the unit’s static
IP address:
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in
English alphabet
Base unit (KX-TGP55x only):
[MENU] (middle soft key) ® [#][5][0][1]
Handset:
[MENU] (center of joystick) ® [#][5][0][1]
In cases when buttons/soft key icons are shown in
symbols/pictures
Base unit (KX-TGP55x only):
(middle soft key) ® [#][5][0][1]
Handset:
(center of joystick) ® [#][5][0][1]
Then check the IP addresses of the other devices on your
local network. If necessary, change the unit’s static IP
address.
232
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
7.1 Troubleshooting
Making/Answering Calls, Intercom
Problem
The handset does not ring.
Cause/Solution
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Document Version
2012-03
The ringer volume is turned off. Adjust the ringer volume.
For details about the operations, refer to the User Guide
on the Panasonic Web site (® see Introduction).
Check the VoIP status in the Web user interface and
confirm that each line is registered properly (® see To
check the setting status in the Web user interface in
this section).
Check that the SIP server address, URLs of the
configuration files, encryption key, and other required
settings are correct.
Check the firewall and port forwarding settings on the
router (® see 1.1.10 Other Network Settings).
Check [Multi Number Settings] in the [Telephone] tab in
the Web user interface (® see 3.7.1 Multi Number
Settings).
Check [Call Control] for each line in the [Telephone] tab
in the Web user interface.
– If [Do Not Disturb] is set to [Yes], the base unit or
handset does not receive calls (® see 3.7.3.3 Call
Features).
– If [Unconditional (Enable Call Forward)] is set to
[Yes], the base unit or handset does not receive calls
(® see 3.7.3.4 Call Forward).
– If [Block Anonymous Call] is set to [Yes], the base
unit or handset does not receive anonymous calls (®
see 3.7.3.3 Call Features).
Check that [Do Not Disturb], [Enable Call Forward], and
[Block Anonymous Call] are not controlled by your phone
system.
If 3 calls are being handled by the base unit and/or
handsets simultaneously, a new call cannot be received
and the unit will not ring.
For details about settings, consult your network
administrator or phone system dealer.
Administrator Guide
233
7.1 Troubleshooting
Problem
The base unit (KX-TGP55x only) does not
ring.
Cause/Solution
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
234
Administrator Guide
The ringer volume is turned off. Adjust the ringer volume.
For details about the operations, refer to the User Guide
on the Panasonic Web site (® see Introduction).
Check the VoIP status in the Web user interface and
confirm that each line is registered properly (® see To
check the setting status in the Web user interface in
this section).
Check that the SIP server address, URLs of the
configuration files, encryption key, and other required
settings are correct.
Check the firewall and port forwarding settings on the
router (® see 1.1.10 Other Network Settings).
Check [Multi Number Settings] in the [Telephone] tab in
the Web user interface (® see 3.7.1 Multi Number
Settings).
Check [Call Control] for each line in the [Telephone] tab
in the Web user interface.
– If [Do Not Disturb] is set to [Yes], the base unit or
handset does not receive calls (® see 3.7.3.3 Call
Features).
– If [Unconditional (Enable Call Forward)] is set to
[Yes], the base unit or handset does not receive calls
(® see 3.7.3.4 Call Forward).
– If [Block Anonymous Call] is set to [Yes], the base
unit or handset does not receive anonymous calls (®
see 3.7.3.3 Call Features).
Check that [Do Not Disturb], [Enable Call Forward], and
[Block Anonymous Call] are not controlled by your phone
system.
If 3 calls are being handled by the base unit and/or
handsets simultaneously, a new call cannot be received
and the unit will not ring.
For details about settings, consult your network
administrator or phone system dealer.
Document Version
2012-03
7.1 Troubleshooting
Problem
I cannot make a call.
Cause/Solution
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Check if the STATUS indicator or
indicator is lit in
green. If it is not lit in green, refer to the User Guide on the
Panasonic Web site (® see Introduction).
You cannot make a call while the base unit is downloading
the firmware update. Wait until the STATUS indicator or
indicator stops flashing and changes to steady green.
The handset is too far from the base unit. Move closer and
try again.
Check the VoIP status in the Web user interface and
confirm that each line is registered properly (® see To
check the setting status in the Web user interface in
this section).
Check that the SIP server address, URLs of the
configuration files, encryption key, and other required
settings are correct.
Check the firewall and port forwarding settings on the
router (® see 1.1.10 Other Network Settings).
Check [Multi Number Settings] in the [Telephone] tab in
the Web user interface (® see 3.7.1 Multi Number
Settings).
If 3 calls are being handled by the base unit and/or
handsets simultaneously, a new call cannot be made from
the unit.
For details about settings, consult your network
administrator or phone system dealer.
Password for Web User Interface Programming
Cause/Solution
Problem
I have lost the login password of the Web
user interface for the Administrator or User
account.
Document Version
2012-03
•
Reset the password from the base unit or one of the
handsets. The passwords for both Administrator and User
will be reset (® see 2.1.6 Reset Web ID/Password).
For security reasons, it is recommended that the
passwords are set again immediately (® see
3.5.2 Administrator Password or 3.5.3 Change User
Password).
Administrator Guide
235
7.1 Troubleshooting
Time
Problem
The time is not correct.
Cause/Solution
•
•
•
Adjust the date and time of the unit. For details about the
operations, refer to the User Guide on the Panasonic Web
site (® see Introduction).
In the Web user interface, you can set NTP
synchronization and DST (Summer Time) control to adjust
the time automatically (® see 3.5.5 Time Adjust
Settings).
If the time is still incorrect even after setting NTP
synchronization, check the firewall and port forwarding
settings on the router (® see 1.1.10 Other Network
Settings).
Checking the Status of the Unit
You can check the status of the unit by using Web user interface programming (® see 3.3.2 Network
Status and 3.3.3 VoIP Status) or by looking at system logs (® see 4.3.3 Syslog Settings) sent from the
unit.
To check the setting status in the Web user interface
1. Click the [Status] tab, and then click [Network Status] to check the network settings.
2. Check the status displayed.
3. Click [VoIP Status] to check the VoIP settings.
4. Check the status displayed.
To send the system logs of specified events to the syslog server
1. Set the following parameters to specify your PC (Windows, Linux® operating system, etc.) as the syslog
server:
– SYSLOG_ADDR: Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the syslog server.
– SYSLOG_PORT: Specifies the port number of the syslog server.
2. Set the following parameters to log specific events:
– SYSLOG_EVENT_SIP*1: Logs SIP-related syslog events.
– SYSLOG_EVENT_CFG*1: Logs syslog events regarding configuration.
– SYSLOG_EVENT_VOIP*1: Logs syslog events regarding VoIP operation.
– SYSLOG_EVENT_TEL*1: Logs syslog events regarding telephone functions.
*1
236
In this version of the unit, this system log will not be sent.
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
Section 8
Configuration File Examples
This section provides examples of the configuration
files.
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
237
8.1 Simplified Example of the Configuration File
8.1 Simplified Example of the Configuration File
The following listing shows an example of a simple configuration file.
For the programming instructions and allowable characters, see 4.2 General Information on the
Configuration Files.
Simplified Example
# PCC Standard Format File # DO NOT CHANGE THIS LINE!
# This is a simplified sample configuration file.
############################################################
# Configuration Setting #
############################################################
# URL of this configuration file
CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH="http://config.example.com/0123456789AB.cfg"
############################################################
# SIP Settings #
# Suffix "_1" indicates this parameter is for "line 1". #
############################################################
# IP Address or FQDN of SIP registrar server, proxy server
SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_1="registrar.example.com"
SIP_PRXY_ADDR_1="proxy.example.com"
# IP Address or FQDN of SIP presence server
SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_1="presenceserver.example.com"
# Enables DNS SRV lookup
SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_1="Y"
# ID, password for SIP authentication
SIP_AUTHID_1="SIP_User"
SIP_PASS_1="SIP_Password"
# Some Timer Settings #
# Expiration time of SIP registration; "1 hour"
REG_EXPIRE_TIME_1="3600"
# Disables SIP Session Timer (RFC 4028)
SIP_SESSION_TIME_1="0"
# SIP phone number
PHONE_NUMBER_1="1234567890"
# Caller ID passed to opposite party
DISPLAY_NAME_1="1234567890"
############################################################
# VoIP Setting #
############################################################
# DTMF will be sent through SDP, according to RFC 2833
238
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
8.2 Comprehensive Example of the Configuration File
OUTBANDDTMF_1="Y"
############################################################
# Call Control Settings #
############################################################
# Enables subscription to the Voice Mail server
VM_SUBSCRIBE_ENABLE="Y"
# Shared Call Settings
SHARED_CALL_ENABLE_1="Y"
SHARED_USER_ID_1="1234567890a"
# Disables Do Not Disturb, Call Forward synchronization.
SYNCHRONIZATION_ENABLE_1="N"
8.2 Comprehensive Example of the Configuration
File
The following listing shows an example of a comprehensive configuration file. In this example, settings with
the same values as the default settings are also shown. If the setting already has the desired value, changing
or specifying a value is unnecessary, and the setting can be omitted.
Comprehensive Example
# PCC Standard Format File # DO NOT CHANGE THIS LINE!
############################################################
# This is a sample configuration file. #
# Most of the parameters below are just default values... #
############################################################
############################################################
# System Settings #
############################################################
## Login Account Settings
ADMIN_ID="Jones"
ADMIN_PASS="HCeDUg4GqqDF9Jpl"
USER_ID="Smith"
USER_PASS="lhQ8B5hqoHgOlaAu"
## System Time Settings
TIME_ZONE="-300"
DST_ENABLE="Y"
DST_OFFSET="60"
DST_START_MONTH="3"
DST_START_ORDINAL_DAY="2"
DST_START_DAY_OF_WEEK="0"
DST_START_TIME="120"
DST_STOP_MONTH="11"
DST_STOP_ORDINAL_DAY="1"
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
239
8.2 Comprehensive Example of the Configuration File
DST_STOP_DAY_OF_WEEK="0"
DST_STOP_TIME="120"
## Syslog Settings
SYSLOG_EVENT_SIP="0"
SYSLOG_EVENT_CFG="0"
SYSLOG_EVENT_VOIP="0"
SYSLOG_EVENT_TEL="0"
SYSLOG_ADDR="logserver.example.com"
SYSLOG_PORT="514"
SYSLOG_RTPSMLY_INTVL_1="20"
## Firmware Update Settings
FIRM_UPGRADE_ENABLE="Y"
# FIRM_VER_EUDECT # not needed for US-DECT phone
FIRM_VER_USDECT="01.01"
FIRM_UPGRADE_AUTO="Y"
FIRM_FILE_PATH="http://firmserver.example.com/{MODEL}.fw"
## Provisioning Settings
OPTION66_ENABLE="Y"
OPTION66_REBOOT="N"
PROVISION_ENABLE="Y"
CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH="http://provisioning.example.com/Config{mac}.cfg"
CFG_PRODUCT_FILE_PATH=""
CFG_MASTER_FILE_PATH="http://provisioning.example.com/ConfigCommon.cfg"
# CFG_FILE_KEY1="" # Not to overwrite factory default key
CFG_FILE_KEY2=""
CFG_FILE_KEY3=""
CFG_FILE_KEY_LENGTH="128"
CFG_CYCLIC="N"
CFG_CYCLIC_INTVL="10080"
CFG_RTRY_INTVL="30"
CFG_RESYNC_TIME=""
CFG_RESYNC_FROM_SIP="check-sync"
############################################################
# Network Settings #
############################################################
## IP Settings
CONNECTION_TYPE="1"
HOST_NAME="TGP550"
DHCP_DNS_ENABLE="N"
STATIC_IP_ADDRESS=""
STATIC_SUBNET=""
STATIC_GATEWAY=""
USER_DNS1_ADDR=""
USER_DNS2_ADDR=""
## DNS Settings
DNS_QRY_PRLL="Y"
DNS_PRIORITY="N"
DNS1_ADDR=""
DNS2_ADDR=""
240
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
8.2 Comprehensive Example of the Configuration File
## Ethernet Port Settings
VLAN_ENABLE="N"
VLAN_ID_IP_PHONE="2"
VLAN_PRI_IP_PHONE="7"
VLAN_ID_PC="1"
VLAN_PRI_PC="0"
## HTTP Settings
HTTPD_PORTOPEN_AUTO="N"
HTTP_VER="1"
HTTP_USER_AGENT="Panasonic_{MODEL}/{fwver} ({mac})"
HTTP_SSL_VERIFY="0"
CFG_ROOT_CERTIFICATE_PATH=""
## Time Adjust Settings
NTP_ADDR="ntp.example.com"
TIME_SYNC_INTVL="60"
TIME_QUERY_INTVL="43200"
## STUN Settings
STUN_SERV_ADDR="stun.example.com"
STUN_SERV_PORT="3478"
STUN_2NDSERV_ADDR=""
STUN_2NDSERV_PORT="3478"
## Miscellaneous Network Settings
NW_SETTING_ENABLE="Y"
CUSTOM_WEB_PAGE="0"
############################################################
# Telephone Settings #
############################################################
## Multi Number Settings
INCOMING_CALL_GROUP_1="1,1,1,1,1,1,1"
OUTGOING_CALL_LINE_HS1="1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1"
OUTGOING_CALL_LINE_HS2="1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1"
OUTGOING_CALL_LINE_HS3="1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1"
OUTGOING_CALL_LINE_HS4="1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1"
OUTGOING_CALL_LINE_HS5="1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1"
OUTGOING_CALL_LINE_HS6="1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1"
OUTGOING_CALL_LINE_BS="1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1"
DEFAULT_LINE_SELECT_HS1="1,0,0,0,0,0,0,0"
DEFAULT_LINE_SELECT_HS2="1,0,0,0,0,0,0,0"
DEFAULT_LINE_SELECT_HS3="1,0,0,0,0,0,0,0"
DEFAULT_LINE_SELECT_HS4="1,0,0,0,0,0,0,0"
DEFAULT_LINE_SELECT_HS5="1,0,0,0,0,0,0,0"
DEFAULT_LINE_SELECT_HS6="1,0,0,0,0,0,0,0"
DEFAULT_LINE_SELECT_BS="1,0,0,0,0,0,0,0"
## Call Control Settings
CONFERENCE_SERVER_ADDRESS="conference@example.com"
EMERGENCY_CALL1="911"
EMERGENCY_CALL2=""
EMERGENCY_CALL3=""
EMERGENCY_CALL4=""
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
241
8.2 Comprehensive Example of the Configuration File
EMERGENCY_CALL5=""
FIRSTDIGIT_TIM="30"
INTDIGIT_TIM="5"
VM_SUBSCRIBE_ENABLE="Y"
## Tone Settings
DIAL_TONE_FRQ="350,440"
DIAL_TONE_TIMING="0,0,0,0"
BUSY_TONE_FRQ="480,620"
BUSY_TONE_TIMING="500,500,500,500"
RINGING_TONE_FRQ="440,480"
RINGING_TONE_TIMING="2000,4000,2000,4000"
STT_TONE_FRQ="350,440"
STT_TONE_TIMING="100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,100,
100,100,100,100,100,0,0"
REORDER_TONE_FRQ="480,620"
REORDER_TONE_TIMING="250,250,250,250,250,250,250,250"
HOWLER_TONE_FRQ="1400,2060"
HOWLER_TONE_TIMING="100,100,100,100"
HOWLER_START_TIME="30"
BELL_CORE_PATTERN1_TIMING="2000,4000"
BELL_CORE_PATTERN2_TIMING="800,400,800,4000"
BELL_CORE_PATTERN3_TIMING="400,200,400,200,800,4000"
BELL_CORE_PATTERN4_TIMING="300,200,1000,200,300,4000"
BELL_CORE_PATTERN5_TIMING="500"
############################################################
# VoIP Settings #
############################################################
## Codec Settings
SDP_CODEC0_1="G722"
SDP_CODEC1_1="PCMA"
SDP_CODEC2_1="G726-32"
SDP_CODEC3_1="G729A"
SDP_CODEC4_1="PCMU"
SDP_CKRTE0_1="8000"
SDP_CKRTE1_1="8000"
SDP_CKRTE2_1="8000"
SDP_CKRTE3_1="8000"
SDP_CKRTE4_1="8000"
SDP_PARAM0_1="0"
SDP_PARAM1_1="0"
SDP_PARAM2_1="0"
SDP_PARAM3_1="0"
SDP_PARAM4_1="0"
SDP_PTYPE0_1="9"
SDP_PTYPE1_1="8"
SDP_PTYPE2_1="2"
SDP_PTYPE3_1="18"
SDP_PTYPE4_1="0"
CODEC_G711_REQ="1"
CODEC_G729_PARAM="0"
## RTP Settings
242
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
8.2 Comprehensive Example of the Configuration File
TOS_RTP_1="0"
RTCP_INTVL_1="0"
MAX_DELAY_1="20"
MIN_DELAY_1="2"
NOM_DELAY_1="2"
RTP_PORT_MIN="16000"
RTP_PORT_MAX="20000"
RTP_PTIME="20"
## Miscellaneous VoIP Settings
OUTBANDDTMF_1="Y"
OUTBANDDTMF_VOL="-5"
TELEVENT_PTYPE_1="101"
RFC2543_HOLD_ENABLE_1="Y"
############################################################
# Line Settings #
############################################################
## Call Control Settings
VM_NUMBER_1=""
DIAL_PLAN_1="<:0111>[2-9]xxxxxxxxxS0|<:011>1[2-9]xxxxxxxxxS0"
DIAL_PLAN_NOT_MATCH_ENABLE_1="N"
SHARED_CALL_ENABLE_1="Y"
SHARED_USER_ID_1="1234567890a"
SYNCHRONIZATION_ENABLE_1="N"
PRIVACY_MODE_1="Y"
## SIP Settings
SIP_USER_AGENT="Panasonic_{MODEL}/{fwver} ({mac})"
SIP_AUTHID_1="SIP1234567890"
SIP_PASS_1="APDs8S2ja0afAMO72"
SIP_SRC_PORT_1="5060"
SIP_PRXY_ADDR_1="proxy.example.com"
SIP_PRXY_PORT_1="5060"
SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_1="registrar.example.com"
SIP_RGSTR_PORT_1="5060"
SIP_SVCDOMAIN_1="example.com"
REG_EXPIRE_TIME_1="3600"
REG_INTERVAL_RATE_1="90"
SIP_SESSION_TIME_1="0"
TOS_SIP_1="0"
SIP_2NDPROXY_ADDR_1=""
SIP_2NDPROXY_PORT_1="5060"
SIP_2NDRGSTR_ADDR_1=""
SIP_2NDRGSTR_PORT_1="5060"
SIP_TIMER_T1_1="500"
SIP_TIMER_T2_1="4"
INVITE_RTXN_1="6"
OTHER_RTXN_1="10"
SIP_FOVR_NORSP_1="Y"
SIP_FOVR_MAX_1="2"
SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_1="Y"
SIP_UDP_SRV_PREFIX_1="_sip._udp."
SIP_TCP_SRV_PREFIX_1="_sip._tcp."
SIP_100REL_ENABLE_1="N"
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
243
8.2 Comprehensive Example of the Configuration File
SIP_18X_RTX_INTVL_1="0"
SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_1="presenceserver.example.com"
SIP_PRSNC_PORT_1="5060"
SIP_2NDPRSNC_ADDR_1=""
SIP_2NDPRSNC_PORT_1="5060"
USE_DEL_REG_OPEN_1="N"
USE_DEL_REG_CLOSE_1="N"
PORT_PUNCH_INTVL_1="0"
SIP_SUBS_EXPIRE_1="3600"
SUB_RTX_INTVL_1="10"
REG_RTX_INTVL_1="10"
SIP_P_PREFERRED_ID_1="N"
SIP_PRIVACY_1="N"
ADD_USER_PHONE_1="N"
SDP_USER_ID_1="-"
SUB_INTERVAL_RATE_1="90"
SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_1=""
SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_1="5060"
SIP_TRANSPORT_1="0"
SIP_ANM_DISPNAME_1="1"
SIP_ANM_USERNAME_1="0"
SIP_ANM_HOSTNAME_1="N"
SIP_DETECT_SSAF_1="N"
SIP_RCV_DET_HEADER_1="N"
SIP_CONTACT_ON_ACK_1="N"
PHONE_NUMBER_1="1234567890"
LINE_ID_1=""
DISPLAY_NAME_1="1234567890"
INTERNATIONAL_ACCESS_CODE=""
SIP_REQURI_PORT_1="Y"
SIP_ADD_RPORT_1="N"
SIP_SESSION_METHOD_1="0"
VOICE_MESSAGE_AVAILABLE="Y"
#----------------------------------------------------------#
# Settings for line 2 #
#----------------------------------------------------------#
############################################################
# System Settings #
############################################################
## Syslog Settings
SYSLOG_RTPSMLY_INTVL_2="20"
############################################################
# Telephone Settings #
############################################################
## Multi Number Settings
INCOMING_CALL_GROUP_2="1,1,1,1,1,1,1"
############################################################
# VoIP Settings #
############################################################
## Codec Settings
SDP_CODEC0_2="G722"
244
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
8.2 Comprehensive Example of the Configuration File
SDP_CODEC1_2="PCMA"
SDP_CODEC2_2="G726-32"
SDP_CODEC3_2="G729A"
SDP_CODEC4_2="PCMU"
SDP_CKRTE0_2="8000"
SDP_CKRTE1_2="8000"
SDP_CKRTE2_2="8000"
SDP_CKRTE3_2="8000"
SDP_CKRTE4_2="8000"
SDP_PARAM0_2="0"
SDP_PARAM1_2="0"
SDP_PARAM2_2="0"
SDP_PARAM3_2="0"
SDP_PARAM4_2="0"
SDP_PTYPE0_2="9"
SDP_PTYPE1_2="8"
SDP_PTYPE2_2="2"
SDP_PTYPE3_2="18"
SDP_PTYPE4_2="0"
## RTP Settings
TOS_RTP_2="0"
RTCP_INTVL_2="0"
MAX_DELAY_2="20"
MIN_DELAY_2="2"
NOM_DELAY_2="2"
## Miscellaneous VoIP Settings
OUTBANDDTMF_2="Y"
TELEVENT_PTYPE_2="101"
RFC2543_HOLD_ENABLE_2="Y"
############################################################
# Line Settings #
############################################################
## Call Control Settings
VM_NUMBER_2=""
DIAL_PLAN_2="<:0111>[2-9]xxxxxxxxxS0|<:011>1[2-9]xxxxxxxxxS0"
DIAL_PLAN_NOT_MATCH_ENABLE_2="N"
SHARED_CALL_ENABLE_2="Y"
SHARED_USER_ID_2="1234567891a"
SYNCHRONIZATION_ENABLE_2="N"
PRIVACY_MODE_2="Y"
## SIP Settings
SIP_AUTHID_2="SIP1234567891"
SIP_PASS_2="J8uajAHFK3AHFSAla"
SIP_SRC_PORT_2="5070"
SIP_PRXY_ADDR_2="proxy.example.com"
SIP_PRXY_PORT_2="5060"
SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_2="registrar.example.com"
SIP_RGSTR_PORT_2="5060"
SIP_SVCDOMAIN_2="example.com"
REG_EXPIRE_TIME_2="3600"
REG_INTERVAL_RATE_2="90"
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
245
8.2 Comprehensive Example of the Configuration File
SIP_SESSION_TIME_2="0"
TOS_SIP_2="0"
SIP_2NDPROXY_ADDR_2=""
SIP_2NDPROXY_PORT_2="5060"
SIP_2NDRGSTR_ADDR_2=""
SIP_2NDRGSTR_PORT_2="5060"
SIP_TIMER_T1_2="500"
SIP_TIMER_T2_2="4"
INVITE_RTXN_2="6"
OTHER_RTXN_2="10"
SIP_FOVR_NORSP_2="Y"
SIP_FOVR_MAX_2="2"
SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_2="Y"
SIP_UDP_SRV_PREFIX_2="_sip._udp."
SIP_TCP_SRV_PREFIX_2="_sip._tcp."
SIP_100REL_ENABLE_2="N"
SIP_18X_RTX_INTVL_2="0"
SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_2="presenceserver.example.com"
SIP_PRSNC_PORT_2="5060"
SIP_2NDPRSNC_ADDR_2=""
SIP_2NDPRSNC_PORT_2="5060"
USE_DEL_REG_OPEN_2="N"
USE_DEL_REG_CLOSE_2="N"
PORT_PUNCH_INTVL_2="0"
SIP_SUBS_EXPIRE_2="3600"
SUB_RTX_INTVL_2="10"
REG_RTX_INTVL_2="10"
SIP_P_PREFERRED_ID_2="N"
SIP_PRIVACY_2="N"
ADD_USER_PHONE_2="N"
SDP_USER_ID_2="-"
SUB_INTERVAL_RATE_2="90"
SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_2=""
SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_2="5060"
SIP_TRANSPORT_2="0"
SIP_ANM_DISPNAME_2="1"
SIP_ANM_USERNAME_2="0"
SIP_ANM_HOSTNAME_2="N"
SIP_DETECT_SSAF_2="N"
SIP_RCV_DET_HEADER_2="N"
SIP_CONTACT_ON_ACK_2="N"
PHONE_NUMBER_2="1234567891"
LINE_ID_2=""
DISPLAY_NAME_2="1234567891"
SIP_REQURI_PORT_2="Y"
SIP_ADD_RPORT_2="N"
SIP_SESSION_METHOD_2="0"
#----------------------------------------------------------#
# Settings for line 3 to 8 follows... #
#----------------------------------------------------------#
246
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
8.2.1 Codec Settings for G729A only
8.2.1 Codec Settings for G729A only
By specifying the configuration parameters as shown in the following example, you can use only "G729A" for
line 1 as the codec settings.
Example
SDP_CODEC0_1="G729A"
SDP_CODEC1_1=""
SDP_CODEC2_1=""
SDP_CODEC3_1=""
SDP_CODEC4_1=""
SDP_PTYPE0_1="18"
SDP_PTYPE1_1="255"
SDP_PTYPE2_1="255"
SDP_PTYPE3_1="255"
SDP_PTYPE4_1="255"
CODEC_G711_REQ="0"
Note
•
•
If you use only "G729A" for lines 2–8, specify the same settings by changing the suffix "_1" to
"_2"–"_8".
This listing shows the parameters required for setting "G729A" only. For details about the other settings,
see 8.2 Comprehensive Example of the Configuration File.
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
247
8.3 Example with Incorrect Descriptions
8.3 Example with Incorrect Descriptions
The following listing shows an example of a configuration file that contains incorrect formatting:
An improper description is entered in the first line. A configuration file must start with the designated
character sequence "# PCC Standard Format File #".
Comment lines start in the middle of the lines.
Space characters are inserted in the middle of the setting line.
Comment lines begin with characters other than "#".
A specified value is not in the range allowed for that setting.
Incorrect Example
# This is a simplified sample configuration file.
A
############################################################
# Configuration Setting #
############################################################
CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH="http://config.example.com/0123456789AB.cfg"
# URL of this configuration file
############################################################
# SIP Settings #
# Suffix "_1" indicates this parameter is for "line 1". #
############################################################
B
SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_1="registrar.example.com" # IP Address or FQDN of SIP registrar server
SIP_PRXY_ADDR_1="proxy.example.com"
# IP Address or FQDN of proxy server
# Enables DNS SRV lookup
SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_1="Y"
# ID, password for SIP authentication
SIP_AUTHID_1 = "SIP_User"
SIP_PASS_1 = "SIP_Password"
C
# Some Timer Settings #
# Expiration time of SIP registration; "1 hour"
REG_EXPIRE_TIME_1="3600"
# Disables SIP Session Timer (RFC 4028)
SIP_SESSION_TIME_1="0"
248
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
8.3 Example with Incorrect Descriptions
// SIP phone number
PHONE_NUMBER_1="1234567890"
# Caller ID passed to opposite party
DISPLAY_NAME_1="1234567890"
D
/*
* VoIP Setting
*/
# DTMF will be sent through SDP, according to RFC 2833
OUTBANDDTMF_1="Y"
############################################################
# Call Control Settings #
############################################################
# Enables subscription to the Voice Mail server
VM_SUBSCRIBE_ENABLE="Yes"
E
# Shared Call Settings
SHARED_CALL_ENABLE_1="Y"
SHARED_USER_ID_1="1234567890a"
# Disables Do Not Disturb, Call Forward synchronization.
SYNCHRONIZATION_ENABLE_1="N"
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
249
8.3 Example with Incorrect Descriptions
250
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
Section 9
Open Source Software
Parts of this product use Open Source Software.
Relevant conditions apply to this software. Panasonic
cannot accept inquiries regarding the content of the
following copyright and licence information.
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
251
<<NetBSD kernel>>
This product uses a part of NetBSD kernel.
The use of a part of NetBSD kernel is based on the typical BSD style
license below.
Copyright (c)
The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
must display the following acknowledgement:
This product includes software developed by the University of
California, Berkeley and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
However, parts of the NetBSD Kernel are provided with the following copyright notices.
Copyright (c) 1980, 1983, 1988, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1980, 1986, 1989, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1980, 1986, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1980, 1986, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1982, 1985, 1986, 1988, 1993, 1994 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1993, 1994, 1995 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1993, 1995 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1988, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1988, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1988, 1993, 1995 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1989, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1989, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1990, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1990, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1990, 1993, 1994 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1994 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1995 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1993, 1994 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1993, 1994, 1995 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1993, 1995 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1982, 1988, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1983, 1990, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1983, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1985, 1986, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1985, 1986, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1986, 1989, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
252
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
Copyright (c) 1986, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1987, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1987, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1987, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1988 Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved
Copyright (c) 1988 Stephen Deering.
Copyright (c) 1988 University of Utah.
Copyright (c) 1988, 1989, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1988, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1988, 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1988, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1989 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1989, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1989, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1989, 1993, 1994 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1990, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1990, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1991, 1993, 1994 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1992 Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1993 Adam Glass
Copyright (C) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1994 Gordon W. Ross
Copyright (c) 1994 Winning Strategies, Inc. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1995 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (C) 1995, 1996, 1997, and 1998 WIDE Project. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1996 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1996 John S. Dyson All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1996 Matt Thomas. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1996 Matthew R. Green. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1996 Paul Kranenburg
Copyright (c) 1996, 1997, 1999, 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1996, 2000 Christopher G. Demetriou. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1996,1999 by Internet Software Consortium.
Copyright (c) 1996-1999 by Internet Software Consortium.
Copyright (c) 1997 Jonathan Stone and Jason R. Thorpe. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1997 Christos Zoulas. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1997 Manuel Bouyer. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1997, 1998 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2002 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1997, 1998, 2000, 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1997, 1998, 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1997,98 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Copyright (C) 1997-2000 Sony Computer Science Laboratories Inc. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1997-2002 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1998 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1998 Todd C. Miller <Todd.Miller@courtesan.com> All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1998, 2000 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1998, 2000, 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1999 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Copyright (C) 1999 WIDE Project. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1999, 2000 Jason L. Wright (jason@thought.net) All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1999, 2000 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1999, 2000, 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1999, 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 2000 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 2000, 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 2000, 2001, 2002 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 2002 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
253
Copyright 1998 Massachusetts Institute of Technology. All rights reserved.
Copyright 2001 Wasabi Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Portions Copyright (c) 1993 by Digital Equipment Corporation.
Portions Copyright (c) 1995 by International Business Machines, Inc.
Copyright (c) 1983, 1989 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1996 by Internet Software Consortium. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1980, 1986, 1989 Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1988 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1994 Christopher G. Demetriou. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1997 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1999 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1996 Gardner Buchanan <gbuchanan@shl.com> All rights reserved.
Parts of the NetBSD Kernel are provided with the licenses that are slightly different from the
above Berkeley-formed license. Please refer the source code of the NetBSD Kernel about the details.
The source code of the NetBSD Kernel is provided by the NetBSD CVS Repositories
(http://cvsweb.netbsd.org/bsdweb.cgi/), and this product includes parts of the source code in the
following directories.
http://cvsweb.netbsd.org/bsdweb.cgi/src/sys/kern/
http://cvsweb.netbsd.org/bsdweb.cgi/src/sys/net/
http://cvsweb.netbsd.org/bsdweb.cgi/src/sys/netinet/
<<OpenSSL>>
The product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project and it is used
under the following license.
LICENSE ISSUES
==============
The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of
the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit.
See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style
Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL
please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
OpenSSL License
--------------/* ====================================================================
* Copyright (c) 1998-2004 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
*
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
*
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
* the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
* distribution.
*
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this
* software must display the following acknowledgment:
* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
*
* 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to
* endorse or promote products derived from this software without
* prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
* openssl-core@openssl.org.
*
* 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL"
* nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written
254
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
* permission of the OpenSSL Project.
*
* 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
* acknowledgment:
* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY
* EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
* PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR
* ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
* NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
* ====================================================================
*
* This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
* (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim
* Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
*/
Original SSLeay License
----------------------/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)
* All rights reserved.
*
* This package is an SSL implementation written
* by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
* The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
*
* This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as
* the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions
* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,
* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation
* included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms
* except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
* Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in
* the code are not to be removed.
* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution
* as the author of the parts of the library used.
* This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or
* in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
* documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
* must display the following acknowledgement:
* "This product includes cryptographic software written by
* Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"
* The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library
* being used are not cryptographic related :-).
* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from
* the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
255
* "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
* SUCH DAMAGE.
*
* The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or
* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be
* copied and put under another distribution licence
* [including the GNU Public Licence.]
*/
<<MD5>>
This software uses the Source Code of RSA Data Security, Inc. described in the
RFC1321 (MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm).
----------------------------------------------------------------Copyright (C) 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc. Created 1991. All
rights reserved.
License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it
is identified as the "RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest
Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing this software
or this function.
License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided
that such works are identified as "derived from the RSA Data
Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material
mentioning or referencing the derived work.
RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either
the merchantability of this software or the suitability of this
software for any particular purpose. It is provided "as is"
without express or implied warranty of any kind.
These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this
documentation and/or software.
----------------------------------------------------------------<<MT19937>>
The MT19937 software that Takuji Nishimura and Makoto Matsumoto developed
is contained, and this product shall be used subject to the following
license conditions.
Copyright (C) 1997 - 2002, Makoto Matsumoto and Takuji Nishimura,
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The names of its contributors may not be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written
256
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
<<thttpd>>
The thttpd software that ACME Labs developed is contained, and this product
shall be used subject to the following license conditions.
Copyright 1995,1998,1999,2000 by Jef Poskanzer <jef@acme.com>.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
257
258
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
Section 10
Appendix
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
259
10.1.4 KX-TGP551 Software File Version 12.12 or later
10.1 Revision History
10.1.1 KX-TGP500/KX-TGP550 Software File Version 12.04/22.04
or later
New Contents
•
•
3.6.2.1 Phone Number
Phone Number
Line ID
4.7.2 SIP Settings
SIP_RCV_DET_HEADER_[1–8]
PHONE_NUMBER_[1–8]
LINE_ID_[1–8]
10.1.2 KX-TGP500/KX-TGP550 Software File Version 12.06/22.06
or later
New Contents
•
4.5.1 Multi Number Settings
INCOMING_CALL_GROUP_[1–8]
OUTGOING_CALL_LINE_HS[1–6]
OUTGOING_CALL_LINE_BS
DEFAULT_LINE_SELECT_HS[1–6]
DEFAULT_LINE_SELECT_BS
10.1.3 KX-TGP500/KX-TGP550 Software File Version 12.10/22.10
or later
New Contents
•
•
•
•
4.3.5 Provisioning Settings
OPTION66_REBOOT
4.4.4 HTTP Settings
HTTPD_PORTOPEN_AUTO
4.6.3 Miscellaneous VoIP Settings
OUTBANDDTMF_VOL
4.7.2 SIP Settings
SIP_CONTACT_ON_ACK_[1–8]
10.1.4 KX-TGP551 Software File Version 12.12 or later
Beginning with this version, the KX-TGP551 is supported.
260
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
10.1.7 KX-TGP500/KX-TGP550 Software File Version 12.53/22.53 or later
10.1.5 KX-TGP500/KX-TGP550 Software File Version 12.17/22.17
or later
New Contents
•
•
3.4.3.2 HTTP Authentication
Authentication ID
Authentication Password
4.7.2 SIP Settings
SIP_REQURI_PORT_[1–8]
SIP_ADD_RPORT_[1–8]
SIP_SESSION_METHOD_[1–8]
10.1.6 KX-TGP500/KX-TGP550 Software File Version 12.29/22.29
or later
New Contents
•
4.7.2 SIP Settings
VOICE_MESSAGE_AVAILABLE
10.1.7 KX-TGP500/KX-TGP550 Software File Version 12.53/22.53
or later
New Contents
•
2.1.7 HTTP Authentication Settings
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
261
10.1.7 KX-TGP500/KX-TGP550 Software File Version 12.53/22.53 or later
262
Administrator Guide
Document Version
2012-03
Index
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
263
Index
Numerics
1–30 109
1–5 109
A
Access Level 44, 54
Access Levels (IDs and Passwords) 29, 54
Accessing the Web User Interface 54
ADD_USER_PHONE_[1–8] 202
ADMIN_ID 141
ADMIN_PASS 141
Administrator Password 78
Audience 2
Authentication ID 73, 91
Authentication Password 73, 92
Available Values for the Dial Plan Field 221
B
Base 106
Basic Network Settings 16, 18, 65
Basic Network Setup 16
Before Accessing the Web User Interface 52
BELL_CORE_PATTERN1_TIMING 176
BELL_CORE_PATTERN2_TIMING 176
BELL_CORE_PATTERN3_TIMING 176
BELL_CORE_PATTERN4_TIMING 177
BELL_CORE_PATTERN5_TIMING 177
Block Anonymous Call 113
Block Caller ID 113
Busy (Enable Call Forward) 115
Busy (Phone Number) 116
Busy Tone 119
BUSY_TONE_FRQ 173
BUSY_TONE_TIMING 173
C
Call Control 107, 108, 110
Call Control [Line 1]–[Line 8] 110
Call Control Settings 135, 136, 171, 185, 221
Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match 113
Call Features 113
Call Forward 112, 114, 115, 116, 187
Call Hold 101, 185
Call Rejection Phone Numbers 109
Cancel Button 56
CFG_CYCLIC 155
CFG_CYCLIC_INTVL 156
CFG_FILE_KEY_LENGTH 155
CFG_FILE_KEY1 154
CFG_FILE_KEY2 155
CFG_FILE_KEY3 155
CFG_MASTER_FILE_PATH 153
CFG_PRODUCT_FILE_PATH 152
CFG_RESYNC_FROM_SIP 157
CFG_RESYNC_TIME 156
CFG_ROOT_CERTIFICATE_PATH 165
CFG_RTRY_INTVL 156
CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH 151
Change Administrator Password 78
Change User Password 79
264
Administrator Guide
Channel 1–3 77
Characters Available for String Values 140
Checking the Status of the Unit 236
Codec Settings 136, 177
CODEC Settings 101
Codec Settings for G729A only 247
CODEC_G711_REQ 179
CODEC_G729_PARAM 179
Comprehensive Example 239
Conference Server Address 108
CONFERENCE_SERVER_ADDRESS 171
Configuration File 23, 138
Configuration File Examples 237
Configuration File Parameter List 132
Configuration File Parameters 140
Configuration File Programming 131
Configuration File Specifications 138
Configuration Parameter Example 226
Configuring the Network Settings of the Unit 17
Confirm New Password 79, 80
Connection Mode 63, 66
CONNECTION_TYPE 157
Controls on the Window 56
CUSTOM_WEB_PAGE 168
Cyclic Auto Resync 128
D
Day of Week 83, 85
Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time) 83
Default 107
Default Gateway 63, 68
DEFAULT_LINE_SELECT_BS 170
DEFAULT_LINE_SELECT_HS[1–6] 170
Detection Interval 75
Detection Method 74
DHCP Server 16, 21, 150
DHCP Settings 66
DHCP_DNS_ENABLE 158
Dial Plan 112, 220
Dial Plan Example 222
Dial Plan Settings 220
Dial Tone 118
DIAL_PLAN_[1–8] 185
DIAL_PLAN_NOT_MATCH_ENABLE_[1–8]
DIAL_TONE_FRQ 172
DIAL_TONE_TIMING 173
Direct Commands 36
Display Name 110
DISPLAY_NAME_[1–8] 207
DNS 92
DNS Server 17, 67, 158
DNS Server Settings 17
DNS Settings 17, 133, 160
DNS_PRIORITY 161
DNS_QRY_PRLL 160
DNS1 63, 68
DNS1_ADDR 161
DNS2 64, 69
DNS2_ADDR 161
Do Not Disturb 112, 114, 115, 116, 187
Domain Name Server 67
DST Offset (Summer Time Offset) 83
186
Document Version
2012-03
Index
DST_ENABLE 143
DST_OFFSET 143
DST_START_DAY_OF_WEEK 144
DST_START_MONTH 144
DST_START_ORDINAL_DAY 144
DST_START_TIME 145
DST_STOP_DAY_OF_WEEK 145
DST_STOP_MONTH 145
DST_STOP_ORDINAL_DAY 145
DST_STOP_TIME 146
DTMF 100
DTMF Type 100
E
Editing with Microsoft Excel 217
Embedded web 53
Emergency Call Phone Numbers 109
EMERGENCY_CALL[1–5] 171
Enable DNS SRV lookup 92
Enable DST (Enable Summer Time) 83
Enable Firmware Update 124
Enable Global IP Address Usage per Line 76
Enable Privacy Mode 110
Enable Provisioning 126
Enable Proxy 73
Enable Shared Call 111
Enable SSAF (SIP Source Address Filter) 96
Enable Synchronization by NTP 82
Enable VLAN 37, 70
Encryption 27, 125
Encryption Key 27, 154, 155
End Day and Time of DST (End Day and Time of Summer
Time) 84
Entering Characters 57
Ethernet Link Status (LAN Port) 62
Ethernet Link Status (PC Port) 62
Ethernet Port Settings 69, 134, 162
Export Button 216
Export Phonebook 123, 216
Exporting Data from Microsoft Outlook 219
External RTP Port 77
F
Factory Defaults 16, 33, 38, 40
Fifth CODEC 103
File Name 122, 126
FIRM_FILE_PATH 149
FIRM_UPGRADE_AUTO 149
FIRM_UPGRADE_ENABLE 148
FIRM_VER_EUDECT 148
FIRM_VER_USDECT 149
Firmware File URL 125
Firmware Maintenance 124, 226
Firmware Server 34, 226
Firmware Update 34, 124, 148, 225, 227
Firmware Update Settings 132, 148, 226
Firmware Version 61
First CODEC 101
FIRSTDIGIT_TIM 172
Fourth CODEC 103
Document Version
2012-03
G
Global Address Detection 32, 74
Global IP Address 76
Grouping Handset/Handset selection for receiving
calls 105
H
Handset (or Base Unit) 122, 123
Handset and Line No. selection for making calls
Handset No. 106
Header Value for Resync Event 128
Host Name 66
HOST_NAME 158
Howler Tone 121
HOWLER_START_TIME 176
HOWLER_TONE_FRQ 175
HOWLER_TONE_TIMING 175
HTTP Authentication 73
HTTP Authentication Settings 40
HTTP Client Settings 72
HTTP Settings 134, 163
HTTP User Agent 72
HTTP Version 72
HTTP_SSL_VERIFY 165
HTTP_USER_AGENT 164
HTTP_VER 164
HTTPD_PORTOPEN_AUTO 163
HTTPS 27, 28
106
I
Import Button 216
Import Phonebook 121, 122, 216
Import/Export File Format 215
Import/Export Operation 216
INCOMING_CALL_GROUP_[1–8] 168
Incorrect Example 248
Initial Delay 100
INTDIGIT_TIM 172
Inter-digit Timeout 108
INTERNATIONAL_ACCESS_CODE 207
INVITE Retry Count 93
INVITE_RTXN_[1–8] 195
IP Address 63
IP Phone (Priority) 38, 71
IP Phone (VLAN ID) 38, 70
IP Reset 33, 38
IP Settings 133, 157
IPL Version 61
J
Jitter Buffer
99
K
Keep Alive 95
Keep Alive Interval
95
L
LAN port
LAN Port
37
69
Administrator Guide
265
Index
Language 78
Language Selection 16, 29, 30, 77
Language Selection for the Unit 16
Line 1–Line 8 76
Line ID 89
Line No. 64, 105, 107
Line Settings 136, 185
LINE_ID_[1–8] 206
Link Speed/Duplex Mode 69
Local Firmware Update 125, 227
Login Account Settings 132, 141
M
MAC Address 62
Maintenance 51
Maintenance Tab 51, 124
Master Configuration File 24, 127, 153
Master File URL 127
MAX_DELAY_[1–8] 181
Maximum Delay 99
Maximum RTP Port Number 97
Microsoft Excel 214, 217
Microsoft Outlook 214, 219
MIN_DELAY_[1–8] 182
Minimum Delay 100
Minimum RTP Port Number 97
Miscellaneous Network Settings 134, 167
Miscellaneous VoIP Settings 136, 184
Model 61
Month 83, 84
Multi Number Settings 104, 134, 168, 212
N
NAPT 75
NAT 31, 75, 95, 200
NAT Traversal 31, 76
Network 45
Network Settings 133, 157
Network Status 62, 236
Network Tab 45, 65
New Password 78, 79
No Answer (Enable Call Forward) 116
No Answer (Phone Number) 117
No Answer (Ring Count) 117
NOM_DELAY_[1–8] 182
Non-INVITE Retry Count 94
NOTES 2
NTP Server Address 82
NTP_ADDR 166
NW_SETTING_ENABLE 167
O
Opening/Closing the Web Port
Operating BANK 61
OPTION66_ENABLE 150
OPTION66_REBOOT 151
Other Network Settings 30
OTHER_RTXN_[1–8] 195
OUTBANDDTMF_[1–8] 184
OUTBANDDTMF_VOL 184
Outbound Proxy Server 90
266
Administrator Guide
52
Outbound Proxy Server Address 90
Outbound Proxy Server Port 90
OUTGOING_CALL_LINE_BS 169
OUTGOING_CALL_LINE_HS[1–6] 169
Overview of Programming 19
P
PC (Priority) 38, 71
PC (VLAN ID) 38, 71
PC port 37
PC Port 70
Phone Number 64, 88, 105
Phone User Interface Feature List and Direct
Commands 36
Phone User Interface Programming 19, 30, 35, 36
PHONE_NUMBER_[1–8] 206
Phonebook Data in Binary Format 216
Phonebook Data in Text Format 215
Port Close Timer 81
Port Forwarding 31
PORT_PUNCH_INTVL_[1–8] 200
Pre-provisioning 19
Presence Server Address 90
Presence Server Port 90
Primary DNS Server 17, 63, 67, 68, 160, 161
Priority of Setting Methods 30
PRIVACY_MODE_[1–8] 188
Product Configuration File 24, 127, 152
Product File URL 127
PROVISION_ENABLE 151
Provisioning 19, 23
Provisioning Maintenance 25, 126
Provisioning Server 22, 26
Provisioning Settings 25, 133, 150
Proxy Server Address 73, 89
Proxy Server Port 74, 89
Proxy Server Settings 73
Q
Quality of Service (QoS)
94, 98
R
Recommended Environment 52
Refresh Button 57, 62, 64
REG_EXPIRE_TIME_[1–8] 191
REG_INTERVAL_RATE_[1–8] 191
REG_RTX_INTVL_[1–8] 201
Registrar Server Address 89
Registrar Server Port 89
Related Documentation 2
Reliability of Provisional Responses 95, 198
Reorder Tone 120
REORDER_TONE_FRQ 175
REORDER_TONE_TIMING 175
Reset 33
Reset to Defaults 128
Reset Web ID/Password 40, 54
Reset Web Settings 34
Reset Web Settings Button 128
Restart 129
Restart Button 129
Document Version
2012-03
Index
Result Messages 57
Resync Interval 128
Revision History, KX-TGP500/KX-TGP550 Software File
Version 12.04/22.04 or later 260
Revision History, KX-TGP500/KX-TGP550 Software File
Version 12.06/22.06 or later 260
Revision History, KX-TGP500/KX-TGP550 Software File
Version 12.10/22.10 or later 260
Revision History, KX-TGP500/KX-TGP550 Software File
Version 12.17/22.17 or later 261
Revision History, KX-TGP500/KX-TGP550 Software File
Version 12.29/22.29 or later 261
Revision History, KX-TGP551 Software File Version 12.12 or
later 260
RFC2543_HOLD_ENABLE_[1–8] 185
Ringing Tone 119
RINGING_TONE_FRQ 174
RINGING_TONE_TIMING 174
Root Certificate 27, 165
Router Setup 32
RTCP Interval 99
RTCP_INTVL_[1–8] 181
RTP (Real-time Transport Protocol) Setup 32
RTP Packet QoS (DSCP) 98
RTP Packet Time 96
RTP Settings 32, 96, 136, 180
RTP_PORT_MAX 183
RTP_PORT_MIN 183
RTP_PTIME 183
S
Save Button 56, 57
SDP_CKRTE[0–4]_[1–8] 178
SDP_CODEC[0–4]_[1–8] 177
SDP_PARAM[0–4]_[1–8] 178
SDP_PTYPE[0–4]_[1–8] 178
SDP_USER_ID_[1–8] 202
Second CODEC 102
Secondary DNS Server 17, 64, 67, 69, 160, 161
Secure Provisioning Methods 27
Security 96
Send SUBSCRIBE to Voice Mail Server 108
Service Domain 91
Setting Priority 30
Shared Call 111, 186
SHARED_CALL_ENABLE_[1–8] 186
SHARED_USER_ID_[1–8] 187
Simplified Example 238
SIP Authentication 91
SIP extensions 95
SIP Packet QoS (DSCP) 94
SIP Server 89
SIP Service Domain 91
SIP Setting 86
SIP Settings 31, 86, 88, 136, 188
SIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 8] 88
SIP Setup 31
SIP Source Address Filter (SSAF) 96, 205
SIP Source Port 32, 91
SIP User Agent 86
SIP_100REL_ENABLE_[1–8] 198
SIP_18X_RTX_INTVL_[1–8] 198
Document Version
2012-03
SIP_2NDPROXY_ADDR_[1–8] 193
SIP_2NDPROXY_PORT_[1–8] 194
SIP_2NDPRSNC_ADDR_[1–8] 199
SIP_2NDPRSNC_PORT_[1–8] 199
SIP_2NDRGSTR_ADDR_[1–8] 194
SIP_2NDRGSTR_PORT_[1–8] 194
SIP_ADD_RPORT_[1–8] 208
SIP_ANM_DISPNAME_[1–8] 204
SIP_ANM_HOSTNAME_[1–8] 204
SIP_ANM_USERNAME_[1–8] 204
SIP_AUTHID_[1–8] 188
SIP_CONTACT_ON_ACK_[1–8] 206
SIP_DETECT_SSAF_[1–8] 205
SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_[1–8] 196
SIP_FOVR_MAX_[1–8] 196
SIP_FOVR_NORSP_[1–8] 196
SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_[1–8] 203
SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_[1–8] 203
SIP_P_PREFERRED_ID_[1–8] 201
SIP_PASS_[1–8] 189
SIP_PRIVACY_[1–8] 202
SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_[1–8] 198
SIP_PRSNC_PORT_[1–8] 199
SIP_PRXY_ADDR_[1–8] 189
SIP_PRXY_PORT_[1–8] 190
SIP_RCV_DET_HEADER_[1–8] 205
SIP_REQURI_PORT_[1–8] 207
SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_[1–8] 190
SIP_RGSTR_PORT_[1–8] 190
SIP_SESSION_METHOD_[1–8] 208
SIP_SESSION_TIME_[1–8] 191
SIP_SRC_PORT_[1–8] 189
SIP_SUBS_EXPIRE_[1–8] 200
SIP_SVCDOMAIN_[1–8] 190
SIP_TCP_SRV_PREFIX_[1–8] 197
SIP_TIMER_T1_[1–8] 194
SIP_TIMER_T2_[1–8] 195
SIP_TRANSPORT_[1–8] 203
SIP_UDP_SRV_PREFIX_[1–8] 197
SIP_USER_AGENT 188
Source Port 91
Speed/Duplex 36, 69
Speed/Duplex Settings 36
SRV lookup Prefix for TCP 93
SRV lookup Prefix for UDP 92
SSAF ® SIP Source Address Filter 96, 205
SSL 27
Standard Configuration File 24, 127, 151
Standard File URL 127
Start Day and Time of DST (Start Day and Time of Summer
Time) 83
Start Time 121
Static IP Address 67
Static NAPT Settings 32, 75
Static Settings 67
STATIC_GATEWAY 159
STATIC_IP_ADDRESS 158
STATIC_SUBNET 159
Statistical Information 99
Status 44
Status Tab 44, 60
STT_TONE_FRQ 174
STT_TONE_TIMING 174
Administrator Guide
267
Index
STUN Server 33, 75, 166
STUN Server Address 75
STUN Server Port 75
STUN Settings 134, 166
STUN_2NDSERV_ADDR 167
STUN_2NDSERV_PORT 167
STUN_SERV_ADDR 166
STUN_SERV_PORT 167
Stutter Tone 120
SUB_INTERVAL_RATE_[1–8] 202
SUB_RTX_INTVL_[1–8] 201
Subnet Mask 63, 68
Supports 100rel (RFC 3262) 95
Supports RFC 2543 (c=0.0.0.0) 101
Supports Session Timer (RFC 4028) 95
Synchronization 82
Synchronization Interval 82
SYNCHRONIZATION_ENABLE_[1–8] 187
Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward
Syslog Settings 132, 146, 236
SYSLOG_ADDR 147
SYSLOG_EVENT_CFG 147
SYSLOG_EVENT_SIP 146
SYSLOG_EVENT_TEL 147
SYSLOG_EVENT_VOIP 147
SYSLOG_PORT 148
SYSLOG_RTPSMLY_INTVL_[1–8] 148
System 46
System Settings 132, 141
System Tab 46, 77
System Time Settings 132, 142
Trademarks 2
Transport Protocol 87
Transport Protocol for SIP 87
Troubleshooting 229
TSV ® Tab-separated Value 122, 123, 215, 217
U
112
T
T1 Timer 93
T2 Timer 93
Tab-separated Value (TSV) 122, 123, 215, 217
TCP/IP Settings 16
TCP/IP Settings (DHCP or Static IP Address
Assignment) 16
Technical Support 2
Telephone 49
Telephone Settings 134, 168
Telephone Tab 49, 104
Telephone-event Payload Type 101
TELEVENT_PTYPE_[1–8] 184
Terminal No. 39
Terminal Number Settings 39
TFTP Server 19, 21, 150
Third CODEC 102
Time 84, 86
Time Adjust Settings 81, 134, 166
Time Server 82
Time Zone 82
TIME_QUERY_INTVL 166
TIME_SYNC_INTVL 166
TIME_ZONE 142
Timer Settings 93
Tone Frequencies 118, 119, 120, 121
Tone Settings 118, 135, 172
Tone Timings 118, 119, 120, 121
TOS_RTP_[1–8] 180
TOS_SIP_[1–8] 192
268
Administrator Guide
Unconditional (Enable Call Forward) 114
Unconditional (Phone Number) 115
Unique ID of Shared Call 112
Update Firmware Button 125, 227
Update Type 124
USE_DEL_REG_CLOSE_[1–8] 200
USE_DEL_REG_OPEN_[1–8] 199
USER_DNS1_ADDR 160
USER_DNS2_ADDR 160
USER_ID 142
USER_PASS 142
Using 2 Types of Configuration Files 24
Using 3 Types of Configuration Files 23
V
Version Information 61
VLAN setting 37
VLAN Settings 70
VLAN_ENABLE 162
VLAN_ID_IP_PHONE 162
VLAN_ID_PC 163
VLAN_PRI_IP_PHONE 162
VLAN_PRI_PC 163
VM_NUMBER_[1–8] 185
VM_SUBSCRIBE_ENABLE 172
Voice Mail Access Number 111
VOICE_MESSAGE_AVAILABLE 208
VoIP 47
VoIP Settings 96, 98, 136, 177
VoIP Settings [Line 1]–[Line 8] 98
VoIP Status 64, 65, 236
VoIP Tab 47, 86
W
Web Language 29, 77, 78
Web Port 52, 56, 80, 81
Web Port Close Button 53, 55, 56
Web Server Port 80
Web Server Settings 80
Web User Interface Programming 19, 29, 43
Web User Interface Setting List 44
Web User Interface Window 56
Document Version
2012-03
Notes
Document Version
2012-03
Administrator Guide
269
1-62, 4-chome, Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan
Copyright:
This material is copyrighted by Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd., and may be reproduced for internal
use only. All other reproduction, in whole or in part, is prohibited without the written consent of Panasonic
System Networks Co., Ltd.
Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd. 2009
PNQX2113NA YM0709YS11032
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising